Home

Garmin 2006T Pilot's Guide

1. 40 Omni Bearing Selector OBS 322 323 Other Statistics 231 233 Outside Air Temperature OAT 46 67 P Page Menus 25 Page GrOUpS ne nimon 21 30 Parallel Track eee 206 207 Passenger address 111 FV esas tie eae eee ee 111 PFD See Primary Flight Display PFD PFD failure 115 Pilot profiles 32 33 Pitch indication 50 EOWBIUD Sy SUC I raaa Primary Flight Display PFD 2 Controls 2 18 19 Sottkeys 20 22 Q Quick tuning 121 500 MHz 86 R RAIM 15 225 235 236 237 238 RANE a 143 Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM 15 16 235 321 Reminder messages 41 Required Vertical Speed 256 Required Vertical Speed Indicator RVSI 256 257 Reversionary Mode 115 INDEX Runway Minimum length 38 Surface 38 RX indi
2. sss Inverting a Flight Plan Flight Plan Views eeeeennnnnnnnne Closest Point of FPL ssseennnee TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 7 Vertical Navigation uu 214 Altitude Constraints ucciso ERE Rte 216 5 8 Procedures ssssssseee 220 Me QUIC ER ERIT 220 E EE OE mated enia l ventana sut riii iUS 223 Approaches sssesennnenneennes 225 5 9 Trip Planning 231 TONNO ouest depre eem Damm 23 5 10 RAIM Prediction see 235 5 11 Navigating a Flight Plan 239 5 12 Abnormal Operation 26 SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE 6 1 Terrain Proximity see 269 Displaying Terrain Proximity Data 210 Terrain Proximity Page 212 6 2 Traffic Information Service TIS 274 Displaying TRAFFIC Data eee 275 Traffic Map Page 2 8 TIS Alerts 219 System SEIS uias t ebria Eac Pert des pete ede ponto 280 SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 7 14 S TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot Optional 283 Flight Director Mode Annunciation 283 Altitude Preselect eene 283 SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ANB II I 285 SafeTaxi Database Cycle Number and Revision 288 8 2 Scheduler 291 APPENDICES Annunciations and A
3. 35 Audio voice 36 308 Eme 295 Alerts WindoW 70 Along Track Offset 204 205 E EEEN AE ENE 263 Dee esse eee 46 51 53 Altimeter barometric setting 46 Altitude PTT ESTEE ER ETE 35 CS all E ae 216 Altitude alerting 72 Altitude constraints 250 Annunciations System 9 297 Test ton 11 294 Annunciations softkey 70 Annunciation Window 47 70 Annunciator lights 108 Approach 322 Activating 229 OU e ee 197 226 228 Removing 229 APR softkey 228 234 D Mn rc eee 56 Pi al alatis mesa 35 Arrival procedure 181 195 223 225 248 250 259 Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS 3 12 13 Attitude Indicator 46 50 Audio alerting system 294 Audio Panel 2 Audio Panel
4. 2 cc TT gt O ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INSTRUMENTS INDEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN 1 4 SYSTEM OPERATION NOTE The G950 system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs Refer to the Appendices for further information regarding system specific alerts The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high speed communication As shown in Figure 1 1 each IAU is connected to the on side display This section discusses normal and reversionary G950 display operation AHRS modes GPS receiver operation and G950 System Annunciations DISPLAY OPERATION NOTE In normal operating mode backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD see Section 1 7 In reversionary mode it can be adjusted from the remaining display s In normal operating mode the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation attitude heading airspeed altitude vertical speed replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster see the Flight Instruments Section for more information The MFD normally displays a full color moving map with navigation information see the Flight Management Section while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System see the EIS Section Both displays offer control tor COM and NAV frequency selection Figure 1 6 G950 System Normal Operation In the event of a display
5. FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt BARMEESV TPE HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure 5 40 VOR Information Page AFCS The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are LOW ALTITUDE HIGH ALTITUDE and TERMINAL ADDITIONAL FEATURES Selecting a VOR 1 With the VOR Information Page displayed enter an identifier the name of the VOR or the city in which it s located in the VOR Box 2 Press the ENT Key 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Or APPENDICES INDEX 162 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 1 With the Nearest VOR Page displayed press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey 2 Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Or 1 With the Nearest VOR Page displayed press the MENU Key 2 Highlight Select VOR Window and press the ENT Key 3 Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box SIN3IAQHISNI 1H5I13 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft Also a NAV frequency j from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding area the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up
6. Magnetometer NO DESTINATION _ AIRPORT TIME Wido GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units GTX 33 Transponder __OR GIA 63W Integrated Figure A 4 G950 System Failure Annunciations Avionics Units The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX System Status Page Figure A 2 Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks failed by red Xs Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin authorized dealer informed Viewing LRU information 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Status Page 2 To place the cursor in the LRU Into Box a Press the LRU Softkey Or a Press the MENU Key b With Select LRU Window highlighted press the ENT Key 3 Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 297 JINVGIOAV INJINAJDVNVIN SND 8 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd OIGNV 1H5I13 IN31SAS S21V S34n1V314 1VNOILIQQV I TO TO m A m e X31GNI APPENDIX A GARMI N SS System Annunciation System Annunciation un n gt Ev o Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning Display system is not receiving zz vertical speed input from the i Te fe air data computer z Display system is not receiving attitude information from the T AHRS Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS Display system is not receiving AHRS calib
7. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 224 From the Airport Information Page first page in the WPT group select the STAR Softkey The Arrival Information Page is displayed defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page To select another airport press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor enter an identifier facility name city and press the ENT Key Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival The arrival is previewed on the map Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals Press the ENT Key to select the arrival The cursor moves to the Transition box The arrival is previewed on the map Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions Press the ENT Key to select the transition The cursor moves to the Runway box The arrival is previewed on the map Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways Press the ENT Key to select the runway The cursor moves to the Sequence box The arrival is previewed on the map Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN When plans change while flying IFR arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Removing an arrival from the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Win
8. 2 Selected as Course a ra Selected Aau Selected Heading t Bug Figure 2 18 Heading and Course Indications a lt TE e 56 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN Navigation angles track heading course bearing are corrected to the computed magnetic variation Mag Var or referenced to true north denoted T set on the AUX System Setup Page When an approach referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan the system generates a message to change the navigation angle setting to True at the appropriate time CRS 042 Fi Figure 2 19 Heading and Course Indications True Changing the navigation angle setting 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key e TRUE References angles to true north denoted with T e MAGNETIC Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation Mag Var 136 975 DEFAULT PROFILE CREATE DELETE 29 JUL 09 ALTITUDE BUFFER 200FT 22 14 13LCL CLASS B TMA OFF LOCAL 24hr CLASS C TCA OFF CLASS D OFF RESTRICTED OFF IUS NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC MOA MILITARY OFF SELECTED AUTO MAG VAR 6 E OTHER ADIZ OFF SYSTEM CDI 2 00NM DIS SPD NAUTICAL NM KT ARRIVA
9. 322 323 Skipping en 323 Waypoint Selection Submenu 175 184 188 235 Waypoint sequencing suspend 66 U ace eas 120 142 OG Gla eee ee ed eM 47 Z Zoom AU Osie 122 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin International nem 1200 East 151st O Olathe KS 66062 U S A p 913 397 8200 f 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc _ 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S p 503 391 3411 E f 503 364 2138 i x Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Cops Houndsdown Business Park SSS SS SSS Southampton 040 9RB U K SS S9 p 44 0870 8501241 f 44 0870 8501251 Garmin Corporation No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan p 886 02 2642 9199 f 886 02 2642 9099 WWW garmin com
10. 5 If desired define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways a Select RAD RAD using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the two reference waypoint identitiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs Or b Select RAD DIS using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the reference waypoint identifier the radial and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs Or C Select LAT LON using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the latitude and longitude into the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs 6 Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint 7 If desired change the storage method of the waypoint to TEMPORARY or NORMAL by moving the cursor to TEMPORARY and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt HAZARD AVOIDANCE PAGE MENU OPTIONS AFCS Use Present Position Auto Comment Create New User Waypoint Delete User Waypoint ADDITIONAL FEATURES Rename User Waypoint Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page t s Figure 5 44 User Waypoint Information Page Menu Ba t Creating user waypoints from map pages fs 1 Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint 2
11. PARALLEL TRACK OFFSET DIRECTION RIGHT 3NM MR X M ACTIVATE PARALLEL TRACK MCI TIFTO re TOP Airway V4 S SLN Airway V244 L AA HYS LAA Airway 263 TBE STATUS Press CLR to cancel CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT VS TGT VS REQ 128 200 IFTO p Enroute TOP p Airway V4 SLN SLN p Airway V244 L AA HYS p LAA p Airway V263 TBE VS TGT VS REQ Press the FPL key to 5 NM view the previous puge Figure 5 78 Parallel Track Active Offset Direction Activation Prompt 133 300 121 988 com Original Track Parallel Track Parallel Track Waypoints TIFTO p TOP p SLN p HYS p LAA p Activating Parallel Track affects the entire active flight segment e g enroute If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system the activation prompt is displayed but disabled Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct to or if the active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions results in the message Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry If an approach leg is active the status 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 207 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATU
12. Runwaylabes KK Restricted oo 0 X X X MOA Wilitay ooo X x x seWapons 0 X X J latitudellongitudeGid KK INADS o X X Class BAirspacesTMA d X X Jj ClassCAirpacesTCA 0 X X MesDAmps X X Jj DterAmpaesADZ TKK HRS X X p p o bsades ooo X X p po HandComyTet ooo X po po o Cites o o X po po po o odds ooo X po po o o alas ooo o X po po poo StatelProvince Boundaries PK fRiverllakeNames EX Table 5 3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level SYSTEM OVERVIEW gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt EIS FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt AUDIO PANEL amp CNS gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt FLIGHT M c LL Be o lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FEATURES AVOIDANCE gt lt gt lt gt lt APPENDICES INDEX 138 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI
13. 6368FT 348 4NM 637QFT MOGAL mahp 10000FT 168 G NM ACTIVE VNV WPT 10000FT at OPSHN 3NH VS TGT 7S6FPM FPA 2H VS REO 29 49 Figure 5 126 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF 254 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N FLIGHT MANAGEMENT 14 As the aircraft approaches OPSHN it may be desirable to adjust the speed or steepness of the upcoming descent The default Flight Path Angle FPA is 3 0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to maintain the 3 0 FPA To change the vertical flight path perform the following steps a Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field VS TGT as shown in Figure 5 127 b At this point the descent vertical speed can be selected or the FPA can be selected Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired selection field then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value Note the information now displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box Also note the offset waypoint orange box and gray circle are now displayed on the map The gray circle marks the Top of Descent TOD In this example vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a 3 0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of 10 000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint TRK 133 388 200 r p L i NORTH UP 121 308 com ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS g MOGAL Airway V263 TBE C I6368FT SPRINGS CEGIXJJ FALUR T
14. A U LL o lt lt The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information gez load frequencies COM NAV and lighting review runways and review instrument procedures that may be 25 involved in the flight plan See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies z auto tuning After engine startup the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is located After a flight plan has been loaded it defaults to the destination airport On a flight plan with multiple airports it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint 2 In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area the Airport Information Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled AIRPORT RUNWAYS and FREQUENCIES For airports with multiple runways information for each runway is available This information is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 152 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT 17 80 Topics 126kr__om258 _ mK258 ere 17 27 133 388 121 900 com z 2 19 08 STJ WPT AIRPORT INFORMATION 128 208 I COH xu Noni ue TM lt m A ec Airport Information Navigation Map ID Facility City Showing Selected Usage Type Region Airpor
15. JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Reversionary Mode with EIS 36 975 118 800 con 36 975 con saunivad TVNOILIGQV SAV SADIGNAddV Figure 2 32 Outside Air Temperature X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 67 A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN WIND DATA Wind direction and speed relative to the aircraft in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of the HSI When the window is selected for display but wind information is invalid or unavailable the window shows NO WIND DATA Wind data can be displayed in three different ways SYSTEM OVERVIEW Option 1 Option 2 FLIGHT eu 1H8 44 118 EA 5 DREM ERRESA Siei 115 19 eu 2 9H core ue m a LLJ ce 4 EIS No Data NO WIND DATA AUDIO PANEL amp CNS z Figure 2 33 Wind Data 5g E Displaying wind data 1 Select the PFD Softkey 9s 2 Select the WIND Softkey to display wind option Softkeys i5 3 Select one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed D e OPTN 1 Head and crosswind components e OPTN 2 Total wind direction and speed 2 e OPTN 3 Total wind direction with head and crosswind speed components 4 To remove the window select the OFF Softkey ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 68 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS VERTICAL NAVIGATION VNV INDICATIONS When a VNV flight plan has be
16. MSA MSG MSL MT mV MVFR N NAV NAVAID NDB NEXRAD nm NoPT NRST OAT OBS OFST OXY P ALT PA PA PASS PC PFD PI PIT PTCH POSN PPM P POS PRES PRESS PROC psi PT APPENDIX C Minimum Safe Altitude message Mean Sea Level meter millivolt s Marginal Visual Flight Rules north navigation NAVigation AID Non directional Beacon Next Generation Radar nautical mile s No Procedure Turn Required Procdeure shall not be executed without ATC clearance nearest Outer Marker Outside Air Temperature Omni Bearing Selector offset oxygen pressure altitude Passenger Address Proximity Advisory passenger s personal computer Primary Flight Display Procedure Turn to Course Intercept pitch position parts per million Present Position pressure procedure s procedure turn pounds per square inch Procedure Turn Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T S 4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IAN359VNVIN SND 8 si SIN3IAQHISNI M3IAM3AO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd Olanv 1H5I14 IN31SAS S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV gt m J m A m N XIGNI SYSTEM OVERVIEW AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e a LLI am e lt x INDEX APPENDIX C PIK PIT PWR QTY R RAD RAIM RAM REF REM REQ RES REV RF RMI RMI RNG RNWY ROL ROM rpm RST FUEL RSV RI RVRSNRY RX
17. PILOT COPLT e GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS 8 C ac CoM 2 k G E 4 7 arty 8 T 10 2 3 14 P S s 5 D 7 ICS ISOLATION PILOT O PASS gt Qu E lt x HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure 4 2 Audio Panel Controls AFCS A NOTE When a key is selected a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated COMI MIC Selects the 1 transmitter for transmitting COMI receive is simultaneously selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the 1 COM receiver to be heard COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 Key ADDITIONAL FEATURES 2 COMI When selected audio from the 1 COM receiver can be heard i 3 COM2 MIC Selects the 2 transmitter for transmitting COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when 2 this key is pressed allowing received audio from the 2 COM receiver to be heard COMI receive can be added by pressing the COMI Key 4 COM2 When selected audio from the 2 COM receiver can be heard m 5 COM3 MIC Reserved for optional COM radio c 82 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS 6 COM3 Reserved for optional COM radio M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 7 COM 1 2 Split COM operation key When selected the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot uses COM 2 TEL Selects and deselects telephone audio SINJWNYLSNI 1
18. and press the ENT Key 3 Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information The G950 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe specific alerts The alerting system s annunciation e tone may be tested from the System Status Page Refer to the Appendices for airframe specific alerts o9 n gt Testing the system annunciation tone m 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Status Page 2 Press the ANN TEST Softkey Or a Press the MENU Key b Highlight Enable Annunciator Test Mode and press the ENT Key S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1VNOILIQQV QuVZvH 1H5DI14 S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 11 A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 1 GARMIN AHRS OPERATION SYSTEM E Lu gt e A NOTE Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy The Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS performs attitude heading and vertical acceleration os calculations for the G950 System utilizing GPS magnetometer and air data in addition to information from its E internal sensors Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs GPS Data available available unavailable AUDIO PANEL amp CNS available AHRS no AHRS no Mag AHRS Normal Mag Mode no A
19. gt ME SHATTAN Keele 2 KHHK c FORT MA LEY NORTH KERI J24 JU SEN TITY B1 ep WE EI ABILENE za P KSLN5a INA High Altitude Airway me Jet Route E E U532 aS KHPRHCPHERSON gt OU Figure 5 22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page z i z i m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 139 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N n z Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilots discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY Softkey z ts presses or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page The Airway range can also be e programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number n Displaying removing airways oz 1 Press the MAP Softkey E 2 Press the AIRWAYS Softkey Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed 3 Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only 4 Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only 5 Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways No airways are displayed Or 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airways group and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRWAYS field 5 Turn the FMS Knob to select Off All LO Only or HI Only a
20. i ee B 2 Press the ANN TEST Softkey Or a Press the MENU Key b Highlight Enable Annunciator Test Mode and press the ENT Key DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 988 com ee 15 AUX SYSTEM STATUS 128 200 AD cone HRST APT x l KMCI m s 4 AIRFRAME Wn KANSAS CITY INTL STATUS SERIAL NUMBER VERSION ATRFRAHE P2006T a S COMI T SYS SOFTWARE VERSION e ine CRG PART NUHBER A o COM2 SYSTEH 10 z GOC1 CHECKLIST GIAI Q1L 19R I 1g801x159 J eee cy DATABASE L4 L NRST FREQS GHAI eS BASEMAP uu GHU1 z 38i DWTDE T D REGION WORLDWIDE lt x ds BP51 T 3 0 VERSION 3 00 KMCI 128 375 cpsz 1B GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2008 DEST APT JI GRSI m SAFETAXI HO DESTINATION Paitin p z i AIRPORT G51 EBIONM NETS M VERSION A O FLT 00 01 51 J GS2 CYCLE E GTX EFFECTIVE N e HFD1 1 9 15 EXPIRES 11 FEB 18 E Lm ebd LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2005 lt x i AVIATION t cil nee Pb ere i REGION HORLDWIDE AUTO ARFRM DBASE ANN TEST i 2 Select to Test V Annunciation Tone LL d Figure A 2 System Status Page Annunciation Tone Testin I ADDITIONAL FEATURES ue Lu c c Lu a a lt x INDEX 294 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS The G950 Alerting System uses four alert levels M3IAH3AO IN31SA
21. lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is shown at the top of the display The information includes the name and class of airspace the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level MSL and the floor in feet MSL 17 80 ToP cs 126kr pm258 mRk258 ew17 27 133 300 121 900 com 15 580 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 COM2 17 4NM 2 6 ELEV 1335FT FAA KANSAS CITY ARTCC MIL T 00rr msi W0971267 Airspace NORTH UP p Map Pointer on Airspace 5QNM MAP DCLTR Figure 5 10 Navigation Map Map Pointer on Airspace Panning the map 1 Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer 2 Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map 3 Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft s current position Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Reviewing information for an airport NAVAID or user waypoint M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 1 Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint 2 Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint 3 Press the GO BACK Softkey the CLR Key or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint 17 80 SS DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 980 com 15 5
22. By default the Navigation Status Box on the MFD is set to display ground speed GS distance to next waypoint DIS estimated time enroute ETE and enroute safe altitude ESA These four data fields can be changed to display the following information Bearing BRG Distance DIS Desired Track DTK Endurance END Enroute Safe Altitude ESA Estimated Time of Arrival ETA Estimated Time Enroute ETE Fuel on Board FOB Fuel over Destination FOD e Ground Speed GS Minimum Safe Altitude MSA Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW True Air Speed TAS Track Angle Error TKE e Track TRK Vertical Speed Required VSR e Crosstrack Error XTK TERRY V o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 The Navigation Status Box on the PFD is not affected by these changes flight plan distance and bearing information are displayed at all times Changing the information shown in the MFD Navigation Status Box 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page j 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box i 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the data options list and press the ENT Key E GS DTK TRK ETE mI EH sF WO ed mp 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5I13 JINVGIOAV Q
23. KCOS RNAV 35RGPs LPV x RW35R map i 5 1 NH 6368F1 6 4NM MOGAL mahp 6 6N M E Sc E Lr E eu lt x Figure 5 73 Stored Flight Plan Page Approach Inserted APPENDICES INDEX 198 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE The G950 can store up to 99 flight plans numbered 1 through 99 The active flight plan is erased when the G950 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated Details about each stored flight plan can be viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page Viewing information about a stored flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one dick to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 4 The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure destination total distance and enroute safe altitude information for the selected Flight Plan 5 Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan 6 Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page 17 80 ToP ss 116 pTk278 rR334 ErE 19 08 133 3000 121 980 com 15 58 STJ FPL FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG 128 200 CON2 _NORTH UP Bur yh Pe EA S KMKC KCOS Flight Plan Name m2 KMKC KCOS Commen
24. KMKC KCOS FSHER Sa thaghe y PYNON i eM Approach KCOS RNAV 35RcGPs LPV HABUK iaf M FALUR ENS CEGIX faf cast SEKAS RW35R map 65368FT MOGAL mahp HOLD CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT TIME TO TOD Press the FPL key to 20nn view the previous page VIEW CNCL VNV Figure 5 141 Establishing the Holding Pattern 27 The aircraft maintains 10 000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5 142 EET p168 TRK 168 ErTE 0279 133 388 121 988 com FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 115 200 come ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS SHER PYN N Approach KCOS RNAV HABUK laf FALUR CEGIX faf RH3bR mop 5358FT MOGAL mahp CURRENT YNY PROFILE ACTIVE WNW WPT L FT of V5 TGT FPH FPA LAM V5 REG a ard nda cut pre s oec V DEY AAS Press thn FPL kry ta view the previous pogan VIEW CNEL VNV Figure 5 142 Hold Established Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 5 12 ABNORMAL OPERATION M3IAH3AO IN31SAS This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications NOTE Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute ENR or Oceanic OCN phase of flight In all other phases an invalid GPS solution produces a NO GPS POSITION annunciation on the map and the G950 stops using GPS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of fligh
25. S21V Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks S34n1V14 1VNOILIQQV Figure 4 44 Play Key S329IlaN3ddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 111 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E SPLIT COM OPERATION 2 L T A NOTE Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation T of the tuned frequencies If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together interference may be heard during transmission on the other radio 22 LENIN CR rs E During Split COM operation both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios The pilot can still monitor NAVI NAV2 ADF DME and MKR Audio as selected but the copilot is only able to monitor COM2 gt Pressing the COM 1 2 Key selects Split COM operation The COM 1 2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating Split COM operation COMI and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers are active Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1 2 Key again at which time the annunciator is extinguished When Split COM operation is selected COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot The COMI MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilots microphone PTT is pressed The COM2 MIC Annunciator flashes when the copilot microphone PTT is pressed ua A Q od LLI P a c lt x COM1 Radio is Used b
26. Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation no 22 PILOT Knob Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL ne or SQ Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch B adjustment gt 23 PASS Knob Turn to adjust Copilot Passenger intercom volume or squelch The MAN SQ Key must be m selected to allow squelch adjustment DISPLAY BACKUP Button Manually selects Reversionary Mode 2 J S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 83 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N 4 2 COM OPERATION COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION oz NOTE During PA Mode the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color E changes to white indicating that neither COM transmitter is active E A NOTE When turning on the G950 for use the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active COM transceiver state prior to shutdown The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields the two active frequencies are on the left side and the two standby frequencies are on the right The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission audio from the other COM radio is muted LL e ds e a EJ lt x An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver
27. TPA 1681 FT TOWER 118 700 LONGEST RUNWAY 5099 100 NAST FREQS KTOP 121 275 DEST APT NO DESTINATION AIRPORT TINE FLT 04 09 07 ARTCC Figure 4 26 NRST Nearest Frequencies WPT VOR Information WPT Airport Information and 190 01146 00 Rev A T FREQS ARTCC RUNWAYS 04 22 e 121 988 com A2FT 10B0FT COME RD SURFACE TAD ETE W 1 1 4 xt om ide TRK 14 WPT VOR INFORMATION 128 288 WOR DE Am MCI VORTAC l MEET QUENCIES M KANSAS CITY MO NORTH LP ure 1L FREQ 118 VY Rx 121 275 RANCE 121 908 INFORMATION JND HIGH ALTITUDE S E R 121 900com a D0M2 REST AIRPORT 9 1 3un RK 4d FREQUENCIES NORTH UP 128 200 NEAREST ARTCC 4 TY 4 2 CTTY I KANSAS Li J DIS 18NH NEAREST FSS WICHITA BRG 190 122 450 NEAREST WX ASDS ATIS 128 250 ASOS 128 250 121 225 121 275 FSS NRST Nearest Airports Pages Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T Kb4 INFORMATION PHILIP BII TOPEK 121 908 con WAYS conz lt lt fFT e 128 208 NEAREST AIRPORTS KTO 9 c 4 KO 194 ary 14 wv LARD MUN 12 1 988 com COH2 5 8Nn 14 2NM 19 5NH 23 2Nh VERTU SO TFT HARD SURFACE 1BOFT AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E AUTO TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION A NOTE The primary NAV frequency is auto tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS Localizer approach T E A NOTE When a
28. amp CNS FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 13 Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5 126 These altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text indicating these values are designated for use in computing vertical deviation guidance Note To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance perform the following a Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor b Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude C Press the CLR Key d Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor After making the altitude non designated it is displayed as white text Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix FAF and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be designated for vertical guidance These altitude values are always displayed as white text as in Figure 5 126 Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point MAP is given using the WAAS GPS altitude source therefore the displayed altitude values are for reference only ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS DTK DIS ALT FSHER 352 9 8NH 10000FT PYNON 352 11 9u d 10000FT Approach KCOS RNAV 35RGPS LPY HABUK iaf 021 5 SNM 9000FT FALUR 261 5 QNM 8600FT CEGIX fof 351 6 ONM 78880rr RW35R map 351 5 1 NH
29. 125 158 LONGEST RUNWAYS HIL 19R 18381x158 1R 19L 7301x156 TIME ETE 11 04 ETA 22 40LCL FLT 8806721 Destination Mode KMCI to KICT Flight Plan Loaded A NRST APT 4 KLWC LAWRENCE MUN Pos 7 3 NM NE VSR 3340 FPM BERG 233 TPA 1856 FT CTAF 123 000 LONGEST RUNWAY 15 33 5700x106 is NRST FREQS n ARTCC KANSAS CITY 123 880 ASOS RLWC 121 225 No DESTINATION AIRPORT TIME FLT OBO8 37 Auto Mode No Flight Plan Loaded AUTO GARMIN mU KLWC LAWRENCE MUN Pos 7 3 NM NE VSR 3336 FPH BERG 233 CTAF 123 000 LONGEST RUNWAY 15 33 5700x106 f DESTINATION AIRPORT TIHE FLT adm 44 y Destination Mode No Flight Plan Loaded Figure 5 31 Navigation Information Display Modes of Operation The next section describes the four Data Boxes within the Navigation Information Display Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT NEAREST AIRPORT BOX The Nearest Airport Box is displayed in automatic and destination mode When no airports are within 200 NM of the aircraft position the Nearest Airport Box displays NONE WITHIN 200 NM When the aircraft position is within 200 NM of an airport the fields shown in Figure 5 32 are displayed in the Nearest Airport Box M3IAYJAO IN31SAS NRST APT On KWC 2 m eie li SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Pos
30. 19 34 46 55 66 Navigation Information Display 145 146 268 at 226 229 239 250 259 263 265 267 316 322 323 a NAV 324 Database 177 216 217 HSI double oreen lt e ME 93 Ma PERENNE 117 129 155 177 HSI magenta arrow 93 Se Batic asc este ered ate BIG Fe OTE raoa sedem x Navigation NAV Frequency Box 46 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN Navigation source 60 62 Navigation Status Box 46 Nav radio selection 93 Nearest Airports29 38 117 118 151 154 155 156 157 177 Page 155 156 157 PAIS PACES eaei 29 35 170 172 UE S ECONS eeecesese eiue need e teste 29 158 159 NDB 29 161 User Waypoint 165 VOR 29 158 163 Nearest Airport s 228 Nearest airports frequency tuning 87 Normal display operation 8 O OBS Mode 65 66 Obstacles 301 302 Odometer
31. 25 HE Figure 4 40 Speaker Key D lt ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 108 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS INTERCOM The Audio Panel includes a four position intercom system ICS and a stereo music input for the pilot copilot and up to four passengers The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft radios M3IAH3AO IN31SAS wv CREW d SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 PILOT COPLT ICS ISOLATION Figure 4 41 Intercom Controls PILOT KEY COPLT KEY i Pilot Hears Copilot Hears Passenger Hears Annunciator Annunciator Selected radios aural Selected radios aural Selected radios aural OFF OFF alerts pilot copilot alerts pilot copilot alerts pilot copilot passengers music passengers music passengers music il Selected radios aural eye EN ON OFF passengers passengers alerts pilot music music SI3 go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 Selected radios Selected radios aural OFF ON aural alerts pilot Copilot alerts pilot passengers passengers music music ON ON Selected radios aural Selected radios aural Passengers alerts pilot copilot alerts pilot copilot music Table 4 1 ICS Isolation Modes JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH B T1 A N Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated During Pilot isolation the pilot can he
32. 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Turning it clockwise displays a blank Waypoint Information Window turning it counter clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan nearest recent user or airway m waypoints 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 235 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e 4 Enter the identifier facility or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of Pu waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry gt 5 Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key 6 Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key E 7 Press the ENT Key with COMPUTE RAIM highlighted to begin the computation E Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position 1 Select the AUX GPS Status Page T 2 Press the FMS Knob The RAIM Prediction WAYPOINT field is highlighted 3 Press the MENU Key highlight Set WPT to Present Position and press the ENT Key 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry 5 Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key 6 Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key 7 Press the ENT Key with COMPUTE RAIM highlighted to begin the computation Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint time and date is displ
33. 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key Figure 6 3 5 Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections Figure 6 4 e TERRAIN DATA Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown e OBSTACLE DATA Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product ON OFF range settings 7 Press the ENT Key to select an option 8 Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings PAGE MENU MAP SETUP OPTIONS Declutter GROUP Map ORIENTATION North up AUTO ZOOM All On MAX LOOK FWD MIN LOOK FWD TIME OUT LAND DATA On Figure 6 2 Navigation Map Page Menu TRACK VECTOR Off WIND VECTOR Off NAV RANGE RING Off TOPO DATA OFF TOPO SCALE Off TERRAIN DATA n OBSTACLE DATA lt On FUEL RNG RSV Off Measure Bearing Distance Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page MAP SETUP Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page Figure 6 3 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Figure 6 4 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Map Group 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 271 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv sia 1N3IAN35VNVIA 1H5DI14 gt lt Oo gt A m IO FA S34n1V313 S329IlaN
34. 87 93 Standby frequency field 84 Stereo headsets 108 Stuck microphone 115 Sunrise Sunset 232 Symbols map 327 System Annunciations 9 293 Message advisories 299 Power up TIME sac cara cae eee ea 33 System time 46 T Ui E ME 301 Color indications 329 Tenaln SN Sras 283 Timer Departure 40 Flight 40 TOPO DATA 130 131 140 Top of Descent TOD 255 256 262 3 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T ES JINVGIOAY LNAI NVI SND 8 a SINJINNYLSNI MIAH3AO QuVZVH 1H5I14 TaNvd Olanv 1H5I14 IN31SAS S34n1V314 1VNOILIQQV gt J O rm A m N AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW ADDITIONAL FEATURES un LLI e Lu Bln Bia lt INDEX TOPO SCALE 132 Track MM 55 Traffic Adv
35. A Baro Transition Alert is provided to notify the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing the baro transition altitude 1f the aircraft is at least 500 feet below the transition altitude and then climbs through this altitude and the STD BARO Softkey has not been pressed the barometric pressure setting flashes in light blue until the pressure setting is changed 1f the aircraft is at least 500 feet above the transition altitude and then descends through this altitude and the barometric pressure setting has not been changed from STD BARO the setting flashes in light blue until it is changed Figure 2 12 Setting the Baro Transition Alert 1 2 3 4 5 6 OFF 190 01146 00 Rev A Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight OFF or ON in the BARO TRANSITION ALERT box Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key With the altitude field highlighted turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude and press the ENT Key To cancel the selection press the FMS Knob 30 341N STD BARO Pressure setting flashes during climb above Pressure setting flashes during descent below transition altitude if the STD BARO Softkey transition altitude to indicate setting has not has not been pressed been changed from STD BARO AUX SYSTEM SETUP 136 975 DEFAULT PROFILE CREAT
36. ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN uU cc gt ui a n The G950 allows the pilot to insert pre defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a flight plan The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport departure arriving at Z an airport arrival and landing at an airport approach See the procedures section for more details EG os GS DTK TRK E 133 300 121 900 com i FPL STORED FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 con 2 Flight Plan Name lt MCI TIFTO 287 510m Flight Plan Waypoint Enroute List TOP Pf 32 3MM Airway 4 SLN Zu SLN 260 97 7 S Airway V244 LAA a HYS 262 77 1MM ws LAA 251 165NM x Lo Airway V263 TBE scaena E Tr bor RTOPS Softkeys New Waypoint Load Departure a Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan 5 3 co do Figure 5 64 Stored Flight Plan Page N DP lt j zs Sc E E eu Ow et APPENDICES INDEX 192 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT DEPARTURE DP A Departure Procedure DP is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan Only one departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan The route is defined by selection of a departure the transition waypoints and a runway 17 80 ToPlcs RE ERR EC DEBERI 133 300 121 908 com 15 50 STJ PROC DEPARTURE LOADING NORTH UP b gt PUBLIC Departure Airport WHEELER DOW
37. HI ALT AIRWAY Table 5 4 Airway Range Information TRACK VECTOR 7 The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error The track vector is a dashed light blue line segment with an arrowhead attached to the end extended to a predicted location gt along the current aircraft track The track vector look ahead time is selectable 30 sec 60 sec default 2 min Qo 5 min 10 min 20 min and determines the length of the track vector The arrowhead is continuously pointing 2 x to the predicted aircraft location m Track Vector IDE gt gt c m m Figure 5 24 Navigation Map Track Vector JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Displaying removing the track vector 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option P 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Select the Map group 4 Press the ENT Key mS gt 5 Highlight the TRACK VECTOR field m A 6 Select On or Off Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option The flashing cursor highlights the look ahead time field Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time Press the ENT Key B 7 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page E S ra x 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 141 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zm L MAP SETUP T2 GROUP uU cc gt S Map o ORIENTATION Nort
38. JINVGIOAV QuVZvH A NOTE DME radio installation is optional i The DME Information Window Figure 2 22 is displayed above the BRGI Information Window and shows e the DME label tuning mode NAVI NAV2 or HOLD frequency and distance When a signal is invalid the distance is replaced by NM Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios no i Displaying the DME Information Window ca mae 1 Press the PFD Softkey P 2 Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window z 3 To remove the DME Information Window press the DME Softkey again m z 2 J S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 59 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMI N COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR CDI zu E 3 6 NOTE If a heading change of greater than 105 with respect to the course is made the CDI on the Arc HSI switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing E o TT oS The Course Deviation Indicator CDI moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course If the course deviation data is not valid the CDI is not displayed 360 HSI Flight Phase Arc HSI anas i Navigation 1203 Navigation E Source ource OW p SE Flight B wA 4 Phase zZ E 3 J 19 Scale Crosstrack ENS oY Error i MM Mns CDI CD
39. Press the ENT Key The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position 166 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN A NOTE If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature one of three things happens upon pressing the ENT Key 1 information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint 2 a menu pops up allowing a choice between Review Airspaces or Create User Waypoint or 3 a new waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter a user waypoint name up to six characters Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name The first reference waypoint box is highlighted If desired define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways a Select RAD RAD using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the two reference waypoint identitiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs Or b Select RAD DIS using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the reference waypoint identifier the radial and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs Or C Select LAT LON using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the latitude and longitude into the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint If desired change the storage m
40. RWY EXTENSION Intersection INT WAYPOINT BEEN NI AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 5 Non directional Beacon NDB WAYPOINT VOR VOR WAYPOINT 3 A U LL o lt lt Class B Airspace TMA CLASS B TMA Class C Airspace TCA CLASS C TCA HAZARD AVOIDANCE Class D Airspace CLASS D 3 AFCS Restricted Area RESTRICTED 500 00 20 100 30 30 00 500 500 00 500 Military Operations Area MOA MILITARY 500 500 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Other Air Defense Interdiction Zone OTHER ADIZ 250 l 50 3 Off 15 15 150 200 200 150 200 200 200 500 Temporary Flight Restriction TFR APPENDICES El B Table 5 2 Aviation Symbol Information INDEX 134 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT o SYMBOL SETUP s lt m All pages with maps can display land symbols roads lakes borders etc Land symbols can be removed ze totally turned off Displaying removing all land symbols 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the Map Setup option SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the Map option 3 Highlight the LAND DATA field 4 Select On or Off 5 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page SI3 MAP SETUP GROUP Map SND 8 TANVd OIGN
41. Symbol 7 Terrain Proximity display enabled AS ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency me f F Y Se Traffic display enabled Map Pointer when panning 2 Loss of hazard avoidance feature TT a white X is shown over the symbol fon iocanspl esee mann fem to indicate not available e g traffic i symbol Measuring Pointer TRAET Wind Vector Overzoom Indicator Non threat Traffic AUDIO PANEL amp CNS User Waypoint Proximity Advisory a Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint zs lt x E Parallel Track Waypoint Traffic Advisory z z Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint NA i Top of Descent TOD Bottom of Descent BOD W lt Navigating using Dead Reckoning za Ce Ou lt x N Lu c Lu e e lt INDEX 328 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL LLL LL LL LL APPENDIX F OBSTACLE DATABASE Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle RENS E E lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude Table G 1 Obstacle Colors TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude Aircraft Altitude Red terrain is above or within 100 ft below 100 ft Threshold the aircraft altitude Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the
42. The softkey label then returns to ALERTS If alerts are still present the ALERTS label is displayed in white with black text Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages System Annunciations Typically a large red X appears over instruments whose information is supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit LRU See the G950 System Annunciations Section for more information System Annunciation Red X CEU Annunciation L Window ALERTS TRAFFIC FAIL Traffic device has failed R FUEL LOW Right fuel tank is low si Alerts Window L FUEL LOW Left fuel tank is low XPDR 1200 ALT LCL 21 35 11 Softkey IDENT TMR REF NRST ALERTS er DS ALERTS pana anon Figure A 1 G950 Alerting System 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T APPENDIX A 293 JINVGIOAV INJINAJDVNVIN SND 8 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd OIGNV 1H5I13 IN31SAS S21V S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV I a a m Le m ue X31GNI APPENDIX A GARMI N zi Audio Alerting System The G950 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met e See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information Should the 1 GIA 63W fail audio and voice 2 alerts are not generated The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX System Status Page z Testing the system annunciation tone zS 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Status Page
43. V244 LAA HYS Airway V263 TBE TBE 210 m CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT T at VS TGT FPM FPA Press the FPL key to 3 NH view the pravious poga Figure 5 112 V4 Now Active Leg 6 The aircraft continues on heading 290 When crosstrack distance is less than 2 0 nm the XTK disappears from the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2 0 nm distance from the centerline of the next Course 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 245 NE SINJINNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m m S3u01V34 JNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI GARMIN 7 Asthe CDI approaches center the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5 113 17 80 ToPics 124kr pTtK258 TRK 269 ETE 22 12 133 300 121 988 com 15 58 SIE 2 FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 COM2 j P NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN j KMKC KCOS BENT ET SLN Airway V244 L AA ce ESI KMHK i eS prunis S e Enroute 10 10 f FORT RILEY NORTH H TOP Ep Xf d Airway V4 SLN HYS LAA Airway V263 TBE Press the FPL key to view the previous page MAP NEW WPT VIEW VV PROF CNCL WNV VNV B ATK OFST ACT LEG SHW CHRT CHKLIST Figure 5 113 Turn on to Active Leg 8 AtSLN Victor Airway 244 V244 is intercepted Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD N
44. a F l 12 NM N IEEE Ris M mud 4u078 4 FE NE um Aircraft VSR 0 FPM in Ph 5 h Position BRG 193 3 1 TPA 1900 FT t CTAF 122 900 Lu Ta a cn B ge rad BOARDING AWA F E pu __Taxiwa TOMER of E a E Identification DS H TERMINALS 3 eren ROWS WES Jd TT i B on ROING 8 REA D W TE b E a a PA T n MER ic uu 4 Airport Hot Se us CUSIIOHS f 9 Spot Outline 5 NO DESTINATION ORN AREA C J F s lt AIRPORT i j j m OG Airport Te Features e Inh ay DCLTR SHW CHRT DCLTR Softkey lt a Removes gt i Taxiway Markings lt Figure 8 1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page The DCLTR Softkey declutter label advances to DCLTR 1 DCLTR 2 and DCLTR 3 each time the softkey is ressed for easy recognition of decluttering level Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and lt airport feature labels Pressing the DCLTR 1 Softkey removes VOR station ID the VOR symbol and intersection names if within the airport plan view Pressing the DCLTR 2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure Pressing the DCLTR 3 Softkey cycles back to the original map detail Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section E zu Sc E Ow lt x APPENDICES INDEX 286 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 RevA A GARMIN ADDITIONAL FEATU
45. any map 7 page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly x showing the traffic advisory When terrain or traffic alerts clear the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the active waypoint The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD s and MFD Control of the ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum look forward times set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance to display based upon the aircrafts ground speed ADDITIONAL FEATURES Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on t the map are decluttered If this is not acceptable lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits A the auto zoom to an acceptable range LL e Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational awareness may not be what is desired Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness gt lt Lt e 122 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as waypoints sequence To avoid t
46. arrivals or approaches as needed The G950 allows flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD The flight plan is displayed on maps using different line widths colors and types based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being flown departure enroute arrival approach or missed approach Flight Plan Leg Type Symbol SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Z Non heading Leg in the current flight segment 22 az Heading Leg not in the current flight segment EL LL Non heading Leg not in the active flight segment Turn Anticipation Arc IDE gt gt c m m JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Table 5 7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned gt off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated When storing flight plans with an approach departure P or arrival the G950 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints If the database is changed or updated the G950 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified If an approach departure or arrival procedure is no longer available the procedure is deleted from the 5 affected stored flight plan s and an alert is displayed see Miscellaneous Messages in A
47. g uem Fuel over Destination FOD E zz Ground Speed GS g Left Holding Pattern True Air Speed TAS aa e Track TRK Right DME Arc Vertical Speed Required VSR Left DME Arc Crosstrack Error XTK IDE s i c m S m Right Holding Pattern e Minimum Safe Altitude MSA JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH DTK TRK ETE MFD Navigation Status Box The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the AUX System Setup Page The default selections in order left to right are GS DTK TRK and ETE Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box zS 1 Select the System Setup Page E 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor D 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list 2 5 Select the desired data A 6 Press the ENT Key Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting SS 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 119 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 5 2 USING MAP DISPLAYS Map displays are used extensively in the G950 to provide situational awareness in fli
48. is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit 2 0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute 1 0 nm for terminal and 0 3 nm for non precision approaches During oceanic enroute and terminal phases of flight RAIM is available nearly 10096 of the time The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within 15 min of the specified arrival date and time In most cases performing RAIM prediction is not necessary However in some cases the selected approach may be outside ERR VS o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 the WAAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended approach m Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches there may be times when RAIM is not available The G950 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course the approach does not become active as indicated by gt the messages Approach is not active If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF the missed approach i procedure must be flown as Predicting RAIM availability 1 Select the GPS Status Page 2 Press the RAIM So
49. m 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 203 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page F 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited 4 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored oz Fight Plan Page is displayed F 5 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight Remove procedure p 6 Press the ENT Key The Remove procedure name gt from flight plan window is displayed 7 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and i press the ENT Key 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS NAMES The comment field or name of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification and sorting AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Changing the active flight plan comment 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field 3 Usethe FMS Knobs to edit the comment FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ad 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the changes 32 5 Press the
50. n Lat Long i port 1200 ALT LOL 21 31 42 z IDENT TMR REF WNRST ALERTS z z Figure 5 33 Airport Information Window on PFD a gt The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in the event of an in flight emergency In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled NEAREST AIRPORTS INFORMATION RUNWAYS FREQUENCIES and APPROACHES IDE s i c m S m The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport Up to five nearest airports one runway up to three frequencies and up to three approaches are visible at one time If there are more than can be shown each list can be scrolled If there are no items for display in a boxed area text indicating that fact is displayed The currently selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuVzvH XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 155 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Z Navigation Map Showing Nearest Airport Nearest ANDON 6E LL 17 80 Telos 1211 ow287 m28 CVITENHU 133 300 121 900 con 15 50 sh a c 128 200 Nearest Airports ID Type T z Bearing Distan
51. then ramps up to 2 0 nm enroute mode at 30 nm from the departure airport When 31 nm from the destination the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2 0 nm back to 1 0 nm terminal mode At 2 0 nm before the FAF during an active approach the CDI scale transitions down further based on the type of approach activated LNAV LNAV VNAV LPV When a missed approach is activated the CDI is set to 0 3 nm See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling gt m i rm A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 323 APPENDIX D GARMI N e Why pots THE HSI wor RESPOND LIKE A VOR WHEN OBS mone is ACTIVE w tc nz Unlike a VOR the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired course not on the angular relationship to the destination Therefore the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant 7 regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the destination oS xi WHAT IS THE CORRECT MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE How IS THE MISSED APPROACH HOLDING POINT SELECTED To comply with TSO specifications the G950 does not automatically sequence past the MAP The first waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected 2 after crossing the MAP All published missed approach procedures must be followed as indicated on the approach plate To exe
52. 12 61 z poi a 27 0NH 292 ELEV 1312FT FAA KANSAS CITY ARTCC MIL 7 0 FT ms W09721 80 NORTH UP LL Lu O T Map Pointer U E Ne o a un W EL lt x tu DCLTR zul os Ee Figure 5 8 Navigation Map Map Pointer Activated on Tm i NOTE The map is normally centered on the aircraft s position If the map has been panned and there has z been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position a and the flashing pointer is removed t 2 H e 124 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT When the Map Pointer is placed on an object the name of the object is highlighted even if the name was not originally displayed on the map When any map feature or object is selected on the map display pertinent information is displayed 17 88 TOP cs 133 308 121 988 com 15 58 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 CON2 Information about Point Pits 385539 of Interest Map Pointer on PO OX DCLTR Figure 5 9 Navigation Map Map Pointer on Point of Interest 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 125 NE SINJINNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m S3u01V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS A U LL o lt
53. 6 190 01146 00 Rev A Abnormal Operation Stuck MI GEOP NONE adeste n rt aatenhtetid testet COM Tuning Failure eene Audio Panel Fail safe Operation PFD Failure Reversionary Mode SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Iuppitam sssrinin sass Navigation Status Box sse Using Map Displays sss Map Orientation sene Jens Map PIMC ENERO Measuring Bearing and Distance Ivano P U Map SUID DU MACK Y uo T Wina VEGI ON d Nav Range Ring nnn Fuel Range Ring cesus Navigation Information Display WaPo ceea AOIG paene Intersections User Waypoints eeeennnnnnne AE E EE E EE E A Direct to Navigation sss Flight Planning sssss Flight Plan Creation eee Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan Adding Airways to a Flight Plan Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan Flight Plan Storage senes Flight Plan Editing eee Along Track Offsets sss MULA NN ACK ERE Activating a Flight Plan Leg
54. 6 COM Knob Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver large knob for MHz small knob for kHz Press to move the tuning box light blue box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COMI and COM2 go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV A COM Frequency Transfer Key Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies Press and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency 121 500 MHz automatically into the active frequency held COM VOL SQ Knob Controls COM audio volume level Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on and off Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 3 Nearest Airports Window Display by pressing NRST Softkey ENT Key Validates or confirms an Auto tune selection JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH FMS Knob Flight Management System Knob used to enter transponder codes and Auto tune entries when NRST Window is present Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off The large knob moves the cursor in the window The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location A ua 12 Transponder Data Box Indicates the selected transponder code operating mode reply and ident status for the applicable transponder no pY E SO mz us r gt J m e 2 J m ae 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 81 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N MAN so co PLAY a Mb
55. Altitude Pa TERRAIN hee o Ded Terrain Legend ee See Figure 6 6 Terrain Proximity Page MAP TERRAIN PROXIMITY 136 975 118 000 conz v HDG UP GPS ALT Te Yellow Terrain Map Range Arcs Between 100 and 1000 Below the Aircraft Altitude Black Terrain Above or Within than 1000 100 Below the Below the Aircraft Altitude Aircraft Altitude TERRAIN 18 rr 1 aoe Terrain Legend Figure 6 7 Terrain Proximity Page ARC View 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 273 SND 8 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 13NYd OIGNV 1H5I14 IN31SAS I1N3IA359VNVIA 1H5I14 QuVZVH gt lt 2 z gt zZ A m S34n1V313 SADIGNAddV IVNOILIGGY S21V XIGNI HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N 6 2 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE TIS o x WARNING The Traffic Information Service TIS is intended for advisory use only TIS is intended to help the _2 pilot locate traffic visually It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic os E NOTE TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS capable terminal radar site Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems TAS and TIS Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent T indication A NOTE TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System TAS is installed Traffic Information Service TIS
56. Avionics Unit Integrated Avionics Unit S System Integration Processors System Integration Processors A I O Processors I O Processors VHF COM VHF COM VHF NAV LOC VHF NAV LOC rn GPS GPS E Glideslope Glideslope 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5I13 KN 63 KR 87 DME ADF optional optional Figure 1 3 G950 With Optional Additional Equipment JINVGIOAV QuVZvH NOTE For information on non Garmin optional additional equipment shown in Figure 1 3 consult the applicable optional interface user s guide This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment S3un1V13 SADIGNAddV TVNOILIGQV S21V X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 5 A svsreEMOVERVIEIN 1 1 1 GARMIN 1 2 SECURE DIGITAL SD CARDS SYSTEM gt ce Lu gt O A NOTE Ensure the G950 System is powered off before inserting an SD card E z A NOTE Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database 5 o The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital SD cards and are located on the upper right side of the display bezels Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots SD cards are used for aviation database 2 and system software updates as well as terrain database storage Installing an SD card 1 Insert the SD card in the SD card slot the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel 2 To
57. Awareness and Warning System Terminal Control Area Traffic Collision Avoidance System telephone temperature 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN TERM TF TFR T HDG TIS TIT TKE TMA TMR REF Topo Track Track Angle Error TRG TRK TRSA TRUNC TTL TURN TX UNAVAIL USR UTC UTM UPS V Vspeed VA VAPP VAR VD Vdc VERT Vertical Figure of Merit 190 01146 00 Rev A terminal Track Between Two Fixes Temporary Flight Restriction True Heading Traffic Information System Turbine Inlet Temperature Track Angle Error Terminal Maneuvering Area Timer Reference topographic Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position also Ground Track The angle difference between the desired track and the current track target track Terminal Radar Service Area truncated total procedure turn transmit unavailable user Coordinated Universal Time Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic Grid velocity airspeed Heading Vector to Altitude VOR approach variation Heading Vector to DME Distance volts direct current vertical A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft s vertical position APPENDIX C Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to Required VFOM VFR VHF VI VLOC VM VMC VNAV VNV VOL VOR VORTAC VPL VPROF VPTH VR VS VSI VSR VIF WAAS WARN WGS 84 WPT WW WX XFER XFR XPDR XTALK XTK descend climb from
58. Bars 190 01146 00 Rev A EE EE 5l Figure 1 13 GPS Status Page Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T o lt m JJ m TERRY NS s3un1V34 JONVdIOAV 1N3W3DVNVIN SND 8 SINAINNYISNI S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3NV4d Olanv sid LHONN4 X31GNI SYSTEM tc LLI gt le ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INSTRUMENTS INDEX A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 GARMIN GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power up when one GPS receiver has acquired satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal While the aircraft is on the ground the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal Also while airborne turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal If no failure message exists check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2 Discrepancies may indicate a problem GPS RECEIVER STATUS The GPS solution type ACQUIRING 2D NAV 2D DIFF NAV 3D NAV 3D DIFF NAV for the active GPS receiver GPS1 or GPS2 is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page When the receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation the receiver uses satellite orbital data collected continuously from the satelli
59. CITY ERG 209 NEAREST FSS 1 WICHITA Gs 134 DTK 14 TRK 14 ETE HD 121 988 com me ed 15 50 STJ NRST NEAREST AIRPORTS 128 200 Cor eae NORTH UP neaREST AIRPORTS KTOP 4 184 8 3NM di E 188 15 5Nn KLWC 4 120 21 41M 8K4 277 FART K91 883 28 5NM gli 2 18 fa ASUS ATIS INFORMATION PHILIP BILLARD MUN 7 TOPEKA KS 881F1 KOJEC ATIS 113 350 g 12 prk A79 TEATS ETE 1HHH e 121 908 com p 115 350 18 58 sTJ NAST NEAREST AIRSPALES 128 208 IB eon RUNWAYS E TER U MW aee m 04 22 HARD SURFACE WORT z E Saihai AIRSPACE ALERTS RA ANE eorna a 3002FT y QOFT d 5 a e RANGA CITY d dE FREQUENCIES AHEAD ASOS 2 KANSAS CITY CARA LEAMA GROUND ET E Tene APPROACHES KTOP ILS 13 KTOP LOC BC 31 AIRSPACE AGENCY if etis tres dv ied KANSAS CITY APP a e e VERTICAL LIMITS GDDBFT ms IE FREQUENCIES A MI E E o Ud ADU ALERTS FREQ MAP Figure 4 12 NRST Nearest Airspaces NRST Nearest Airports and NRST Nearest Frequencies Pages Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS FREQUENCY SPACING The G950 COM radios can tune either 25 kHz spacing 118 000 to 136 975 MHz or 8 33 kHz spacing 118 000 to 136 990 MHz for 760 channel or 3040 channel configuration When 8 33 kHz channel spacing is selected all of the 25 kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040 channel list M3IAH3AO IN31SAS COM channel
60. CITY OPSHN SW USA JINVGIOAV QuVZvH I G B S LOCATION users DIS S8 8NH SS Se aaa e 258 ACTIVATE di Figure 5 119 Enter VNV Offset Distance gt y g Enter the offset or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude In this case three miles 5 prior to OPSHN is entered In other words the G950 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an altitude m of 10 000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN z i S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 249 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N z h Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct to Note in Figure 5 120 the magenta arrow indicating the direct SE to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance and altitude that were previously entered The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no database specified altitudes therefore dashes are displayed Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN E Note the Direct to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure therefore phase of flight scaling for the CDI 2 changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying TERM on the HSI A NOTE If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database E that will be used as is the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the de
61. ENT Key If a flight plan is still active the G950 resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg S34n1V313 S32IaN3ddV TVNOILIGGV S21V XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 177 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 17 88 TOP cs 133 308 12 1 988 com 15 58 sts MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 con2 PAGE MENU OPTIONS Im rage Menu Cancel Direct To Navigation Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page KEEV ERUE KMOTH LOCATION BRG DIS COURSE Figure 5 51 Direct to Window Cancelling Direct to Navigation When navigating a direct to the G950 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination The course to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field COURSE on the Direct to Window Selecting a manual direct to course 1 2 3 4 5 Press the Direct to Key The Direct to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted Highlight the course field Enter the desired course Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to Reselecting the direct course from the current position 1 2 3 Press the Direct to Key The Direct to Window is displayed with the destinat
62. ER au eu q Traffic Advisory A 400 Below Climbing Non Threat Traffic a lt yf A Traffic Status UT gt ee Select SENSE STAN SAME to Mute TIS Not gt lt lable Figure 6 12 Traffic Map Page e jj 278 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN nazar AVOIDANCE TIS ALERTS When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next the following occur M3IAH3AO IN31SAS e A single Traffic voice alert is generated A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft the Traffic voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs increases For example when the first TA is displayed a voice and visual annunciation are generated As long as a single TA remains on the display no additional voice alerts are generated If a second E TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases another voice alert is generated P aL m M 10000 Min 1N3IA359VNVIA 1H5I13 Inset Map Displays When TA is Detected qYyvVZVH gt lt Oo gt A m BAG HSI FRMT BRG2 ALT UNIT STO BARO BACK Mi Figure
63. FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor i Changing a stored flight plan comment 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited B 4 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored F Flight Plan Page is displayed ze 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field a 6 Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment 7 Press the ENT Key to accept the changes 5 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor ALONG TRACK OFFSETS A waypoint having an along track offset distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan gt lt Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan and can be used to make the system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint Offset distances can be 204 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint Multiple offset wayp
64. ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2668 GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2668 GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2008 SAFETAXI SAFETAXI SAFETAXI REGION US VERSION 2 24 CYCLE 0954 EFFECTIVE EXPIRES 2 AUG 89 GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2669 REGION US VERSION 2 24 CYCLE 0954 EFFECTIVE 02 l 49 EXPIRES GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 26609 REGION NOT AVAILABLE VERSION CYCLE EFFECTIVE EXPIRES AUDIO PANEL amp CNS AVIATION AVIATION AVIATION SafeTaxi Database Not Installed Current Date Is before Effective Date SafeTaxi Database has Expired Figure 8 6 AUX System Status Page SafeTaxi Expired SafeTaxi Not Available HAZARD FLIGHT AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT AFCS un Lu ec t m T lt z e e c APPENDICES INDEX 290 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 RevA A GARMIN ADDITIONAL FEATURES 8 2 SCHEDULER M3IAH3AO IN31SAS The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages e g Change oil Switch fuel tanks or Altimeter Transponder Check in the Alerts Window on the PFD Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time event once the message timer reaches zero one time default setting or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero periodic Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed When power is cycled all messages are
65. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit WARNING For safety reasons G950 operational procedures must be learned on the ground Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES WARNING The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Portions of the Garmin G950 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID NAVAID Therefore as with all NAVAIDs information presented by the G950 can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe WARNING To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and understand all aspects of the G950 Pilot s Guide documentation and the Pilot s Operating Handbook POH for the aircraft Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use During flight operations carefully compare indications from the G950 to all available navigation sources including the information from other NAVAIDs visual sightings charts etc For safety purposes always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation WARNING The illustrations in this guide are only examples Never use the G950 to attempt to penetrate a thunderst
66. M3IA83A0 3 Press the CLR Key A Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT confirmation window is displayed 4 Select REVERT and press the ENT Key The altitude is changed to the navigation database value SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD i 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint 3 Press the CLR Key An Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT confirmation window is i displayed 2 4 Select EDIT and press the ENT Key m 5 Edit the value using the FMS Knobs and press the ENT Key 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor IDE gt gt c m m S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1VNOILIQQV QuVZzvH S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 219 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 5 8 PROCEDURES The G950 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available Departures DPs arrivals STARS 5 and non precision and precision approaches APPRs are stored within the database and can be loaded using the _2 Procedures PROC Key X eS The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan No waypoints are 2 required to be in the active flight plan to load procedu
67. M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 1 Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the FMS Knob 2 Select the desired airport the nearest one is already selected 3 Press the Direct to Key 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE 5 Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Direct to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages If no airport NAVAID or user waypoint exists at the desired location a temporary waypoint named MAPWPT is automatically created at the location of the map arrow Selecting a waypoint as a direct to destination using the pointer z 1 From a navigation map page press the Joystick to display the pointer es 2 Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location E 3 If the pointer is placed on an existing airport NAVAID or user waypoint the waypoint name is highlighted 4 Press the Direct to Key to display the Direct to Window with the selected point entered as the direct to destination 5 Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE 6 Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to IDE gt gt c m m Cancelling a Direct to JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH 1 Press the Direct to Key to display the Direct to Window 2 Press the MENU Key 3 With Cancel Direct To NAV highlighted press the
68. MFD navigation maps items are removed on the PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages e g a setting of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps while the PFD Inset Map removes the same item at 50 nm Selecting a topographical data range TOPO DATA 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Select the Map group 4 Press the ENT Key 5 Highlight the TOPO DATA range field TOPO ranges are trom 500 ft to 2000 nm 6 To change the TOPO range setting turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list 7 Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob 8 Press the ENT Key 9 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page In addition the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale located in the lower right hand side of the map showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 131 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m s3un1V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E ELEV FT i VAM EMI Maximum Displayed Elevation ua Minimum Displayed Elevation i EG os Aircraft Altitude MSL l CC
69. MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the active COM frequency changes to white indicating that there is no COM selected A Push to Talk PTT must be pressed to deliver PA announcements The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed 121 888 o 124 5U com SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 125 8808 COM2 SI3 PA Key is Selected on the Audio Panel Figure 4 43 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements Qo A a U 13NVd OIGNV CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2 5 minutes of the selected COM radio signal Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks Once 2 5 minutes of recording time have been reached the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks starting from the oldest block The PLAY Key controls the play function Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress The PLAY Annunciator turns off after the present memory block has finished playing 1N3IAN35VNVIA 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH Pressing the MKR MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play If a COM input signal is detected during play of a recorded memory block play is halted Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block
70. MM and press the ENT Key R 10 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message z Deleting a scheduler message 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page a 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted M 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 41 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN 4 Press the CLR Key to clear the message text If the CLR Key is pressed again the message is restored SYSTEM tc LLI gt le 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to change to ADVISORY Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler message The softkey reverts to the ALERTS label and when pressed the Alerts Window is removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Tt ANGE OIL EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 1 36 PFD Alerts Window Z us 1 7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING ad Backlighting of the PFD and MFD and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually The lt a automatic setting default uses photocells to adjust for ambient lighting conditions Photocell calibration curves io are pre configured to optimi
71. N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 321 APPENDIX D GARMI N E WHY MIGHT THERE BE NO APPROACHES AVAILABLE FOR A FLIGHT PLAN V s ne Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct to keep in mind that some VOR VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers Ifa destination airport does not have a n published approach the G950 indicates NONE for the available procedures e Lu E WHAT HAPPENS WHEN AN APPROACH IS SELECTED CAN A FLIGHT PLAN WITH AN APPROACH A DEPARTURE OR AN H ARRIVAL BE STORED When an approach departure or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan a set of approach departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line showing the title of the selected instrument procedure The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active unless the instrument procedure is activated This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time Flight plans can also be stored with an approach a departure or an arrival Note that the active flight plan is erased when the system is turned off Also the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated When storing flight plans with an approach a departure or an arrival the G950 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints If the database is changed or upda
72. NAV OPERATION M3IAH3AO IN31SAS NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields two standby fields and two active fields The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD The active NAV frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAVI as the navigation radio Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio Pressing the CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAVI SI3 While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are e VORI or LOCI If NAVI is selected a green single line arrow not shown labeled either VORI or LOCI is displayed on the HSI and the active NAVI frequency is displayed in green VOR2 or LOC2 If NAV2 is selected a green double line arrow shown labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green go Le un TANVWd OIGNV e GPS If GPS Mode is selected a magenta single line arrow not shown appears on the HSI and neither NAV ra
73. TITIN e g V4 SLN LAA 165NM Airway V263 TBE e Z TIME TO TOD __ __ i oS n gt 2 Press the FPL key to Huy view the previous page Figure 5 63 Active Flight Plan Page Airway Inserted IDE s gt c m m RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route Airway A2 in Europe has a directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD ABB BNE DEVAL Airway UR975 in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway waypoints AMANO VAKOR LIBRO NELDA DIRKA GZO KOSET and SARKI e Starting from AMANO the airway can be flown only to LIBRO JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH gt e Starting from SARKI the airway can be flown only to LIBRO m un Between NELDA and GZO the airway can be flown in either direction In the US airways that are one way for specified hours of operation are not uncommon These airways POMA gt are always bidirectional in the G950 database E The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight zo plan the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header u gt OU m Oo s un zZ J m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 191 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E
74. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map The other legs are shown in white There are 28 different map ranges available from 500 feet to 2000 nm The current range is indicated in the gt lower right corner of the map and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the map To change the map So range on any map turn the Joystick counter clockwise to zoom in decreasing or clockwise to zoom out zo increasing E The Direct to Window the Flight Plan Window the Procedures Window and the Nearest Airports Window can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in E the section E e 2 J m 2X 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 117 GARMIN A 4 j T b x Y 773 Y Fa af we Nc art 1 n Mt d 2 4 P uf NIS 9 Y sa Navigation Status Box Navigation Mode PROCEDURES Maap Location of Direct To Window SELECT APPROACH Flight Plan Window euge apo Procedures Window Nearest Airports Window Jew imer Reference Window PFD 083 COI DME XPDR IDENT SM ALERTS Figure 5 1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Navigation Status Box eae Tn DTK 286 TRK286 ETE 14 10 133 300 121 900 com STJ 128 200 conz T ME sic Take Y sta aE Map Orientation Navigation Page Title P Navigat
75. VDI and RVSI appear on the PFD as the flight progresses s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 259 GARMIN pis 0 60 prs 352 136 975 gt Lo 186 975 FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 LH Mem UP J ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAM KHC KOOS g 115Kr 2 TKJ EreEUD 13 133 3880 121 988 com _KFCS TE i TBE Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL E 4 li OPSHN 3HH ud j mni OPSHN SHER et 7 Lo 354 4u4 Tl 4 FT EHON A Ton Approach KCOS RNAY 35RpPs LPW 4 HABUK iof 021 58M BORG EJ FALUR 251 S NM B amp D ri CEGIX fof 351 BONN 7BBOr RW35R map 351 ZI CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE WAV WPT SOGAFT ot HABUE lof VS TGT Bl FPH FPA vS REG 4T5rPM TIHE TO TOD V DEV 41 FT vaqgda GNE CL EE PUEBLO Press the FPL key to ES cm view the previews page VIEW VNV PROF CNCL WNW WNW B pis 0 2m erg 352 136 975 86 975 pmo 20 2U 10 10 Figure 5 134 Approaching PYNON 260 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT 21 Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active The approach may be activated at any point to proceed directly to the IAF In this example the aircratt has progressed through the final waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has autom
76. Wind Data a5 Ground Speed gt S SS e Distances in the Bearing Information windows m z gt e GPS bearing pointers These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly inaccurate over time zZ e z i m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 25 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N UNUSUAL ATTITUDES V s nz When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator starting at 50 above and 30 below the horizon line Nose High Nose Low FLIGHT ue m a ES ce 4 EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 2 43 Pitch Attitude Warnings j E If pitch exceeds 30 20 or bank exceeds 65 some information displayed on the PFD is removed The S Altimeter and Airspeed Attitude Vertical Speed and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display ws and the Bearing Information Alerts and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations The following information is removed from the PFD and corresponding softkeys are disabled when the aircraft p experiences unusual attitudes nY E Traffic Annunciations Transponder Status Box Procedures No ze e AFCS Annunciations e System Time ADF DME Tuning e Flight director Command Bars e PFD Setup Menu e Minimum Descent Altitude 7 e nset Map Wind
77. Window Entering Flight ID S34n1V313 S32IaN3ddV TWNOILIGGV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 107 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N 4 5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS aS o POWER UP The Audio Panel performs a self test during power up During the self test all Audio Panel annunciator lights oS illuminate for approximately two seconds Once the self test is completed most of the settings are restored to z those in use before the unit was last turned off MONO STEREO HEADSETS Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G950 Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground While this does not damage the Audio Panel a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only SPEAKER m LL Ar 3s a EJ et All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker if installed Pressing the SPKR Key selects and _ S E deselects the cabin speaker Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed Certain aural alerts and warnings ou autopilot traffic altitude are always heard on the speaker even when the speaker is not selected E The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range Volume can be adjusted though configuration b sd LL az e PA SPKR
78. Window is displayed 2 Highlight SELECT ARRIVAL 3 Press the ENT Key The Arrival Loading Page is displayed 4 Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key 5 Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key oo 6 Select a transition if required and press the ENT Key m 7 Select a runway if required and press the ENT Key LOAD is highlighted 8 Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure IDE s gt G m m Available Procedure Actions Destination Airport NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGH PROCEDURES JINVGIOAV QuVZvH S21V Press the PROC key to Press the view the previous page view the S34n1V314 1VNOILIQQV Loaded Procedures Arrival Preview Arrival Choices Figure 5 91 Arrival Selection SAIDIGNAddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 223 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Selected Arrival Loaded Arrival NORTH UP NOR P AIRPORT ea ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN CURRENT VNV PROFILE yy ACTIVE VNV WPT VS TGT FPH FPA vs REO FPH TIME TO TOO V DEV Press the FPL key to view the previcus poge CNEL VNV Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys Figure 5 92 Arrival Loading Viewing available arrivals at an airport
79. a current position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude based upon current groundspeed Vertical Figure of Merit Visual Flight Rules Very High Frequency Heading Vector to Intercept VOR Localizer Receiver Heading Vector to Manual Termination Visual Meteorological Conditions vertical navigation volume VHF Omni directional Range very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation Vertical Protection Level VNV profile vertical profile VNV path vertical path Heading Vector to Radial vertical speed Vertical Speed Indicator Vertical Speed Required vector to final watt s west Wide Area Augmentation System warning GPS position error World Geodetic System 1984 waypoint s world wide weather transfer transponder cross talk cross track Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T S 4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IA359VNVIN SND 8 si SIN3IAQHISNI M3IAM3AO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd Olanv 1H5I14 IN31SAS S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV gt m J m A m N XIGNI amp GARMIN APPENDIX C M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 BLANK PAGE JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S 34n1V13 1VNOILIQQV PE BJ C ET T X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 320 GARMIN LLL LLL LLL LL LLL LL APPENDIX D FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS If a par
80. aircraft altitude Figure F 1 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 329 JINVGIOAV INJINADVNVIN SND 8 Sia SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd OIGNV 1H5I14 IN31SAS S21V S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV gt m J m A m N XIGNI amp GARMIN APPENDIX F M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 BLANK PAGE JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S 34n1V13 1VNOILIQQV PE BJ C ET T X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 330 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN A Activate a Flight Plan 200 Active frequency 84 93 Advisory alerts 296 R eee 304 Air Data Computer ADC 3 Airport momma oi eee ee eee 157 Nearest 38 Airspace Alerts 172 173 267 Airspeed Indicator 46 48 49 Airways Collapsed 213 Expanded 213 Alerting system 293 PAST E E RETE 293 PN el ERE 296 Aitspace
81. approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure For example a procedure may dictate a climb to 5 500 feet then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach LL cz Hold Point MAHP In this case the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as 5500ft Again if the SES aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude a direct to is established on a Course to Altitude leg m when the missed approach procedure is activated ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS N W a DTK DIS FSHER 3Joz2 9 6NM PYNON 352 11 91m E Approach KDOS RNAV 35Rcrs LPW HABLK inf H21 9 9NM gt FALUR 251 GNM a ui CEGIX faf 351 b EN RW35R map 351 5 1mm Course to Altitude Leg 6368FT 348 B nn t MOGAL mahp a b EH LLI B B lt Figure 5 95 Course to Altitude 2S H e 230 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N FLIGHT MANAGEMENT 5 9 TRIP PLANNING The G950 allows the pilot to view trip planning information fuel information and other information for a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data or based on manually entered data Weight planning is also available based on fuel data and the active flight plan to estimate remaining fuel TRIP PLANNING All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page located in the AUX Page Group Selected Fight Plan Segment FP
82. as a direct to destination from the Direct to Window Entering a waypoint identifier facility name or city as a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Direct to Window is displayed with the active flight plan wayoint as the default selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier turning it counter clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu press the CLR Key to remove it or turn the large FMS Knob to select the facility name or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility or city name additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS Knob during the selection process 3 Press the ENT Key The Activate field is highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to activate the direct to Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct to waypoint from the Direct to Window the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window Waypoint Submenu Flight Plan Waypoints Nearest Airports Recent Waypoints User Waypoints Airway Waypoints only available when active leg is part of an airway Figure 5 50 Waypoint Submenu 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 175 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s g
83. bar becomes solid Using the current satellite signal information they system calculates the aircrafts GPS position time altitude ground speed and track for the aircraft displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements for reference The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircrafts GPS fix Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW Estimated Position Uncertainty EPU A statistical error indication the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 9596 probability of lying o lt m JJ m ERR VS e Horizontal Dilution of Precision HDOP Measures satellite geometry quality i e number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other on a range from 0 0 to 9 9 with lower numbers denoting better accuracy e Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit HFOM and VFOM Measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty the current 9596 confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver s380n1V34 J9NVdIOAV 1N3W3DVNVIA SND 8 SINIWNYLSNI S3oIaN3ddV YNoILaadY SAV auvzvH 1H5I14 T3NVd Olan sia MORT XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 17 SYSTEM gt ce Lu gt O ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INSTRUMENTS I
84. determining vertical guidance Altitude has been retrieved Altitude has been retrieved from the speed and deviation guidance from the navigation database and is navigation database or has been entered because of an invalid constraint n provided as a reference manually and matches a published condition altitude in the navigation database gt Table 5 8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding o Altitudes associated with approach procedures are auto designated This means the system automatically 2 x uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance Note that these m altitudes are displayed as blue text up to but not including the FAE The FAF is always a reference only altitude and cannot be designated unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance In this case the FAF altitude can be designated IDE Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be un designated using the CLR Key The altitude is now displayed only as a reference It is not used to give vertical guidance Other displayed altitudes may change due to re calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a non designated altitude gt gt c m m JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2
85. displayed for reference Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft the 360 default display and the radar like ARC 120 display Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm as indicated by the map range rings or arcs Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page 1 Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page 3 To change the view a Press the VIEW Softkey b Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view Or a Press the MENU Key b Select View Arc or View 360 choice dependent on current state and press the ENT Key to change the view 272 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN nazar AVOIDANCE Showing hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page 1 Press the MENU Key 2 Select Show Aviation Data or Hide Aviation Data choice dependent on current state and press the ENT Key MAP TERRAIN PROXIMITY 136 975 118 008 comz Red Terrain p t c HDG UP Map Orientation Above Or Within 100 HE 3 sl GPS ALT Current Aircraft Below the Aircraft Fa b 6820F1 GPS derived Altitude A p m A 5 ong x MSL Altitude Black Terrain More than 1000 Below the Map Range Rings Aircraft Altitude Yellow Terrain Between 100 and 1000 Below the Aircraft
86. e Station waypoint identifier NAV GPS Pointer icon BRGl single line BRG2 double line e GPS derived great circle distance to bearing source Frequency NAV ADF IDE 7a ol JJ c m un If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency is replaced with ILS When NAVI or NAV2 is the selected bearing source the frequency is replaced by the station identifier when the station is within range If GPS is the bearing source the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency a The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR e GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint gt amp station is not selected go AS NN zy Selecting bearing display and changing sources 2 1 Select the PFD Softkey 2 Select a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source 3 Select the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS 1N3IN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 4 Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF note ADF radio installation is optional 5 To remove the bearing pointer and information window select the BRG Softkey again DME INFORMATION WINDOW
87. eject the card gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch AUDIO PANEL amp CNS rd PUSH VOL SQ lt gt Mee EMERG FLIGHT MANAGEMENT PUSH 1 2 CRS 2 BARO SD Card Slots HAZARD AVOIDANCE PUSH CRS CTR RANGE Pee AFCS Figure 1 3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 6 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 3 SYSTEM POWER UP o lt m JJ m ERR VS A NOTE Refer to Appendix A for system specific annunciations and alerts The G950 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses The PFD MFD and supporting sub systems include both power on and continuous built in test features that exercise the processor RAM ROM external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 During system initialization test annunciations are displayed as shown in Figure 1 4 All system annunciations should disappear typically within the first minute of power up Upon power up key annunciator lights also become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel the MFD Control Unit and the display bezels z On the PFD the AHRS begins to initialize and displays AHRS ALIGN Keep Wings Level The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power up The AHRS can align itself both w
88. error SEOST aor Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure navigation GPS fail ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e a LLI am e lt x INDEX 302 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA ABORT APR OSSOPS OMISIT Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation Abort approach pele DINNGRADE AEREA Vertical guidance generated by WAAS is unavailable use LNAV only minimums downgraded TRUE APR True north approach Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav angle is Change HDG refereence to TRUE set to AUTO GPS1 SERVICE GPS1 needs service Return unit for repair A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and or GPS2 receiver The receiver may stil M3IA83A0 IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 GPS2 SERVICE GPS needs service be available The G950 system should be serviced e i NAV1 SERVICE NAV1 needs service Return unit for repair A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and or NAV2 receiver The receiver may still NAV2 SERVICE NAV2 needs service be available The G950 system should be serviced a NAV1 RMT XFR NAV1 remote m The remote NAV1 and or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed transfer key is stuck f state Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation If the problem persists NAV2 RMT XFR NAV2 remote the G950 system should be serviced transfer key i
89. express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Garmin is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries and G950 and SafeTaxi are trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen Inc S TEC is a registered trademark of S TEC February 2010 Printed in the U S A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN re WARRANTE LIMITED WARRANTY This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase Within this period Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that fail in normal use Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty does not cover failures due to abuse misuse accident or unauthorized alterations or repairs THE W
90. highlight Remove procedure 3 Press the ENT Key The Remove lt procedure name gt trom flight plan window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and A press the ENT Key 202 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one dick to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited 4 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored Fight Plan Page is displayed 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted 6 Press the CLR Key The Remove XXXXX window is displayed SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 7 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and d press the ENT Key 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor gt mi Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan ao n gt 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page m 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one dick to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn th
91. in which various quantities are displayed on the G950 screens can be changed on the System Setup Page Changing a display units setting 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired unit is highlighted Category Settings Affected Quantities Exceptions 0 0 Navigation Angle Magnetic Metric Nautical Distance and Speed Altitude and Vertical Speed Feet Meters Celsius Fahrenheit Pounds N A Kilograms Temperature Fuel and Fuel Flow Weight Position HDDD MM MM HDDD MM 55 5 Default setting Heading Course Bearing Track Desired Track Wind direction Trip Planning Page Crosstrack error HSI Bearing distances information windows DME distance information window Flight plan distances Map ranges DIS GS TAS XTK fields Navigation Status Box All distances on MFD Altitude buffer distance System Setup Arrival Alert trigger distance System Setup All speeds on MFD All altitudes on MFD All elevations on MFD All temperatures on PFD Total Air Temperature Trip Planning Page Fuel parameters Trip Planning Page All positions Contact a Garmin authorized service center
92. in yellow over the own aircraft symbol as shown in Figure 5 143 In addition DR is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5 143 Also the CDI deviation bar is removed from the display Lastly but at the same time a GPS NAV LOST alert message appears on the PFD Normal navigation using GPS WAAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH As a result of operating in DR Mode all GPS derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and a is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure 5 143 Also while the G950 is in DR Mode some terrain functions are not available Additionally the accuracy of Zz all nearest information airports airspaces and waypoints is questionable Finally airspace alerts continue to E function but with degraded accuracy 22 gt gt TO m e e 2 J m 2X 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 267 268 Current Track Indicator Wind Data Bearing Pointer Distance Nav Data Bar All data except Active Leg TAS and DTK are in yellow Navigation Information Display All GPS derived data Is yellow N v1188 00 117 95 LAZ 117 95 CNN E i o aua 112 AA EER 4h d NO DESTINATION AIRPORT DTK 14 TRK MAP NAVIGAT
93. is activated the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot If manual squelch is set to full open SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions After powering up the G1000 System the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios wa ww Automatic Manual MAN Squelch me PLAY i CREW SS a Pilot and PILOT 219 4 ge n Copilot ICS Isolation Keys ICS ISOLATION PILOT O PASS Pilot Volume Copilot Passenger or Manual Volume or Squelch Manual Squelch Volume Squelch Annunciation Annunciation Figure 4 46 Audio Panel Controls Setting the Audio Panel during preflight 1 Verity that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished 2 Verity that manual squelch is set to full open 3 Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise This will set the headset intercom audio level to max volume least amount of attenuation 4 Adjust radio volume levels COM NAV etc to a suitable level 5 Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level 6 Reset squelch to automatic or adjust to the appropriate level manually Once this procedure has been completed the pilot and co
94. joel n 2 EM 124 758 COH1 z Knob to Scroll Es Through a List a of Frequencies r PUSH CRSR Ou E E Figure 4 9 Frequency Auto Tuning from the MFD z z Or 38 1 On the Nearest Airports Frequencies or Airspaces page press the MENU Key to display the page menu 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options 3 Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection o 4 Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob lt x 5 Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio 6 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 88 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N PAGE HEHU OPTIONS Select Airport Window Select Runway Window Select Frequency Window Select Approach Window Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base pige Nearest Airports Menu PAGE MEHU OPTIONS Select ARTCC Window Select FSS Window Select WX Window Press the FNS CRSR knob to return to bose page Nearest Frequencies Menu PAGE HEHU OPTIONS Select Alerts Window Select Frequency Window Press the FNS CRSR knob to return to bose page Figure 4 10 Nearest Pages Menus Nearest Airspaces Menu On the WPT Airport Information Page the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the FMS Knob and scrolling
95. lt Or 1 With the Nearest NDB Page displayed press the FMS Knob is 2 Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identitier in the Nearest NDB Box 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 160 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding area the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled NEAREST NDB INFORMATION and FREQUENCY A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time If there are more than can be shown each list can be scrolled The list only includes waypoints that are within 200nm If there are no NDBs in the list text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed If there are no nearest NDBs in the list the information and frequency fields are dashed M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SIN3IAQHISNI 1H5I13 Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB Nearest NDB 17 80 bi Gs DTK BE 133 300 12 1 988 com 15 90 BTJ 128 200 A 1 NORTH UP ATCHISON NDB Identifier Symbol Bearing Distance to NDB from aircraft Qo z position 9 aL 2 m De E G Cc MOE VENDOR 1 RN l m M 1 NDB Information 2 Se Facility Name City A mpe LARISA i at Long gt I o
96. mode softkey label displays AUTO In destination mode the softkey label displays DEST Figure 5 31 shows the various modes of operation for the display M3IAH3AO IN31SAS nav1 113 08 lt 117 88 TOP cs 133 300 121 988 com BEES NN MAP NAVIGATIONMAP E coM2 N MA si A l NORTH UP SINIWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 CTAF LONGEST RUNWAY Navigation Information Np a LL g Display AM Fa gare 1 24 V586 V424 SND 8 TANVd OIGNV Soe Sof x NOS wu 1 KANRS C Tur Nr s i V4 v12 IDE gt ra gt c m m mr V158 V63 LSU V71 JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Softke WP Ene DCLTR Figure 5 30 Navigation Information Display S3un1V13 SADIGNAddV IVNOILIGAV S21V X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 145 KLWC LAWRENCE MUN Pos 7 3 NM NE VSR 3346 FPM BRG 233 TPA 1856 FT CTAF 123 000 LONGEST RUNWAY 15 33 5700x100 s NRST FREQS ARTCC KANSAS CITY 123 800 ASOS O RLWC 121 225 KICT WICHITA MID CONT BERG 230 FPL 146 NM TPA 2356 FT LONGEST RUNWAY 31L 19R 18381x15B8 ETA 22 34LCL FLT 88 86 32 Auto Mode KMCI to KICT Flight Plan Loaded NRST APT n KLWC LAWRENCE MUN Pos 7 3 NM NE VSR 3330 FPM BRG 233 CTAF 123 000 LONGEST RUNWAY 15 33 5700x106 ore KICT WICHITA MID CONT Pos 146 NM NE VSR 168 FPM BRG 230 FPL 146 NM TPA 2350 FT TOWER 118 2606 DEST WX ATIS
97. of the group so it may already 2 be selected If there are no Nearest Airports available NONE WITHIN 200 NM is displayed q 3 Press the APT Softkey or press the FMS Knob or press the MENU Key highlight Select Airport Window and press the ENT Key The cursor is placed in the NEAREST AIRPORTS Box The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted 2S A 4 Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 156 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Viewing runway information for a specific airport M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 1 With the Nearest Airports Page displayed press the RNWY Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Select Runway Window and press the ENT Key The cursor is placed in the RUNWAYS Box 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page A minimum runway length and or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that a
98. pointer One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip Skid Indicator ADDITIONAL FEATURES APPENDICES Figure 2 8 Slip Skid Indication INDEX 50 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS ALTIMETER The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet The indicated altitude is displayed in the black pointer M3IAH3AO IN31SAS The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol A bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the tape the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape The metric value when selected is displayed in a separate box above the Selected Altitude 7a ol JJ c m un A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape the end resting at the approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed The trend vector is not shown if a altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure Setting the Selected Altitude x c Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude large knob for 1000 ft increment
99. retained until deleted and message timer countdown is resumed SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I13 DE 117 95 fcs 1K TRK T 136 975 1118 000 com wea 117 95 ALIX UTILITY cor 136 975 FET APT SI3 OIL CHANGE One Time 456 06 00 Mh SND 8 TANVd OIGNV INJINJDVNVIN 1H5DI14 Figure 8 5 Scheduler Utility Page Entering a scheduler message 1 Select the AUX Utility Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor JINVGIOAV QuvzvH 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field 4 Usethe FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key S21V 5 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type e Event Message issued at the specified date time e One time Message issued when the message timer reaches zero default setting o 59 co az un r e Periodic Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero 7 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field gt 8 For periodic and one time message use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value HH MM SS from which to z countdown and press the ENT Key m z i A 190 01146 00 RevA Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 291 A ADDITIONALFEATURES GARMIN e 9 For e
100. s 3 Select OK 4 Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan To cancel press the CLR Key or highlight V CANCEL and press the ENT Key lt Inverting and activating a stored flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 3 Press the INVERT Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Invert amp Activate FPL and press the ENT Key The Invert and activate stored flight plan window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 210 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way The active flight plan can be configured to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view In the wide view additional information is displayed Fuel Remaining FUEL REM Estimated Time Enroute ETE Estimated Time of Arrival ETA and Bearing to the waypoint BRG M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Switching between leg to leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypo
101. selected navigation source the Glidepath Indicator Figure 2 15 appears as a magenta diamond during the approach If the o approach type downgrades past the final approach fix FAF NO GP is displayed in place of the diamond lt Full scale deflection two dots is 1000 feet EC VNV Target Altitude 126A Marker zw wai S cc Annunciation E E Vertical eu Speed E Indicator Glideslope o Indicator Glidepath Q Vertical Vertical Indicator a Deviation Speed ia Indicator Pointer lt Required Vertical Speed ui e zm P a Figure 2 13 Vertical Speed and Figure 2 14 Glideslope Indicator Figure 2 15 Glidepath Indicator Deviation Indicators VSI and VDI 54 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR HSI The Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI displays a rotating compass card in a heading up orientation Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30 Major tick marks are at 10 intervals and minor tick marks at 5 intervals A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI and the current track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond The HSI also presents turn rate course deviation bearing and navigation source information and is available in two formats 360 compass rose and 140 arc M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 7a ol JJ c m un Changing
102. spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group COH1 133 325 SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 IPC ET HERE RE ESI 124 325 conz 8 33 kHz Channel 25 kHz Channel Spacing Spacing an Figure 4 13 COM Channel Spacing Changing COM frequency channel spacing go Le un 1 Select the AUX System Setup Page TANVd OIGNV 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing 5 Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection While the COM CONFIG Window is selected the G950 softkeys are blank INJINADVNVIN 1H5DI14 B SI TRK e 121 900 com Ri 200 P A be m 477 lE C P9 D gt 17 DEC 09 ALTITUDE BUFFER cm 17 801 18LCL CLASS B TH vn TIME FORMAT LOCAL 24hr CLASS C TCA TIME OFFSET 00 00 CLASS D RESTRICTED NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC HOA MILITARY Ur SELECTED AUTO Tm S MAG VAR 3 E OTHER ADIZ J SYSTEM CDI 1 00NM 2 DIS SPD NAUTICAL NM KT So ALT VS FEET CFT FPM OF AAN CHANNEL SPACING 25 0 kHz P TEMP CELSIUSCC Ex ed MM EESTI Select 8 33 kHz a c RAWY SURFACE S 0r25 0 kHz WEIGHT POUNDS LB ope paver COM Frequency gt POSITION HDDD MM MM Channel Spacin E pacing m OFF ALTITUDE 18000FT U ted Q un Figure 4 14 AUX System Setup Page 9 gt K 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Te
103. system integration microprocessors and is paired with the on side display via HSDB connection The IAUs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 2 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL SYSTEM OVERVIEW GDC 74A 1 The Air Data Computer ADC processes data from the pitot static system and outside air temperature OAT sensor The ADC provides pressure altitude airspeed vertical speed and OAT information to the G950 System and it communicates with the primary IAU displays and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface TERRY V o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 GIX 33 1 The solid state Transponder provides Modes A C and S capability and communicates with both IAUS through an RS 232 digital interface SND 8 TANVd OIGNV rmm Le SY INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5DI14 e GRS 77 1 The Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both PFDs and the primary IAU The AHRS contains advanced sensors including accelerometers and rate sensors and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information with the ADC to obtain air data and with both IAUSs to obtain GPS information AHRS operation is discussed in Section 1 4 System Operation JINVGIOAV QuVZvH S21V e GMU 44 1 The Magnetomete
104. the to waypoint is the endpoint of the active flight plan In flight plan mode FPL with the active flight plan selected 00 and a specific leg NN selected the from waypoint is the current aircraft position and the to waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg In waypoint WPTS mode these are manually selected waypoints if there is an active flight plan these default to the endpoints of the active leg AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already been flown Desired Track DTK DTK is shown as nnr and is the desired track between the selected waypoints It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected A U LL o lt lt e Distance DIS The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99 9 and in whole units up to 9999 E Estimated time enroute ETE ETE is shown as hours minutes until less than an hour then it is shown E as minutes seconds ye Estimated time of arrival ETA ETA is shown as hours minutes and is the local time at the destination Ifin waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time G Ifa flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure lt ao time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg If the entire flight plan is selected then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg
105. the HSI display format 1 Select the PFD Softkey 2 Select the HSI FRMT Softkey a 3 Select the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey The 360 HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator CDI with a Course Pointer To From Indicator and a sliding deviation bar and scale The course pointer is a single line arrow GPS VORI and LOCI or a double line arrow VOR2 and LOC2 which points in the direction of the set course The To From arrow rotates with 2 the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received 2 OOJO 9 oO a nnn 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5I13 fs 30 s JINVGIOAV QuVZvH OOOO OO COGO 2 2 A d 2 i E NN a Turn Rate Indicator To From Indicator 2 Current Track Indicator 10 Course Pointer 5 G Lateral Deviation Scale 11 Selected Heading Bug s 4 Navigation Source 12 Flight Phase 5 Aircraft Symbol 13 Turn Rate Heading Q Course Deviation Indicator C CDI Current Heading 5 7 Rotating Compass Rose 15 Lubber Line P OBS Mode Active Figure 2 16 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 55 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMI N The Arc HSI is a 140 expanded section of the compass rose The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer To From Indicator a sliding deviation indicator the To From and deviation indicators are combined and a deviation scale Upon station passage the To From Indicator flips a
106. the PFD When both GPS receivers are providing accurate data the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system Information collected by the specified receiver GPS1 for the 1 IAU or GPS2 for the 2 IAU may be viewed on the AUX GPS Status Page Viewing GPS receiver status information 1 Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group see Section 1 6 for information on navigating MFD page groups 2 Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page third page in the AUX Page Group 3 To change the selected GPS receiver Press the desired GPS Softkey Or a Press the MENU Key b Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key Satellite Constellation Satellite Signal Diagram Information 80 TOP es 121kr p287 WpRK288 ew 27 03 _ 133 300 121 900 com 1550 STJ AUX GPS STATUS 128 200 KMCI CONSTELLATION KANSAS CITY INTL E ACTIVE GPS GPS1 GPS Pos 3 3 NM W Pr Ge a HDOP Receiver HFOH GPS SOLUTION 3D DIFF NAY Status TPA 2050 FT rg Ue E VFOM 23F SBAS ACTIV TOWER 128 200 LONGEST RUNWAY POSITION N 39 17 93 RAIM PREDICTION B1L 13R W294 47 12 mum 10801x150 Ep WAYPOINT KCOS NRST FREGS S rd Ri 01 21LCL RAIM NEU HIEMIS adi ary DATE 24 DEC 09 Availability pipe GROUND SPEED 121 1KT Prediction 21900 ae a COMPUTE RAIN KMCI 128 375 DEST APT GPS SIGNAL STRENGTH NO DESTINATION AIRPORT TIME i FLT 00 00 35 Satellite Signal Strength
107. the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information A However intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in spotting traffic The following errors are common examples e When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes e When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle either overtaking or head on and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0 25 nm TIS may display the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft AUDIO PANEL amp CNS These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client intruder aircraft course stabilizes D Lu 7g Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations E of undesirable performance Reports should identify the time of observation location type and identity of the aircraft and describe the condition observed Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder e z software version Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel not ATC malfunctions should lt a be reported in the following ways co mE By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station FSS facility By FAA Form 8000 7 Saf
108. to be unavailable for the specified waypoint time and date 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 15 SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS APPENDICES INDEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW GARMIN Predicting RAIM availability at present position 1 Select the GPS Status Page 2 If necessary press the RAIM Softkey 3 Press the FMS Knob The WAYPOINT field is highlighted 4 Press the MENU Key 5 With Set WPT to Present Position highlighted press the ENT Key 6 Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry 7 Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key 8 Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key 9 With the cursor highlighting COMPUTE RAIM press the ENT Key Once RAIM availability is computed one of the following is displayed e COMPUTE RAIM RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint time and date combination e COMPUTING AVAILABILITY RAIM calculation in progress e RAIM AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint time and date e RAIM NOT AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint time and date SATELLITE INFORMATION Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram This sky view is a
109. to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off ax q E Turn VOL ID Knob to adjust gt z volume Press Knob to lurn Morse Code On or Off Press the Frequency Transfer Key to Transfer NAV Frequencies Between Active and Standby Frequency Fields t Turn the NAV Knob to Tune ue Frequency in the Tuning Box PURDEKT NAV2 111 66 GHH ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 4 19 NAV Frequency Tuning APPENDICES INDEX 94 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the upper and lower radio frequency fields M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 111 58 GHM SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Press the NAV Knob to Switch the Tuning Box From One NAV Radio to the Other Ir e Figure 4 20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes VOR LOC ID sis When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio a white ID appears to the left of the active 2 x NAV frequency m In the example shown in order to listen to either station identifier press the NAVI or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel Pressing the VOL ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box To turn off both NAV IDs transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAVI and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio INJINAD
110. turning flags on off 1 Select the TMR REF Softkey 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed 3 Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1 kt increments when a speed has been changed from a default value an asterisk appears next to the speed IDE 7a ol JJ c m un 4 Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON OFF field a 5 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF 6 To remove the window press the CLR Key or select the TMR REF Softkey z REFERENCES Qo TIMER aaa UP START PAGE MENII 2 T KT ON m 6B5KT ON S KT N MINIMUMS 4BARO 15A FT 1N3IN359VNVIA 1H5DI14 Figure 2 6 Timer References Menu Figure 2 5 Timer References Window JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Turning all Vspeed flags ON OFF 1 Select the TMR REF Softkey 2 Press the MENU Key gt 3 To view all Vspeed flags highlight All References On and press the ENT Key Figure 2 6 a 4 To remove all Vspeed flags turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Ort and press the ENT Key gt Restoring all Vspeed defaults Be 1 Select the TMR REF Softkey zo e 2 Press the MENU Key d 3 Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key gt z ra S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 49 A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN ATTITUDE INDICATOR Attitude information is
111. types installed Crossfill is off type mismatch Install correct terrain database type in both displays DB MISMATCH Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed Crossfill is off m version mismatch Install correct obstacle database version in both displays DB MISMATCH Airport Terrain The PFD and MFD have different airport terrrain databases installed Crossfill is oft database mismatch Install correct airport terrain database in both displays z c mi GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES ao n gt GMAT FAIL GMAT is inoperative The audio panel self test has detected a failure The audio panel is unavailable The G950 system should be serviced GMA1 CONFIG GMAT configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory error Contig service req d The G950 system should be serviced I1N3A35VNVIN 1H5I14 MANIFEST GMA1 software The audio panel has incorrect software installed The G950 system should be mismatch Communication halted serviced GMA1 SERVICE GMA1 needs The audio panel self test has detected a problem in the unit Certain audio functions service Return unit for repair may still be available and the audio panel may still be usable The G950 system should be serviced when possible JINVGIOAV QuVZVH GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES n GIA1 CONFIG GIA1 config error 7 Contig service req d The GIA1 and or GIA2 c
112. ua Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL Lu ps ag PSHN 39 FIN FSHER CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNY WPT FT ot VS TGT FPH FPA VS REQ _ P TIHE TO TOD V DEV FT Press the FPL key to view the previous page AUDIO PANEL amp CNS VIEW CN Figure 5 116 HYS to LAA Leg Active FLIGHT 11 ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure ATC advises to expect an altitude of 10 000 feet at OPSHN a Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor A U LL o lt lt gez b Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list 29 C Press the Direct to G8 Key The Direct to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5 117 CD PEU lt NH s NORTH UP ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lt e T BRG 260 DIS 98 9NH Be Ba lt ACTIVATE Figure 5 117 Direct To OPSHN H e 248 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT d Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5 118 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS DIRECT TO SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 TANVd OIGNV Figure 5 118 Enter VNV Altitude e An altitude of 10 000 feet is entered as requested by ATC IDE f Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5 119 s gt c m S m DIRELT TO IDENT FACILITY
113. 0 power up certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize All instruments should be operational within one minute of power up If any instrument remains flagged the G950 should be serviced by a Garmin authorized repair facility Avionics Units Nau Dg DE COM L NRST APT KMCI KANSAS CITY INTL PU n BRG ____ TPA 2058 FT TOWER 128 200 LONGEST RUNWAY a4 _ GDC 74A Air Data Computer L Auc ET E RN NONE WITHIN 200 NH DEST PT NO DESTINATION AIRPORT TIME S TAEK a Fo M FLT 08 06 15 AN ha 29 821N Figure 1 10 G900X System Failure Annunciations 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units GDC 74A Air Data Computer GRS 7 AHRS OR GMU 44 Magnetometer GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units GTX 33 Transponder OR GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN SYSTEM STATUS The System Status Page displays the statuses serial numbers and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks failed by red Xs Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin authorized dealer informed SYSTEM gt ce Li gt T Viewing LRU information E 1 Usethe FMS Knob to select the AUX System Status Page 2 To place the cursor in the LRU Info Box a Press the LRU Softkey x Or a
114. 000 user defined waypoints User waypoints can be created from any map page except PFD Inset Map AUX Trip Planning Page or Procedure Pages by selecting a position on the map using the Joystick or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing distance from an existing waypoint bearings from two existing waypoints or latitude and longitude Once a waypoint has been created it can be renamed deleted or moved Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down 17 88 TOP cs DTK 2B b 12 NN 1 133 3808 121 980 con 115 58 STJ WPT USER WPT INFORMATION __ 128 200 COHZ EU RISE NORTH UP USER WAYPOINT BELARE TEMPORARY WAYPOINT TYPE RAD DIS COMMENT User Wot Comment WALLET TOP220 115 Navi tj M REFERENCE WAYPOINTS avigauon iVviap RAD DIS Showing Selected Po 1 TOP 2201 1154m User Waypoint 34 USER WAYPOINT LIST Selected User zi BELARE oer BELARE T P22U 115 W nt Hes KA aypoin Eid WDE HERE MEL I usu RENAME HIDE LST GO BACK Softkeys Figure 5 42 User Waypoint Information Page Selecting a User Waypoint User Waypoint Info Identifier Temporary Normal Waypoint Type Reference Wbpt Info Identifier Rad Dist or Identifiers Radials or Region Lat Long User Waypoint List dentifier Comment User Wpts Used GO BACK displayed if User Wot was created on map page 1 With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed enter the
115. 0000FT Approuch KCOS RNAV 35RsPs LPW HABUK tof 21 5 SNH FALUR 261 EAN CURRENT VNU PROFILE ull Lu Fu o o a gt x ACTIVE VNV WPT ot OPSHN 3N VS TGT 611FPH FPA vs REG 383FPH TIHE TO TOD V DEV bb FT P LLI Press the FPL key to Ji view the previous puge LLJ ed e O VIEW VMV PROF CHCL VMV VNV amp c muli Figure 5 128 Approaching Top of Descent TOD U ae No TOD within 1 minute 136 975 EEE Target Altitude un J LL t Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI Required Vertical ADDITIONAL FEATURES Speed Indicator RVSI un A VAS RS VAT a Figure 5 129 VDI amp RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent TOD ui e 256 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 16 Upon reaching TOD a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as shown in Figure 5 130 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 Keep Vertical Deviation Pointer Centered Align Actual Vertical Speed z wit Required Vertical Speed gt S Ao v Figure 5 130 VDI amp RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent m 17 When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent BOD it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5 131 Upon reaching the offset waypoint tor OPSHN the aircraft is at 10 000 feet Ex ss Tas EFEK TEES 136 975 IDE s gt G m m JI
116. 00FT 1 Alrwoy 7 V253 TBE CURRENT VHV PROFILE CURRENT Wh PROFILE ACTIVE Wu wer SOGOFT ot HABUK laf M ACTIVE VMV WPT SODOFT ot HAGUE inf VS TGT BddrPH FPA a 1 Vs TGT 4 aM FPH TIME TO TOO 04 30 M lirPH TIME TO TOD 00 15 Pross the FPL key bo X Frees the FFL kev tn view the previous pogs view tho provins poan cun Y 3t HA VIEW VAV tide M UM E PX ac a VNV Direct To Softkey VNV PROF Softkey Figure 5 87 Vertical Navigation Direct To Activating a vertical navigation direct to 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint A NOTE The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint light blue number to be used If not the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 215 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m s3un1V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV GUVZVH X31GNI EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT M c LL Lid o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 3 Press the VNV Direct To Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight VNV Direct To and pre
117. 11 eve 07 48 133 3004 121 900 com 15 58 stb NRST NEAREST AIRSPACES 128 200 COH w L Auirspace Alerts Info S 5 Name EEAVENWOTTH ver Proximity Ahead Inside iN MCT 43 Ahead lt 2nm Within 2nm ern i 2 Time till Intercept only if mji T GLADSTONE Ahead Or Ahead lt 2nm 7 E E Airspace Agency Info T aunt Airspace Type NN STSSHAOWNEE Controlling Agency OVEREANS SPARK LAWRENGE BENEXA Airspace Vertical Limits WEAWOOD Ceiling CAHE GRANDVIEW Floor KOC KTX GARDNER g Associated Frequencies Type Availability info E Frequency EN IEEE 1 3E ee eee ees SOftKCYS Figure 5 47 Nearest Airspaces Page Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page The ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list The FREQ Soitkey is enabled only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information 1 Select the Nearest Airspaces Page 2 Press the ALERTS Softkey or press the FMS Knob or press the MENU Key highlight Select Alerts Window and press the ENT Key The cursor is placed in the AIRSPACE ALERTS Box 3 Select the desired airspace 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 172 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEME
118. 1146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 183 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Creating an active flight plan I cc nS 1 Press the FPL Key 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor only on MFD 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Turning it clockwise displays a blank os Waypoint Information Window turning it counter clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window i with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan nearest recent user or airway waypoints 4 Enter the identifier facility or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint trom the submenu of E waypoints and press the ENT Key The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered 5 Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint 6 When all waypoints have been entered press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor Creating a stored flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the NEW Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Create New Flight Plan and press the ENT Key to display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Turning it clockwise displays a blank Waypoint Information Window turning it
119. 15 50 STJ FPL STORED FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 con2 i Stored Flight Plan Selected Memory Slot z el Comment n ue S ns un hah Departure KMKC ALLTIFTOZTIFIO Procedure Identifier A MCT Waypoint Identifier TIFTO 287 57 0NN Airway Identifier EN Desired Track to Waypoint gt TOP 147 32 3NM Distanceto Waypoint qo S Airway V4SLN Waypoint Altitude Constraint Ao SLN gt 97 7NM a Airway V244 L AA Hu HYS e TITIM t LAA 165NH p mem Airway V263 TBE Kio a KTUP ur IDE s gt G m m Press the FPL key to 10 NN view the previous page e e L SaR LARL E M Softkeys Figure 5 58 Stored Flight Plan Page JINVGIOAV QuVZvH I ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN e KMKC KCOS wn FAK nS m HCH DI E sE SLN EN Airway V244L AA aS HYS hd gt LAA Airway V210 GOSIP Flight plan is full brit gt unnecessary waypoints 5 ALS Flight Plan Full Message E CURRENT VNV PI ACTIVE VNY WPT m VS TGT FPM FPA 3 0 ya VS REQ FPM TIME TO TOD aa Figure 5 59 Active Flight Plan Page FPL Full m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 187 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan I cc nS 1 On the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 2 Highlight the desired flight plan 3 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the ENT Key turn the large FMS Knob clockw
120. 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 211 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E Active Flight Plan Narrow View Active Flight Plan Wide View gt oe ue z 133 300 121 900 com HE 133 300 121 988 com IVE FLIGHT f 128 200 Cor 115 58 s FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 conz NORTH UP fL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 2 DTK DIS DTK DIS lt Deporture KMKC ALL TIFTO2TIFTO Departure KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO a Ss TNI T LL Em Enroute Enroute u SLN 24 i Airwoy V244L AA Airwoy V244LAA i 3 I CURRENT VNV PROFILE STE ae A ACTIVE VNV WET FT ot V253 VE vs ToT FPM FPA T val KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL LLI CURRENT YNY PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT VS TGT VS REO wrar n Press the FPL key to m NT TET ARENE i Press the FPL key to view the previous scar 5 uaa 0 view the provious pogo CUM AUDIO PANEL amp CNS WIDE Softkey NARROW Softkey LEG LEG Softkey CUM Softkey Figure 5 84 Active Flight Plan Wide vs Narrow View Lid LL o lt lt COLLAPSING AIRWAYS a The G950 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan Page Window When airways have been collapsed it is indicated on the airway heading Ne zS When airways are collapsed leg to leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display
121. 1H5I13 IN31SAS S21V S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV gt TO m rm A m N X31GNI amp GARMIN APPENDIX B M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv BLANK PAGE 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S 34n1V13 1VNOILIQQV PE BJ C ET T X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T A GARMIN APPENDIX C eo GLOSSARY ACC accuracy AUX auxiliary ACT ACTV active activate AWOS Automated Weather Observing System ADC air data computer z ADF Automatic Direction Finder B ALT barometric altitude 6 ADI Attitude Direction Indicator BARO barometric setting AF Arc to Tix BATT battery AFCS Automatic Flight Control System BC backcourse AFM Airplane Flight Manual Bearing The compass direction trom the a AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement present position to a destination AFRM airframe daa AGL cose eva BFO beat frequency oscillator E AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference und d ao System BRG bearing ae AIM Airman s Information Manual E AIRMET Airman s Meteorological Information C center runway ALRT alert C degrees Celsius d AIT situa CA Course to Altitude E AU AUN alternator CALC calculator AMPS amperes Calibrated Indicated airspeed corrected for ANNUNC A Airspeed installation and PEEN errors SE ANT CD Course to PME al ze AP autopilot CDI Course PUO eeano i AP DISC autopilot disconnect EUM SONI Daley wll APR appr
122. 2 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT NAV RANGE RING The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel ground track on a rotating compass card The range is determined by the map range The range is 1 4 of the map range e g 37 5 nm on a 150 nm map M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Range radius sla SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 SND 8 TANVd Olanv Nav Range Ring IDE Figure 5 27 Navigation Map Nav Range Ring gt gt c m m A NOTE The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages Nearest pages or Direct to Window map JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Displaying removing the Nav Range Ring 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed a 3 Select the Map group 4 Press the ENT Key 48 5 Highlight the NAV RANGE RING field E o 6 Select On or Off as 7 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page B A NOTE The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north based on the selection on the AUX z System Setup Page s M 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 143 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E FUEL RANGE RING Parr a The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance A dashed green circle indicates the select
123. 21 Navigation Map Declutter Level Indications Decluttering the map e Qo Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed The current declutter level is shown With o each softkey selection another level of map information is removed 2 Or 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed IDE 2 Select Declutter The current declutter level is shown 3 Press the ENT Key s gt G m S m Decluttering the PFD Inset Map 1 Press the INSET Softkey 2 Press the DCLTR Softkey The current declutter level is shown With each selection another level of map information is removed S3u01V34 JNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 137 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Table 5 3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level The X represents map items displayed for the various levels of declutter lem No Declutter Declutter 1 Declutter 2 Declutter 3 Flight Plan Routelines KKK Flight Plan RouteWaypoints XXX Riverstakes KK Topography Data KK x x Intemational Bordes oo X x x x HekWedr oo X Xx x x Naig oRegeRng X X X X FuelRangeRing X X X j x HemnDta 0 X Xx x x Hec X X X j x Airways X X X X NORD ooo X X X j XMLightningData KK Wpots o X X X
124. 3ddV IVNOILIGGY SAV X31GNI AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM amp CNS INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD LL YW zs S z ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS INDEX HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE Knob If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled the map is re centered on the Map Pointer Additional Information on Obstacle Selectea d YAP NAVIGATION HAP LIGHTED OBSTACLE ERES 5 8NH 027 ELEV 1 745FT W078 493 46 Vi NORTH UP Ww E DE Lighted Obstacle Oa esl En oe Selected with Map Pointer Red Terrain Area IE BJ Leif c Above or Within CONS ys CUHBERLART Yellow Terrain Area 100 Below Aircraft NT M Between 100 and Altitude kce mol 1000 Below Aircraft a Altitude Red Lighted RESI TOWN Obstacles pye Above or Within 100 Below Aircraft 4 EE Altitude ARTO y ns EREEN SPRING X S ze Terrain Display Enabled Icon TERRAIN TR Terrain Legend 1000F 1 SPRINGFIELD A Figure 6 5 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircrafts current altitude without clutter from the basemap Aviation data airports VORs and other NAVAIDs can be
125. 4 Efficiency 233 Map e p DO e 327 e ee eea 253 Marker beacon 101 ad OT eee eee ee 233 Marker Beacon Annunciations 11 lt a Required 233 MASQ Processing xd c NCC CC CMS M LEE 79 lt 9 Statistics 233 Measurement UNIS 34 a Fuel on Board 233 Menus mnm 2 gt Message advisories 295 299 300 301 304 305 G Messages Reminder MMM 41 Z cepas Indicator uus Minimum Descent Altitude MDA 47 73 2 ee Missed Approach 181 230 235 239 265 Glideslope I ECL ML M re MEN 263 MKR MUTE ee ene EA 101 Glideslope Indicator 54 vc a ee eet 22 102 103 Global Positioning System GPS Mode selection softkeys ns 102 103 sa Navigation 174 268 T amp Morse code identitier 95 EE FAS LL NM REPRE be Multi Function Display MFD 2 at GTX 33 Mode S Transponders 102 ere MR NAM 1810 H SOftkeys MMM 24 E un d amp A HISEN2 S Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 18
126. 5 NAV 115 18 140 138 1204 118 4 4 188 j t OJ i F 1 f i i PFO OBS CDI NAV Frequency Box Airspeed Indicator 3 True Airspeed 4 Current Heading 5 Selected Heading Bug 6 Outside Air Temperature OAT 7 Softkeys System Time C Transponder Data Box A GARMIN 118 100 133 958 cont 124 208 COH T ze 500p e 49008 4800 A n 29 971N PDR R LEL T21 Ea ALERTS 00000 0000 11 Turn Rate Indicator 12 Altimeter Barometric Setting 13 Selected Altitude Bug Vertical Speed Indicator VSI 15 Altimeter Selected Altitude 17 COM Frequency Box Navigation Status Box Slip Skid Indicator Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI Attitude Indicator Figure 2 1 Primary Flight Display Default Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS M3IA83A0 IN31SAS NAVI 188 40 DPA DIS quoce 133 950 com nav2 112 85 115 10 BVT 128 288 COH2 un M JJ c m un 0000 TAS 140KT NORTH UP SND 8 TANVd OIGNV OO 060 0 C IAN lt d 5 NAVZ PDR k LEL UZ 29 48 INSET HFD TONA a ALERTS 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5I13 gt Iraffic Annunciation Flight Plan Window SE 2 Selected Heading Annunciation Window 4 G Wind Data Selected Course 2 4 Inset Map 11 Vertical Speed Required 5 DME Information Window 12 Vertical Deviation I
127. 5 Turn the G950 System OFF and remove the SD card 6 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD The MFD and PFD databases are now updated Remove the SD card when finished AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 7 Verity the correct update cycle is loaded during MFD power up Ou ez GARMIN DATABASES ui NOTE The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin z z accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of do the data HE The following G950 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin Expanded basemap The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features such as rivers lakes and towns Itis updated only periodically with no set schedule There is no expiration date s Terrain The terrain database contains terrain mapping data It is updated periodically and has no expiration date Airport terrain The airport terrain database contains airport diagram data It is updated periodically and has no expiration date ADDITIONAL FEATURES e Obstacle The obstacle database contains data for obstacles such as towers that pose a potential hazard to aircraft Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database This database is updated on a 5
128. 50 and the S TEC Fifty Five X Refer to the approved S TEC Fifty Five X Pilot s Operating Handbook POH for comprehensive list of annunciations and operating Instructions S9 mn 9 2 222 Ae In addition to the redundant status mode annunciations and or visual representations that are simultaneously a S displayed on both the G950 AFCS Status Box and or PFD and the S TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot Display and oa or Remote Annunciator Display the G950 displays an additional mode annunciation of FD when the Flight Director Mode is engaged Flight Director a Figure 7 1 Flight Director Mode Engaged G950 AFCS Status Box 1N3IAN39VNVIN 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuVZvH ALTITUDE PRESELECT The ALT Knob on the PFD is used to enter the selected altitude which is provided to the STEC Fifty Five X autopilot Refer to the STEC Fifty Five X Users Manual for details on the altitude preselect function no S9 i co mz gt SIDIGNAddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 283 amp GARMIN AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 BLANK PAGE JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S34n1V13 1VNOILIQQV S32IaN3ddV X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for th
129. 6 13 Traffic Annunciation PFD gt n A TIS Not Available UNA voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of a range TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following e Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service m e Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS capable Mode S radar site So e Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site ne gt e Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage In flat terrain the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all gt i O directions m Oo e Traffic does not have an operating transponder A N The TIS Not Available TNA voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting TNA muting status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page 2 i m S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 279 HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N zi Muting the TIS Not Available voice alert I cc nS 1 Select the Traffic Map Page 2 Press the TNA MUTE Softkey The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page Or oz 5z a Press the MENU Key z b Select Not Available Mute On shown if TNA muting is currently off and press the ENT Key
130. 6 day cycle N Lu c T LLI am e lt x e SafeTaxi The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways ramps runways terminals and services This database is updated on a 56 day cycle INDEX 310 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN APPENDIX Since these databases are not stored internally in the PFD or MFD a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in each display unit A Supplemental Data Card should be inserted into the bottom card slot of the PFD and the MFD and not removed except for updating the card The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the Aviation Databases section of the Garmin website www garmin com Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards The following equipment is required to perform the update Windows compatible PC computer Windows 2000 or XP recommended e SD Card Reader SanDisk SDDR 93 SanDisk SDDR 99 Verbatim 96504 or equivalent Updated database obtained from the Garmin website e Existing 010 00330 42 Supplemental Database SD Cards from both
131. 68 Arrival Loading Page Selecting the Arrival 5 N i AJ m Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan 1 Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page P 2 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored a Flight Plan Page is displayed 3 Press the LD STAR Softkey or press the MENU Key select Load Arrival and press the ENT Key The Arrival _ gt Loading Page is displayed S 4 Select an arrival Press the ENT Key 22 5 Select a transition for the selected arrival Press the ENT Key 2 6 Select a runway served by the selected arrival if required Press the ENT Key 7 Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure z A z i Se 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 195 GARMIN 17 88 TOP ss 116kr omK261 TRK 334 ETEW1 13 133 3808 121 988 com 15 50 STJ PROC ARRIVAL LOADING 128 200 con2 NORTH UP 4 PUBLIC Destination Airport CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS COLORADO SPRINGS CO T Selected Arrival ee SHER ARKANSAS RIVER Selected Transition OPSHN H3AM ONTJH3nH Transitions Available with DBRY1 Arrival Waypoint Sequence aoe oS x gt Im T uw zm fia D NC Preview of eA Selected Arrival T ees EN ee ee ee ee aa e Figure 5 69 Arrival Loading Page Selecting the Transition STORED FLIGHT PLAN 03 KMKC KCOS Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY1
132. 7 3 NM NE jG Om VSR 3340 FPM BRG 233 TPA 1850 FRO pS Om CTAF 123 000 E 15733 5700x106 Figure 5 32 Nearest Airport Box IDE Fi s i c m S m Identifier Airport Name always visible JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Vertical Speed Required Vertical Speed Necessary at Current Ground Speed to perform a straight descent to airport with a range of 5000 fps beyond which it becomes dashed 4 COM Type gt A 5 Longest Runway Displayed when Airport is not the Destination Airport 6 METAR Flag When METAR information available gt n Position From Distance and Direction from Nearest Airport gt j a o Bearing to Nearest Airport m COM Frequency Displayed when Airport is not the Destination Airport z 2 9 A U z m X 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 147 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N NEAREST FREQUENCY BOX The Nearest Frequency Box is displayed in the automatic mode and not displayed in the destination mode When no nearest frequencies are detected the Nearest Frequency Box displays NONE WITHIN 200 NM NRST FREQS ARTCC KANSAS CITY Oa 123 808 ASOS O KLWC 121 225 7O Figure 5 33 Nearest Frequency Box 1 Air Route T
133. 8 STJ WPT VOR INFORMATION 128 208 COM2 NORTH UP SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 VORTAC NAVAID U549 YS Information m un LOW ALTITUDE 10 F N CEN USA gt Lo o 5 G N 38 50 86 ce W299 16 61 S A v rri r IDE s gt c m S m JINVGIOAV QuVZvH EME GO BACK Softkey Figure 5 11 Navigation Map Information Window NAVAID S34n1V313 S329IlaN3ddV IVNOILIGGY SAV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 127 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Viewing airspace information for a special use or controlled airspace I cc nS 1 Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace 2 Press the ENT Key to display an options menu ua _2 3 Review Airspaces should already be highlighted if not select it Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace os Information Page for the selected airspace l CC B 4 Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page 17 84 TOP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 308 121 988 com 15 98 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 S KANSAS RIVER BILLARD MUN INFORMATION TT 55 8NM 081 ELEV 899FT TOPEKA TWR CL D Airspace Information l Liu Fu o o a gt x Time EAT V508 ER NORITIH RANGA TUER TOLEO Namni A bis Kr OG CF a T 329 V280 v U eg Ne o a2 EMRORTA s Press the ENT key to return EMP KUKE to the base page a 9234 A un z Figure 5 12 Navigation Map Informat
134. 9 CONFIG GDL 69 config GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory error Contig service req d The G950 system should be serviced ADDITIONAL FEATURES GDL69 FAIL GDL 69 has failed A failure has been detected in the GDL 69 The receiver is unavailable The G950 system should be serviced MANIFEST GDL software mismatch The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed The G950 system should be serviced communication halted N Lu e Lu e e lt INDEX 304 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES F 22 hee oes d RUBIO GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable correction is unavailable iuh ds a d Ee GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable correction is unavailable is epe ee EON The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed The G950 system should be serviced mismatch communication halted SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES n FPL WPT LOCK Flight plan waypoint Upon power up the G950 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked is locked This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint The 2 flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message This can also 5 E occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted as Remove the waypoint f
135. A GARMIN G 9 D 0 Integrated Flight Deck Pilot s Guide Tecnam P2006T SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD AVOIDANCE AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM ADDITIONAL FEATURES APPENDICES A GARMIN Copyright 2010 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0935 01 or later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A Tel 503 391 3411 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton S040 9RB U K Tel 44 0870 8501241 Fax 44 0870 8501251 Garmin Corporation No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan Tel 886 02 2642 9199 Fax 886 02 2642 9099 For after hours emergency aircraft on ground AOG technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems please contact Garmin s AOG Hotline at 913 397 0836 Website Address www garmin com Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the
136. ALL Inserted Arrival Header OPSHN 309 73 0Nnm Arrival Identifier FSHER 352 98wM arrival airport Jarrival transition PYNON 357 119Nn arrival arrival runway Approach KCOS RNAV 35Rers LPV e g KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL HABUK iaf 021 9 9NH FALUR 261 AUD CEGIX faf E sy 6 GNM RW3SR map y hs 9 1 NM 6368FT 348 4 NH MOGAL mahp Figure 5 70 Stored Flight Plan Page Arrival Inserted 196 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT APPROACH APPR An Approach Procedure APPR can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan The route for a selected approach is defined by designating transition waypoints 17 80 ToPles 116kr pm261 mRkK334 ew01 13 _ 133 3006 121 900 com 15 58 STJ PROC APPROACH LOADING 8 200 NORTH UP M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Thre Destination Airport CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS COLORADO SPRINGS CO m un Selected Approach Approaches Available at E KCOS RNAV 17RGPS LPV ini n gt m m CEGIX fuf 351 30 NM Approach Waypoint tes SEE RW35R mp 351 5 1 Sequence L 6368FT 348 0 4NM E MOGAL mahp T Preview of m Selected Approach LI LI LI gt Figure 5 71 Approach Loading Page Selecting the Approach BS gt A m m Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan 1 Select a stored flight plan from the
137. ARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software or to offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for rebates or other secial offers from Garmin Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification To obtain warranty service an original copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction To obtain warranty service contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in locating a Service Center visit the Garmin website at www garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Servic
138. ATISTICS The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset these odometers can a be reset independently Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed Maximum groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed Resetting trip statistics readouts z 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page lt 2 Press the MENU Key The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed e Reset Trip ODOM AVG GS Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer z e Reset Odometer Resets odometer readout only 40 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW e Reset Maximum Speed Resets maximum speed readout only TERRY V o lt m JJ m e Reset All Resets flight timer departure timer odometers and groundspeed readouts 3 Usethe FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key The selected parameters are reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset SCHEDULER The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages e g Change oil Switch fuel tanks Overhaul Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time event once the message timer reaches zero one time default setting or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 zero periodic Message timers set
139. Assigned Heading of 240 S329IaN3ddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 239 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zu 3 ATC now assigns routing to join V4 A heading of 290 is assigned to intercept V4 The aircraft turns to heading j i 290 as seen in Figure 5 103 8 BS DTK TRK ETE 133 308 121 988 com 15 58 STJ _FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 AA conz E k NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN E E KMKC KCOS DIK DIS LL FA Departure KMKC ALL TIFTOZ TIFTO z HCI TIFTO 28b S 9NH __ Enroute SLN 240 9031H F Airway V244 L AA lt HYS 262 LAA 257 Airwoy VZB3 TBE TBE 278 Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL CURRENT YNY PROFILE ACTIVE WAV WPT VS Th FPH VS REQ FRH TIME TO TOD AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Press the FPL key ta view the previous pose CHCEL VNV Figure 5 103 Assigned Heading of 290 A U LL o lt lt 4 Enter V4 into the flight plan a Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 240 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT b The desired entry point for V4 TOP must be entered Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan insertion point SLN as shown in Figure 5 104 When the V4 entry point TOP is inserted it is placed immediately above the highlighted waypoin
140. BASE ANN TEST Figure 8 5 AUX System Status Page SafeTaxi Current Information S21V SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date The EXPIRES date appears in blue when data is current and in yellow when expired Figures 8 5 and 8 6 NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card Figure 8 6 An expired SafeTaxi database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely o 59 co az un r Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database sIDIANJddY X31GNI 190 01146 00 RevA Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 289 A ADDITIONAL FEATURES GARMIN zi Figure 8 6 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX System Status SE Page The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle If the present date is before the 2 effective date the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue The EXPIRES date is the revision date for the next database cycle NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted m Lu E E BASEMAP BASEMAP BASEMAP REGION WORLDWIDE REGION WORLDWIDE REGION WORLDWIDE VERSION 3 00 VERSION 3 00 VERSION 3 00 GARMIN LTD AND
141. C KANSAS CITY 127 900 ATIS KMCI 128 375 DEST APT NO DESTINATION AIRPORT TIME FLT 00 21 52 TIME FORMAT TIME OFFSET DISPLAY UNITS NAV ANGLE MAG VAR DIS SPD ALT VS TEMP FUEL GALLONS GL GL HR WEIGHT POSITION NAUTICAL CNM KT 23 DEC 09 21 2 7 SSLCL LOCAL 24hr 00 00 ALTITUDE BUFFER CLASS B TMA CLASS C TCA CLASS D RESTRICTED MAGNETICC MOA MILITARY 3E OTHER ADIZ ARRIVAL ALERT AUDIO ALERT FLIGHT DIRECTOR FEETCFT FPH CELSIUSCc POUNDS LB HDDD MM MM SELECTED AUTO SYSTEM CDI 1 00 NH RNWY SURFACE HARD SOFT MIN LENGTH GFT INJINADVNVIN 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuVZvH FORMAT ACTIVE SNGL CUE BARO TRANSITION ALERT OFF ALTITUDE 180 FT I A SOE eS SSS SSS Ss Ss Sea eee a Sse Figure 1 32 System Setup Page B S Restoring system setup defaults zE ad 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page aS 2 Press the DFLTS Softkey F Or E 2 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page a 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key 7 S S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 31 SYSTEM OVERVIEW GARMIN PILOT PROFILES System settings may be saved under a pilot profile When the system is powered on the last selected pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power up Screen Figure 1 5 The G950 can store up to 25 profiles the currently active profile the amo
142. Control GIA Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit a FAF Final Approach Fix GLS Global Navigation Satellite Landing FAIL failure System FC Course From Fix to Distance GMA Garmin Audio Panel System FCC Federal Communication Commission GMT Greenwich Mean Time FCST forecast GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit FD Course From Fix to DME Distance GND ground mS FD flight director gph gallons per hour E FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion GPS Global Positioning System as FFLOW fuel flow Grid MORA Grid Minimum Oft Route Altitude FIS B Flight Information Services Broadcast one degree latitude by one degree z FISDL Flight Information Service Data Link longitude in size and clears the highest 2 elevation reference point in the grid by FL flight level 1000 feet for all areas of the grid m FLC Flight Level Change Groundspeed The velocity that the aircraft is FM Course From Fix to Manual Termination travelling relative to a ground position FMS Flight Management System Ground Track see Track S Sx 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 315 SYSTEM OVERVIEW AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e a LLI am e lt x INDEX APPENDIX C GRS GS GIX HA HDG Heading HF HFOM Hg HI HI SENS HM Horizontal Figure of Merit hPa HPL hr HSDB HSI HT HUL Hz AF AT IAU ICAO IDENT IDNT IF IFR Garmin Reference System Ground s
143. Course To Altitude 230 D Databases 6 7 11 309 Berde in sees erase acer een aceon eeeeneaene 25 26 Bea UU A setae tee eee occ e 33 We E 24 Dead Reckoning 75 Decision Height DH 47 73 Declutter display 76 Delete Entire airway 202 203 Entire procedure 202 203 Flight plan items 202 Flight plans 201 Individual waypoint 202 203 Density Altitude 233 Departure Procedure 193 207 220 222 Select 220 223 220 229 TIT a a S A E E 231 Departure procedure 220 Dilution of Precision DOP 17 1 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T ES JINVGIOAY LNAI NVI SND 8 a SINJINNYLSNI MIAH3AO QuVZVH 1H5I14 TaNvd Olanv 1H5I14 IN31SAS S34n1V314 1VNOILIQQV gt J O rm A m N A ee GARMIN a Direct to 151 174 175 176 177 178 179 214 215 ar ia IDENT function 104 107 S Display b
144. Departure Loading Page is displayed 2 4 Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key 5 Select a departure trom the list and press the ENT Key m 6 Select a runway if required and press the ENT Key In Sm 7 Select a transition if required and press the ENT Key LOAD is highlighted ae 8 Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure E zi 2S 2 220 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN Available Procedure Actions Departure Airport NORTH UP NORT NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGH NORTH UP AIRPORT KHKC PUBLIC WHEELER DOWNTOWN KANSAS CITY MO DEPARTURE TIFTO2 a SELECT DEPAI DEPARTURE CURRENT UNU F ACTIVE VNV WPT VS TGT vs REQ V DEV Press the PROC key to Press the view the previous page view the Loaded Procedures Departure Preview Departure Choices Figure 5 89 Departure Selection Selected Departure Loaded Departure WORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KHKE TIFTO DTK DIS Departure KHEC ALL TIFTOZ TIFTO E rue TON Fi FEY E TREAXESITIUN TIFTO SEERE CURRENT Vt PROFILE ACTIVE VMV WPT Ve TGT V5 REG zx TIHE TO TOO Press the FPL koy ta yira the previous sagn CHCL YV Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys Figure 5 90 Departure Loading 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Viewing available departures at an airport A c
145. E 29 JUL 89 ALTITUDE BUFFER 22 14 13LCL CLASS B TMA TIME FORMAT LOCAL 24hr CLASS C TCA TIME OFFSET 00 00 CLASS D RESTRICTED NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC MOA MILITARY SELECTED AUTO MAG VAR 6 E OTHER ADIZ SYSTEM CDI 2 00 NH DIS SPD NAUTICAL CNM KT ALT VS FEET FT FPM CHANNEL SPACING 25 0 kHz TEMP CELSIUSCc AUDIO ALERT FUEL GALLONS GL GL HR TERENE HARD SOFT WEIGHT POUNDS LB ayn W nsces OFT POSITION HDDD MM MM A A FORMAT ACTIVE SNGL CUE ALTITUDE OFF ALTITUDE 18 0 FT Figure 2 12 Baro Transition Alert AUX System Setup Page Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 53 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 7a ol JJ c m un s3un1V34 JONVdIOAV 1N3W3DVNVIN SND 8 S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3NVd Olanv sid X31GNI FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMI N E VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR VSI o a The Vertical Speed Indicator VSI Figure 2 14 displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non moving tape labeled at 1000 and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 500 fpm The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm If the rate of ascent descent exceeds 2000 fpm the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer FLIGHT ue m Z LJ ce 4 A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical S
146. EL AND CNS A p sv ov f Ar eno J ver J coo oevr f Back J cens FC FW V3 V9 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 D Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the top level softkeys TE 2 173 A EET T 88 T 8 TERIS pksm5msmogoxmwnmo n osos ons ong rn Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys Figure 4 29 Transponder Softkeys PFD TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION Mode selection can be automatic Ground and Altitude Modes or manual Standby ON and Altitude Modes The STBY ON and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey Selecting a transponder mode 1 Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys 2 Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode GROUND MODE Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground The transponder powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one of the Mode Selection Softkeys A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box In Ground Mode the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode by selecting the GND Softkey GND Mode LEL 20 14 48 xPoR 1200
147. ERR VS Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning 6 CRS BARO Knob Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting Turn small knob to adjust course only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode Press to re center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint station 0 COM Knob Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies large knob for MHz small for kHz Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COMI and COM2 o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 The selected COM green is controlled with the COM MIC Key Audio Panel e COM Frequency Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies Transfer Key Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency 121 5 MHz automatically EMERG into the active frequency field C COM VOL SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level shown as a percentage in the COM ao Frequency Box x 2 Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON OFF Direct to Key J Activates the direct to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination specified by identifier chosen from the active route 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 11 FPL Key Displays flight plan information 12 CLR Key Erases information cancels entries or removes menus DFLT MAP Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page MFD only SA 13 MENU Key Displays a context sensitive list of options for accessing additi
148. Fail Safe Operation 115 Automatic Flight Control System AFCS 283 Automatic squelch 92 INDEX Autotuning COM eeseseessereeeseotse etse een gente ies 87 AUtot ning NAVs 96 100 AUTO A 016 atiina 122 AUX System tatus Page 288 290 Aviation Symbols 134 181 B Backlighting 42 Barometric setting Altimeter 46 52 53 Bearing distance measuring 129 Bearing information 47 58 59 C Calibrated Airspeed 231 CAUTION 2 22 22 20000 295 Caution alerts 296 CDe 225 239 250 258 265 306 Closest Point 213 COM channel spacing 91 COM Freguenoy Pox csssieninnn a 84 Communication COM Frequency Box 46 COM Tuning Failure 115 Controls PFD MFD 18 19 26 SoftkeyS 20 23 Copy a Flight Plan 200 Course Deviation Indicator CDI 37 38 60 61 147 Changing scale 223
149. Flight Plan Catalog Page P 2 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored a Flight Plan Page is displayed 3 Press the LD APR Softkey or press the MENU Key select Load Approach and press the ENT Key The x Approach Loading Page is displayed nS 4 Select an approach Press the ENT Key 22 5 Select a transition for the selected approach Press the ENT Key D 6 Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure S z Se 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 197 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zu 17 88 TOP cs 133 308 121 900 con 15 50 STJ PROC APPROACH LOADING 128 200 COM2 v S NORTH UP KCOS PUBLIC eee T CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS esunauo PO U MIODAL COLORADO SPRINGS CO EG o5 np z Selected Approach Selected Transition a AK Transitions Available with x RW35R iI Selected Approach CEGIX HABUK inf Approach Waypoint z FALUR 261 Sequence amp FALUR M HA UK CEGTX St 8r Preview of Selected ow Approach Q Load Approach lt EDEN ee aa ae ie Ba een Pe Lid d Figure 5 72 Approach Loading Page Selecting the Transition E lt STORED FLIGHT PLAN w 3 KMKC KCOS eZ co Lo FSHER a ow g BNH z PYNON 352 11 9mm Approach KCOS RNAV 35Reps LPV Inserted Approach Header HABUK iaf SEE Approach Identifier approach FALUR 5 Onn airport runway and approach type 7 er TE e g
150. G is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX System Setup Page and the full scale deflection setting may also be changed 2 0 nm 1 0 nm 0 3 nm or Auto from this page If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases the CDI is scaled accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation ue m LL ce 4 EIS Changing the selected GPS CDI setting 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SELECTED field in the GPS CDI box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key 5 To cancel the selection press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key AUDIO PANEL amp CNS m S 17 95 AUX SYSTEM SETUP o ES PILOT PROFILE LL ACTIVE DEFAULT PROFILE E USED 0 AVATLABLE 25 OATE TINE AIRSPACE ALERTS EE d DATA BAR FIELDS DATE 29 JUL 09 ALTITUDE BUFFER 200FT FIELD 1 E gt TIME 22 14 13L0L CLASS B THA OFF FIELD 2 Pi t E F RH LOCAL 24hr LASS Ci OFF 3 TRK lt e TIRE FORHAT L NEP CLASS C TCA f FIELD a d SELECTED doc TIME OFFSET 00 00 cLass D OFF FIELD 4 k RESTRICTE OFF i a DISPLAY UNITS bn
151. G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 287 A ADDITIONAL FEATURES GARMIN aS SAFETAXI DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION az SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date When turning on the system the Power up Page indicates whether the databases are current out of date or v not available E DATABASE rE PA Checklist File N A GO Basemap Land 3 00 SafeTaxi Expires 27 AUG 2009 SafeTaxi Database T 4 Terrain 2 04 Lu m Airport Terrain 2 04 TN Obstacle Expires 27 AUG 2009 Z Aviation Expires 27 AUG 2009 All map and terrain data provided is only to be used as a general reference to your surrounding and as an aid to situational awareness AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 8 4 Power up Page SafeTaxi Database TS E Power up Page Display Normal operation SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle e J co E PR SofeTaxi N A Database card contains no SafeTaxi data Table 8 1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions The SateTaxi Region Version Cycle Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found on the AUX System Status page as seen in Figure 8 5 Select the DBASE Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window Scroll through the listed information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown un Lu ec t m T lt z e e c A
152. GND __ Figure 4 30 Ground Mode 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 103 M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 SI3 go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV saunivad JONVdIOAV IN3W3DVNVIA S3DIQN3ddV dvuolnaav SDV QuvzvH 1H5I14 XIGNI AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E STANDBY MODE MANUAL uU cc as A NOTE In Standby Mode the IDENT function is inhibited Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey In Standby the transponder does oz not reply to interrogations but new codes can be entered When Standby is selected a white STBY indication E and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box In all other modes these fields appear in green STBY Mode White Code Number and C 09 Figure 4 31 Standby Mode ua A v od MANUAL ON MODE ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S ef Lu P 2 c lt replies but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited In ON Mode a green ON indication and transponder zu code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box Sa lt ON Mode i No Altitude z LINEONSONNCONNEOEIES 77777 E Io MN ALERTS co HE Figure 4 32 ON Mode 7 ALTITUDE MODE AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL W lt Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by selecting the ALT Sof
153. Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 157 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N INTERSECTIONS Parr B A NOTE The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR not necessarily the VOR T used to define the intersection SS MMC MN MN NNNM RR RN e Lu oz The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections In addition to displaying E a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area the Intersection Information Page displays intersection information in three boxes labeled INTERSECTION INFORMATION and NEAREST VOR Selected Intersection ua 17 80 RO 133 308 121 900 com 15 50 STJ 128 200 Intersection Identifier ui ua 2 ov Intersection Info a E Region lt Lat Long CENMROROISIS DEyWOUP Identifier Type symbol Ou Radial to VOR T z Distance to VOR o a Navigation Map zo Showing Selected lt 9 Intersection x PEORTA v E Li lt Figure 5 36 Intersection Information Page Selecting an intersection 1 With the Intersection Information Page displayed enter an identifier in the Intersection Box 2 Press the ENT Key zd Sc n EE a a a 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor z Or 2 1 With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed press the FMS Knob 2 Press t
154. H5I14 C PA Selects the passenger address system The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key is pressed SPKR Selects and deselects the cabin speaker if installed COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the speaker SI3 11 MKR MUTE Selects marker beacon receiver audio Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver audio Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received Also stops play of recorded COM audio go Le ue 12 HI SENS Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity Press again to return to low sensitivity TANVWd OIGNV 13 DME Turns optional DME audio on or off NAVI When selected audio from the 1 NAV receiver can be heard 15 ADF Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 NAV2 When selected audio from the 2 NAV receiver can be heard 17 AUX Not used in the P2006T JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH MAN SQ Enables manual squelch for the intercom When the intercom is active press the PILOT Knob to illuminate SQ Turn the PILOT PASS Knobs to adjust squelch PLAY Press once to play the last recorded COM audio Press again while audio is playing and the previous block of recorded audio will be played Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded gt block Pressing the MKR MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play a PILOT Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation B 21 COPIT
155. HSI FRMT Displays the softkeys for selecting the two HSI formats ne 360 HSI Displays HSI as a 360 compass rose A ARC HSI Displays HSI as a 140 viewable arc gt BRG2 Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2 or GPS waypoint identitier m and GPS derived distance information and ADF frequency ALT UNIT Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to metric units e METERS When enabled displays altimeter in meters IN Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury z HPA Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals x STD BARO Sets barometric pressure to 29 92 in Hg 1013 hPa if metric units are selected 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 21 A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 GARMIN ae OBS Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS only available with active A leg E CDI Cycles through GPS VOR1 and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI T DME Displays the DME Tuning Window allowing tuning and selection of the DME F optional 29 XPDR Displays transponder mode selection softkeys G STBY Selects standby mode transponder does not reply to any interrogations ON Selects Mode A transponder replies to interrogations ALT Selects Mode C altitude reporting mode transponder replies to identification and a altitude interrogations GND Manually selects Ground Mode the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to dis
156. I 1H5I13 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv sia IDE s gt c m m S3u01V34 JNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N MAP RANGE WN cc gt ud n There are 28 different map ranges available from 500 feet to 2000 nm The current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the map and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the map When the ua map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G950 to accurately represent the map E a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range To change the map range turn the Joystick gt counter clockwise to decrease the range or clockwise to increase the range E 2 Range Overzoom Li IE Am AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 5 6 Map Range AUTO Z00M Auto zoom allows the G950 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the Lid LL o lt lt at active waypoint Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick and remains until lt a the active waypoint changes a terrain or traffic alert occurs the aircraft takes off or the manual override times S out timer set on Map Setup Window If a terrain caution or warning occurs any map page displaying terrain data automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert If a new traffic advisory alert occurs
157. I Scale o 0 CDI Z d E E Figure 2 23 Course Deviation Indicator The CDI can display two sources of navigation GPS or NAV VOR localizer Color indicates the current z z navigation source magenta for GPS or green for VOR and LOC The full scale limits for the CDI are defined 25 by a GPS derived distance when coupled to GPS When coupled to a VOR or localizer LOC the CDI has the a same angular limits as a mechanical CDI If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale two dots while coupled to GPS the crosstrack error XTK is displayed below the white aircraft symbol D ef ADDITIONAL FEATURES APPENDICES Figure 2 24 Navigation Sources INDEX 60 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Changing navigation sources IN31SAS eo lt m JJ m 1 Select the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1 This places the light blue tuning box over the NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD 2 Select the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2 This places the light blue tuning z box over the NAV2 standby frequency z v 3 Select the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS z NAV1 Selected for Tuning NAV2 Selected for Tuning Nav11 13 00 NAV1 115 95 NAV2 118 98 IIXD SZ 108 18 lt gt GPS LOC2 gt Selected Selected Ae a2 m I D i d Fe fa dt The system automatically switche
158. ION MAP HIA RIGS NEMAHA COUNTY STATA LAKE TIFTO gt TOP prs 19 4 Bre 147 136 975 e LEAN UIEDOENER re er 118 808 com GPS NAV LOST sl I S C navigation GPS fail SIMULATOR Sim mode is active Do not use for navigation GCU FAIL GCU is inoperative XPOR 1200 ALT LCL 22 12 29 133 3800 121 988 com COM2 NORTH UP 128 200 Dor PERRY LAKE up e a WT Figure 5 143 Dead Reckoning Mode GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow EERU 5N ORIST GARMIN Distance amp Bearing Dead Reckoning Annunciaion GPS Navigation Lost Message Wind Data Dead Reckoning Annunciation Subdued Aircraft Symbol NOTE The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than 30 or less than 20 or when a 65 bank angle is reached Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN nazar AVOIDANCE SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE Hazard avoidance features available for the G950 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with terrain and air traffic M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Terrain Avoidance Terrain Proximity SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Traffic e Traffic Information Service TIS x 6 1 TERRAIN PROXIMITY WARNING Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance Terrain Proximity is ee intended only to enhance situational
159. L ALERT COM CONFIG ALT VS FEET FT FPM OFF 0 0NH CHANNEL SPACING 25 0 kHz TEMP CELSIUSCc AUDIO ALERT NEAREST APT FUEL GALLONS GL GL HR VOICE FEMALE RNWY SURFACE HARD SOFT ee awe mam om E FORMAT ACTIVE SNGL CUE DISPLAY UNITS 7 NAV ANGLE TRUECT HAG VAR MAGNETICOC DIS SPD NAU TRUECT ALT VS FEE FT FPM TEMP FAHRENHEITCF FUEL GALLONS GL GL HR WEIGHT POUNDS LB POSITION HDDD MM MM BARO TRANSITION ALERT OFF ALTITUDE 18000FT Figure 2 20 Navigation Angle Settings AUX System Setup Page 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 57 SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT ue m LL ce 4 ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INDEX A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN TURN RATE INDICATOR The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half standard and standard turn rates A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn rate The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds based on the present turn rate A standard rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark corresponding to a predicted heading of 18 from the current heading At rates greater than 4 deg sec an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector a
160. L Number Cumulative Legs CUM or REM or Leg Number NN Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan Flight Plan Leg 117 88 TOP cs 1 E _TRE ETE 0 133 388 121 988 com 15 58 stu EN T TRIP PLANNING ee ee ee i INPUT DATA f Preview A aa PAGE HODE AUTOMATIC Tr ID Planning Page Mode g LEG REM CALIBRATED AS Automatic Manual F l Ig h t PI an Leg KODS IND ALTITUDE PRESSURE i E ES CUTE ATO TER i o es ta oe mE WiBTED STATES OF AMERICI AERA TUI aie wee Trip Statistics j J eus rion Ground Speed Desired Track BON I FUEL onsoARD Fuel Flow Distance E TRIP STATS FUEL STATS OTHER STATS Fuel On Board Aircraft Est Time Enroute OTK EFFICIENCY DENSITY ALT Calibr ated Airspeed Est Time of Arrival 597m ToTAL ENDUR TRUE AIRSPEED Indicated Altitude Enroute Safe Altitude 0455 REN FUEL Barometric Pressure Sunrise Time local X3 34LCL REH ENDUR Total Air Temperature Sunset Time local 16300FT FUEL REO 14 29 LL TOTAL RANGE Other Sta tistics Density Altitude Fuel Statistics True Airspeed TAS Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Li Amo EAIN Softkeys Total Range Automatic Manual Page Mode Figure 5 96 Trip Planning Page Flight Plan Waypoint Mode The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs automatic page mode or on pilot inputs manual page mode Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inp
161. LN SLN 260 Airway 244 LAA cA HYS 262 Lu LAA Airway 263 TBE TIME TO TOD AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 5 110 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan 5 Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan a Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt b Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg 22 C Press the ACT LEG Softkey The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5 111 Note the TOP to ds SLN leg is actually part of V4 r gt t TOP SLN d or CANCEL t Figure 5 111 Comfirm Active Leg ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 244 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT d Verity the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key Note in Figure 5 112 the magenta arrow in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg Note the phase of flight remained in Terminal TERM mode up to this point because a departure leg was active Since a leg after the departure is now active the current CDI flight phase is ENR Enroute and CDI scaling has changed to 2 0 nm 17 80 ToP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 308 121 908 con 15 58 STJ FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 nid CTIVE FLIGHT PLAN ACTI q KMKC KCOS i MCI EB Enroute TOP Airway V4 SLN SLN Airway
162. Le jm 2 Range E Dispiaye Ground Elevation at Pointer Elevations Location only visible when Pointer is displayed ua ui Figure 5 16 Navigation Map TOPO SCALE AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Displaying removing the topographic scale TOPO SCALE 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Select the Map group and press the ENT Key 4 Highlight the TOPO SCALE field 5 Select On or Off 6 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt HAZARD AVOIDANCE MAP SETUP AFCS ORIENTATION AUTO 200M MAX LOOK FWD MIN LOOK FWD TIME OUT LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR ADDITIONAL FEATURES WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING Off o TOPO DATA On gt 2000nm Ea TOPO SCALE On TOPO SCALE a TERRAIN DATA Off gt 2000nm On Off OBSTACLE DATA 4 On 20NM x FUEL RNG Rsv Off 00 20 Figure 5 17 Navigation Map Setup Menu TOPO SCALE Setup gt lt Lu e 132 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT MAP SYMBOLS This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed Each listed type of symbol can be turned on or off and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set The decluttering of the symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is als
163. M HABUK BE Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL OPSHN 3Nt 258 CAT 3 0uM 10000FT 39 84 10000rT 11 944 10000FT 700 Be Approach KCOS RNAV 35RGes LPV HABUK iof 021 59m FALUR 26011 594 CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE UNV WPT 10000FT at OPSHN 3NH VS TGT 654FPH FPA VS REQ PH TIME TO TOO Press the FPL key to view the previous pose VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV VNV amp Figure 5 127 Adjusting the Descent C Press the ENT Key 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 255 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt c m S m s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi 15 As seen in Figure 5 128 the aircraft is approaching TOD Note the target vertical speed required to reach the a selected altitude The Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator RVSI are now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5 129 When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5 129 and an aural alert Vertical track will be heard RK 136 975 gt 118 000 com Eu ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 136 975 3 NORTH UP L ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Te KMKC KCOS z LAA Airvoy 7 V263 1BE TBE SoS Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL lt OPSHN 3NA 258 JENN TBBBOFT PSHN 258 3 0NH TBBBBFT FSHER 357 8 8uH TB8BOBFT PYNON 352 119N4 1
164. N tic MANAGEMENT AIRWAYS Low Altitude Airways or Victor Airways primarily serve smaller piston engine propeller driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower altitudes Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1 200 feet above ground level AGL and extend up to but not including 18 000 feet mean sea level MSL Low Altitude Airways are designated with a V before the airway number hence the name Victor Airways since they run primarily between VORs M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 High Altitude Airways or Jet Routes primarily serve airliners jets turboprops and turbocharged piston aircraft operating above 18 000 feet MSL Jet Routes start at 18 000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45 000 feet MSL altitudes above 18 000 feet are called flight levels and are described as FL450 for 45 000 feet MSL Jet Routes are designated with a J before the route number z Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray the same shade used for roads High Altitude Airways are drawn in green When both types of airways are displayed High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude Airways g 2 When airways are selected for display on the map the airway waypoints VORs NDBs and Intersections are a2 also displayed nS m 17 80 ToP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 988 com 15 50 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 con2 Vo3z 5 LE NORTH UP gt CONCORDI m ents Low Altitude E Airway 2 Victor Airway
165. NAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 252 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N FLIGHT MANAGEMENT P PUBLIC CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS COLORADO SPRINGS CO M3IAH3AO IN31SAS APPROACH CHANNEL CHANNEL 97799 ID W35A SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 63 FT PRIMARY FREQUENCY ua SEQUENCE HABUK iaf FALUR EL CEGIX faf 6 RW35R map 5 2 LOAD EK Me BG aS A z aD Figure 5 124 Barometric Minimums Set E i With LOAD highlighted again press the ENT Key The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen in Figure 5 125 IDE s gt c m S m TRK ETE 133 388 121 908 cor ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Laer p KMKC KCOS Airway V263 TBE BE Se ee Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL OPSHN 3tt 250 SAGNA 10000FT JINVGIOAV QuVZvH OPSHN 258 ZONH 10000FT FSHER 352 98u4 10000FT gt 3527 11 SNH 1 Q00FT e ua Approach KCOS RNAV 35RcePs LPV HABUK iof 021 5 9Nn FALUR 261 5 6NH 8600r1 CURRENT VNV PROFILE gt ACTIVE UNV WPT 100OOFT at OPSHN 3N m o VS TGT 663FPH FPA D U VS REQ FPM TIME TO TOO es V DEV n gt r Press the FPL key to ZANM view the previous poge VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV VNV amp P a Figure 5 125 Loaded Approach m z A m ua 2 J m SS 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 253 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL
166. NCL VNV Softkey Figure 5 86 Enabling Disabling Vertical Navigation ADDITIONAL FEATURES Enabling VNV guidance 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD z 2 Press the ENBL VNV Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Enable VNV and press the ENT Key Vertical i navigation is enabled and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box z defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation e g HABUK Disabling VNV guidance 2 B 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2 Press the CNCL VNV Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Cancel VNV and press the ENT Key Vertical navigation is disabled 214 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation V DEV vertical speed required VS REQ and time to top of descent bottom of descent TIME TO TOD BOD going invalid The Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI and Required Vertical Speed Indication RVSI on the PFD are removed and the V DEV VS REQ and TIME TO TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed VNV remains disabled until manually enabled Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct to waypoint The G950 allows a vertical navigation direct to to any waypoint in the active f
167. NDEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN 1 5 G950 CONTROLS The G950 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated functionality Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and the Audio Panel PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section Audio Panel controls are described in the Audio Panel and CNS section see the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV COM controls PFD MFD CONTROLS OOO O lt gt COM ys CRS 2 BARO q o dg e e T or r map FMS PUSH CRSR Ceceee Peeccees LEETS eo Figure 1 15 PFD MFD Controls NAV VOL ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON OFF NAV Frequency Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies Transfer Key 3 NAV Knob Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies large knob for MHz small for kHz Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAVI and NAV2 4 Heading Knob Turn to manually select a heading Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW 5 Joystick Turn to change map range
168. NT Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD The following airspace alerts are displayed in the message window INSIDE ARSPC Inside airspace The aircraft is inside the airspace ARSPC AHEAD Airspace ahead Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10 less than 10 minutes minutes MaAIAYSAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 iis NEAR AAT PEED Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position ARSPC NEAR Airspace near e 7 Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position less than 2 nm Table 5 6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages SND 8 13NYd Olanv sid IDE s gt c m m S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1VNOILIQQV QuVZVH S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 173 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 5 5 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION a gt The Direct to method of navigation initiated by pressing the Direct to Key on either the MFD or PFD is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport o cu Once a direct to is activated the G950 establishes a point to point course line from the present position to the selected direct to destination Course guidance is provided until the direct to is replaced with a new direct to or 2 flight plan or cancelled A vertical navigation VNV direct t
169. NT Cu FLIGHT PLAN Bo KMKC KCOS Active Flight Plan Comment E TIFIO ips Enroute Active Flight Plan Waypoint List Waypoint ID Desired Track to Waypoint Distance to Waypoint Ce Ec SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Airway Identifier m U Figure 5 54 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD gt 17 80 TOP GS 133 300 121 900 com S 15 58 STJ FPL FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG 128 200 COMZ m _NORTH UP 9 ar m Catalog Contents ns Used m KMKC KCOS Empty KMKC KCOS Flight Plan List Serra 4 cree rae Comment im os c pur TIFTO a m Selected Flight Plan Map INJINADVNVIN JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH m Selected FPL Info DEPARTURE KMKC S Departure Waypoint DESTINATION KCOS E D ti ti W y t TOTAL DISTANCE 618NM E o On ay pom e R Total Flight Plan Distance Enroute Safe Altitude gt Press the FPL key to A 1008n view the previous page N O MAP NEW ACTIVE INVERT EDIT COPY DELETE IMPORI EXPORT d SOT C y 5 Figure 5 55 Flight Plan Catalog Page x no E The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD and in the Active Flight Plan SO Window on the PFD Itis the flight plan to which the G950 is currently providing guidance and is shown P on the navigation maps Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and are available for activation becomes the active flight plan 2 A UA 2 c m gt lt 190 0
170. NT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE UNV wey SO BBer ot HABLK iof I us TOT S44FPM FPA VS REO n o o TIME TO TOO 94731 V DEV FT Press the FPL key te f ISN view the provicus poge MAP NEH WPT VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV VNV amp Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE Annunciation Figure 5 94 Approach Loading 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 227 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Viewing available approaches at an airport I cc nS 1 From the Airport Information Page first page in the WPT group press the APR Softkey The Approach Information Page is displayed defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page 2 To select another airport press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor enter an identitier facility name city and TS press the ENT Key 5 E 3 Press the FMS Knob then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach The approach is previewed on the map 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches Press the ENT Key to select the approach The E cursor moves to the Transition box The approach is previewed on the map 5 Turnthe small FMS Knob to view the available transitions Press the ENT Key to select the transition The cursor moves to the Minimums box The approach is previewed on the map 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO minimums on or off Press the ENT Key a When minimums are selected on the cursor moves to the minimum
171. NTOWN KANSAS CITY MO Selected Departure MCTI mnis SED E Departures Available at KMKC Departure Waypoint 323 11 8NM Sequence 259 57 NM 219 114NH Preview of Selected Departure 20 NM i ae ESS aS Ea ES eee eS eee Figure 65 Departure Loading Page Selecting the Departure Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan 1 Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed 3 Press the LD DP Softkey or press the MENU Key select Load Departure and press the ENT Key The Departure Loading Page is displayed 4 Select a departure Press the ENT Key 5 Select a runway served by the selected departure if required Press the ENT Key 6 Select a transition for the selected departure Press the ENT Key 7 Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 193 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m m s3un1V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI GARMIN 17 80 ToP es 116kr pm261 mK334 TED 1 13 133 300 121 900 com 15 50 sTJ PROC DEPARTURE LOADING 128 200 NORTH UP COH2 gt PUBLIC Departure Airport WHEELER DOWNTOWN KANSAS CITY MO Se
172. NVGIOAV QuVZvH S21V S34n1V33 1VNOILIQQV Figure 5 131 Approaching Bottom of Descent BOD at OPSHN Offset Waypoint S329IlaN3ddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 257 258 GARMIN 18 The aircraft is approaching OPSHN The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the PFD as seen in Figure 5 132 Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircratt on a track through the turn radius to intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI ES noto 352 in 8 seconds SEM e Ms EE E EE TES 1735 1 1 1 1 136375 1 20 20 17 80 cs 125kr DTK352 TRK 258 ETE 0 28 133 380 121 988 com 15 58 FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 208 COH2 ND NORTH UP d d L5 E KL 25 LI Airway V263 TBE TBE EMT Tnm Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL OPSHN 3NM T pec gt OPSHN 352 l 990AFT FSHER 352 9600FT PYNON 352 9200FT Approach KCOS RNAV 35RePs LPY HABUK iaf 021 5 9NM S9000FT 261 5 QNM 8600FT OPSHNII j J ACTIVE VNV WPT 9 FT at HABUK iaf VS TGT 664FPM FPA a h VS REQ ____ 11 39 Press the FPL key to view the previous page T MP VIEW VNV PROFICNCL WWW 9 7 TRNAS SE Turn right to 352 now SCIES ERE BE GITE Dub fos 186 975 IET 20 zv Figure 5 132 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN
173. OM1 15 58 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 COM2 MEASURE POINTER p MANHATTAN REGL 3600FT msl N 39 08 70 11 6NM 041 ELEV 106QFT MANHATTAN TWR CL D CUPS WO96 40 25 TANTA NORTH UP IDE s i c m S m Pointer Lat Long JINVGIOAV QuVZvH KHHK e NOE TENT NOP PREF easurement Line KERI ait 300 NC 70 TURES uN pfo S21V rH SRI o S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV S329IlaN3ddV 3UNM DCLTR Figure 5 13 Navigation Map Measuring Bearing and Distance X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 129 SYSTEM OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N TOPOGRAPHY All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation similar to aviation sectional charts Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures 133 300 121 988 con 128 288 corte Vau ORT Navigation Map Topographic Data K u Map Black Background TOPO Softkey Not Enabled E p Be TOPO Softkey GI m TOPO Off Enabled TOPO On Figure 5 14 Navigation Map Topographic Data Displaying removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps 1 2 3 Press the MAP Softkey the INSET Softkey for the PFD In
174. OPTIONS when there are no options for the window page selected The main controls used in association with all window page group operations are described in Section 1 5 G950 Controls SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 Navigating a menu 1 Press the MENU Key to display the menu 2 Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options a scroll bar always appears to the right of the i window box when the option list is longer than the window box 2 v 3 Press the ENT Key to select the desired option m 4 Press the CLR Key or the FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation No Options for Options for FPL Window NRST Window 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5DI14 PAGE MENU PAGE MENU OPTIONS No Options JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Figure 1 24 Page Menu Examples I A DATA ENTRY 7 The method for directly entering alphanumeric data e g Flight ID waypoint identifiers barometric minimum descent altitude into the G950 is by using the FMS Knob corresponding to the display PFD MFD dz gt In some instances such as when entering an identifier the G950 tries to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered In this case if the desired identifier appears use the ENT Key to confirm the as entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually This can save the pilot from entering all the characters of the identifier x S z A z i S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for
175. Outer Knob Small Inner Knob FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Figure 1 16 Dual Concentric Knob EIS SOFTKEY FUNCTION The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level or page being displayed The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey When a softkey is selected its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned off at which time it reverts to white text on black background When a softkey function is disabled the softkey label is subdued dimmed Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Softkey On Softkey Names ALERTS Bezel Mounted Displayed Softkeys Press HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure 1 18 Softkeys Third Level PFD Configuration ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS INDEX 20 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW PFD SOFTKEYS The CDI IDENT TMR REF NRST and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected ERR VS o lt m JJ m The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions including GPS NAV terrain traffic and lightning optional Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to retur
176. PFD and MFD Updating Garmin databases 1 Copy the data to the appropriate data cards 2 Insert one SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of each PFD 3 Apply power to the G950 System View the MFD Power up screen Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the Power up screen When updating the terrain database an in progress message may be seen It this message is present wait for the system to finish loading before verifying the correct databases are initialized then proceed to step 3 DATABASE VA Checklist File N A Ky Basemap Land 3 00 safeTaxi Expires 17 DEC 2809 A Terrain 2 04 Airport Terrain 2 04 TN Obstacle Expires 17 DEC 20609 Aviation Expires 19 NOV 2009 All map and terrain data provided is only to be used as a general reference to your surrounding and as an aid to situational awareness Figure B 3 Database Information on the Power up Screen 4 Acknowledge the Power up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey 5 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 6 Select the DBASE Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE box 7 Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases are current and there are no errors 8 Power down the G950 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 311 JINVGIOAV INJINAJDVNVIN SND 8 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO QuVZvH 1H5DI14 TANVd OIGNV
177. PPENDICES INDEX 288 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 RevA A GARMIN ADDITIONAL FEATURES The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in Figure 8 5 0954 is deciphered as follows 09 Indicates the year 2009 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS S Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi 4 ndicates the fourth issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year The SateTaxi EFFECTIVE date 02 JUL 09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle SafeTaxi EXPIRES date 27 AUG 00 is the revision date for the next database cycle SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I13 nav1 188 90 lt 116 30 GS 126 200 123 800 com NAV2 110 70 AUX SYSTEM STATUS 119 158 COM2 NRST APT F K64 Lm e TNL AND UALLEV STATUS SERIAL NUMBER VERSION AIRFRAME 2006T Pos 4 8 NM N SYS SOFTWARE VERSION vsR FPM 199 CRG PART NUMBER BRG 193 fits TPA 1900 FT 47801697 cry islas CTAF 122 900 CHECKLIST NOT AVAILABLE c LONGEST RUNWAY 4 90 go 16 34 o Peng e 3030x80 zx DATABASE GD NRST FREQS 4 03 oe BASEMAP z KANSAS CITY 47509715 20 REGION WORLDWIDE m ioa 0857012141 32 VERSION 3 00 KLWC 121 225 8857022170 3 GARMIN LTD ND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2009 DEST APT a f SAFETAXI Z NO DESTINATION 42000363 2 12 o AIRPORT d REBION e o TIME sig VERSION m suf 0 CYCLE a9S SafeTaxi Data Oe EFFECTIVE 92 JUL 29 EXPIRES 27 AUGC 09 GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2009 AVIATION REGION WORLDWIDE JINVGIOAV QuVZvH AUTO e LRU S ARFRM D
178. Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude gt 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode P 4 Press the ENT Key The altitude is now shown in blue indicating it is usable for vertical guidance Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance ae pY 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD mae 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude P 3 Press the ENT Key The altitude is now shown in blue indicating it is usable for vertical guidance z Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level MSL values to the nearest hundred An E altitude constraint in feet above ground level AGL format is supported for airports When a database altitude restriction is displayed the G950 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint effectively a overriding the database restriction only before the FAF When a database altitude restriction of type AT or ABOVE or AT or BELOW is activated the system uses the AT portion of the restriction to define the vertical E profile S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 217 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e An altitude constraint is invalid if F Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be excee
179. Press the MENU Key b With Select LRU Window highlighted press the ENT Key 3 Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 17 8 TOP Gs DTK TRK ETE 133 308 121 988 com 15 58 STJ AUX SYSTEM STATUS 128 200 COM2 gt ui STATUS SERIAL NUMBER VERSION AIRFRAME P2 Q6T SYS SOFTWARE VERSION 0935 01 E CRG PART NUMBER 190 01147 00 SYSTEM ID Mi a a a CHECKLIST NOT AVAILABLE e 000001 ce lt a 0000002 c ake a REGION WORLDWIDE 000001 i VERSION 3 00 T nanaaa2 GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2008 2S SAFETAXI REGION US VERSION 2 27 CYCLE 0987 dl zt EFFECTIVE 17 DEC 09 EXPIRES 11 FEB 10 E lt GARMIN LTD AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES 2009 q AVIATION REGION WORLDWIDE hf J a LRU ARFRM DBASE J ee LLJ A Figure 1 11 Example System Status Page gt lt LLI A 10 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page Refer to the Appendices and Additional Features sections for more information about databases ERR VS o lt m JJ m Viewing database information 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Status Page 2 To place the cursor in the Database Box a Press the DBASE Softkey SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Or a Press the MENU Key b Highlight Select Dbase Window
180. QV During approach the CDI scale ramps down even further see Figures 2 28 and 2 29 This transition normally occurs within 2 0 nm of the final approach fix FAF The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector to Final VTF is selected If the active waypoint is the FAF the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45 of the final approach segment course S32IaN3ddV f the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure the active leg and preceding missed approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have passed the turn initiation point XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 63 CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0 3 nm A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN lir angle set angle based T by system on database ii information e e i 7 e e FAF 1 FAF Landing Threshold SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 0 nm 0 3 nm CDI Full scale Deflection O 0 3 nm CDI Full scale Deflection 350 ft i _ _ course widt if M Bis FLIGHT un j LL ce j 4 CDI scale varies if VTF is activated CDI scale varies if VTF is activated CY VY Figure 2 28 Typical LNAV and LNAV V Approach CDI Scaling Figure 2 29 Typical LNAV VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling EIS When a missed approach is activat
181. RES Configuring SafeTaxi range M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Page press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key PAGE MENU OPTIONS Map Setup Declutter SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Measure Bearina Distance Show Chart Press the FMS CRSR knob to wn return to base page Figure 8 2 Navigation Map PAGE MENU Map Setup Option 5 nO T Zu 3 Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key 2 4 Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI 5 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances 6 Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance tor maximum SafeTaxi display range 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5DI14 7 Press the ENT Key to complete the selection 8 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page MAP SETUP JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Aviation ACTIVE FPL ACTIVE FPL WPT Me LARGE APT gt MEDIUM APT i A SMALL APT SAFE TAXI SAFETAXI Option RHY EXTENSION INT HAYPOINT gt NDB WAYPOINT ny VOR WAYPOINT 2 feTaxi gt im CLASS B TMA ange Cc Options E CLASS C TCA nz n gt CLASS D m RESTRICTED MOA MILITARY OTHER ADI2Z TFR gt 9 9 m A m wn Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page XIGNI Figure 8 3 MAP SETUP Menu Aviation Group SAFETAXI Range Options 190 01146 00 RevA Garmin
182. RES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT A GARMIN indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry PARALLEL TRADK PARALLEL TRACK OFFSET OFFSET DIRECTION DIRECTION DISTANCE A Subdued Prompt Unavailable Unavailable Status Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Approach Parallel Track Unavailable Geometry Active Invalid Route Geometry Approach Leg Active Press CLR to cancel Press CLR to cancel Figure 5 79 Parallel Track Unavailable If the active leg is not a track between two fixes TF or a course to a fix DF leg the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the active leg type PARALLEL TRACK Offset Direction amp Distance Subdued Unavailable Cancel Prompt Active Status Parallel Track Active Press CLR to cancel Figure 5 80 Cancelling Parallel Track Cancelling parallel track 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Parallel Track and press the ENT Key The Parallel Track Window is displayed with CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK highlighted 3 Press t
183. Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT pu C KICT OS WICHITA MID CONT 146 NM NERO 4 166 FPM 230 O OS 146 NM 2350 dE C M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 G Murs MIS MU DEST Wx O ATIS 125 150 3 OSS LONGEST RUNWAYS 2 WIL TSR s 10391x158 01R 19L 7381x158 IDE s i c m S m Figure 5 34 Destination Airport Box n gt Airport Identifier always visible SE gN T 22 2 Airport Name always visible 25 m 3 Position From distance and bearing from Destination Airport visible when the destination mode is active or when the Nearest Airport is same as the destination airport or when no ARTCC frequencies are detecetd Vertical Speed Required Vertical speed necessary at current ground speed to perform a straight descent to airport 4 with a maximum of 5000 beyond which it becomes dashed Visible when destination mode active or when z nearest airport is same as destination airport or when no ARTCC frequencies are detected e 5 Bearing To directional bearing to destination airport always visible 6 Route Distance total distance from present position to final destination through all waypoints always visible m S B 7 Traffic Pattern Altitude Traffic Pattern Altitude of destination airport Visible when destination mode active or c when nearest airport is same as destination airport or when one or fewer ARTCC frequencie
184. S e WARNING This level of alert requires immediate attention Warning alert text is shown in red in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a continuous chime and a flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation see Figure A 3 Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the aural chime SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Warning voice alerts repeat continuously until acknowledged by pressing the WARNING Softkey CAUTION This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require intervention v Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a single chime and a flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation see Figure A 3 Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert go Z Caution voice alerts repeat three times or until acknowledged by pressing the CAUTION Softkey 2 un ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY This level of alert provides general information m Annunciation alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window no aural tone is generated An annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation see Figure A 3 Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window Instead message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ADVISORY Softkey a
185. SA SAT SBAS SCIT SD sec parallel track SEL SLCT Push to Talk SFC power SIAP quantity SID SIGMET right right runway Sim radial SLP SKD Receiver Autonomous Integrity SMBL Monitoring SPD random access memory SPI reference SPKR remaining fuel remaining above SQ Reserve SRVC SVC required STAL reserve fuel reserve entered by pilot STAR reverse revision revise STATS Constant Radius Turn to Fix STBY Radio Magnetic Indicator STD remote STRMSCP range SUA runway SUSP roll SVS read only memory SW revolutions per minute SYS reset fuel reserve Tuel reserve entered by pilot T right TA reversionary TACAN receive TAF TAS south TAS Selective Availability TAT Static Air Temperature TAWS Satellite Based Augmentation System TCA Storm Cell Identification and Tracking TCAS Secure Digital TEL second s TEMP Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T A GARMIN select surface Standard Instrument Approach Procedures Standard Instrument Departure Significant Meteorological Information simulator slip skid symbol speed Special Position Identification speaker squelch service stall Standard Terminal Arrival Route statistics standby standard Stormscope Special Use Airspace suspend Synthetic Vision System software system true Traffic Advisory Tactical Air Navigation System Terminal Aerodrome Forecast True Airspeed Traffic Advisory System true airspeed Total Air Temperature Terrain
186. SD data card Contact Jeppesen www jeppesen com for subscription and update information 1N3IAN39VNVIN 1H5DI14 A NOTE After the aviation database is installed the card may be removed Updating the Jeppesen aviation database JINVGIOAV QuVZvH 1 With the G950 System OFF insert the SD card containing the aviation database update into the top card slot of the PFD to be updated label of SD card should face left 2 Turn the G950 System ON A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the PFD gt A ua DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE AVIATION DATABASE WORLDWIDE WORLDWIDE 0604 0605 gt 13 APR 2086 11 NAY 2886 E 11 MNAY 2886 8 JUN 2886 a2 22 NO WILL BE ASSUMED IN 8 SECONDS AS Figure B 1 Database Update Prompt gt m J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 309 APPENDIX B GARMI N zi 3 Press the ENT Key to start the database update A prompt similar to the following is displayed t ec nS DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE AVIATION DATABASE FROM TO WORLDWIDE WORLDWIDE n 0604 0605 2 13 APR 2006 11 MAY 2086 11 MAY 2886 8 JUN 2086 5 l cc B NO WILL BE ASSUMED IN 8 SECONDS UPDATING AVIATION DATABASE PLEASE WAIT UPDATED 1 FILES SUCCESSFULLY PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE o CONTINUING IN 8 SECONDS Figure B 2 Database Update Confirmation 4 After the update completes the PFD continues to power up normally
187. SND 8 TANVd OIGNV Nearest Page Group NRST A 113 TEL ee m Fh c BR Dor E 133 308 121 980 cm Nearest Airports Nearest Intersections CILE P Nearest NDB M ies wi Stole 21o magr n zn 527 398 1 E Nearest VOR S E MM INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5I13 218 e IKE Be 12 REI a 128 20 an Nearest User Waypoints m ura e 1558 TES ERES ADR Er N E pe JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Nearest Frequencies Nearest Airspaces S21V S34n1V33 1VNOILIQQV Figure 1 29 Nearest Pages SADIGNAddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 29 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob there are pages for flight planning FPL and loading procedures PROC which are accessed by key In some instances softkeys may be used to access the Procedure Loading pages SYSTEM 2 ce Lu gt e The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD Main pages within this group are selected _2 by turning the small FMS Knob T2 E Flight Plan Page Group FPL ae ee h ea ese Active Flight Plan Lr Flight Plan Catalog x Stored Flight Plan NEW Softkey AUDIO PANEL amp CNS z Figure 1 30 Flight Plan Pages rz S The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key A menu z is initialized and when a departure approach or arrival is selected the appropriate Procedure Loading page
188. SYSTEM STATUS u The G950 performs an automatic test of TIS during power up If TIS passes the test TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating Mode in the air If TIS fails the power up test an annunciation is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page Annunciation Data is not being received from the transponder I Data is being received from the transponder but a failure is detected in the data stream AUDIO PANEL amp CNS The transponder has failed FLIGHT MANAGEMENT TIS is unavailable or out of range Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action Table 6 3 TIS Failure Annunciations HAZARD LL YW zs S z 17 95 EEIE System Test has FAIL prs M TRACK UP Failed TNA MUTE OFF AFCS ADDITIONAL FEATURES Data Not Received from Transponder un HO aea LL a a lt ae Lt a S a a a d Figure 6 14 TIS Power up Test Failure 280 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN azar AVOIDANCE The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page When the aircraft is on the E ground TIS automatically enters Standby Mode If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby sm Mode is selected the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out also the case whenever TIS has failed Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches to Operating Mode and tr
189. Selected File Figure 5 56 Flight Plan Import J m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 185 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e Lu F NOTE If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint mo already stored on the system the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of the existing waypoint If the coordinates are different the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by E adding characters to the end of the name T Sa Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card 1 Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD 2 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MED 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page 4 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported 6 Press the EXPORT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Export Flight Plan 7 f desired change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the lett to highlight the name then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name and press the ENT Key Liu Su o o a gt x 8 Press the ENT Key to initiate the export LL a LI d 9 Press the ENT Key to confirm the export l cf l Z zx n Li Li Li A NOTE The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways nu a
190. T Key again to enable SBAS S3u01V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 23 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N gt EO Wi 136 975 122 658 com 136 975 con gt Tu ue Z GPS STATUS 5NM ACTIVE GPS GPS1 D 1 4 Y 002 e ion 33FT GPS SOLUTION 3D NAV Z 46FT SBAS DISABLED SBAS Status LS ee J Co M tc POSITION N 38 49 3T SBAS SELECTION i X e d SBAS SELECTION Box 99920 f Q 55 07LC md e su ies WAAS Enable Disable Pd ALTITUDE 11994FT GROUND SPEED 176 9kT TRACK un TT GPS SIGNAL STRENGTH RAIM Softkey displays RAIM PREDICTION RAIN n SBAS Softkey aw z aS a Nw az displays SBAS Selection Figure 5 101 SBAS Display Active AUDIO PANEL amp CNS A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 238 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 5 11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN M3IAYJAO IN31SAS The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while the G950 provides vertical guidance through descents A lateral flight plan LNAV would be navigated in much the same way but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 A NOTE The following example flight plan is for instructi
191. TEM CDI 2 00NM DIS SPD NAUTICAL NM KT gt no ALT VS FEET FT FPH L 04 CHANNEL SPACING 25 0 kHz BU es E TEMP m eames a AUDIO ALERT S o PEE GALLONS GL GL HR ME vorce FEMALE gNwv SURFACE HARD SOFT nS WEIGHT POUNDS LB e POSITION HDDD MM MM _EESGHT DIRECTOR d ud irse FORMAT ACTIVE SNGL CUE gt OFF ALTITUDE 18QQ0FT 2 z ir T DFLTS DFLTS Softkey E Figure 5 46 System Setup Page Airspace Alerts Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu See Table m 5 2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 171 FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path In addition a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page In addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in four boxes labeled AIRSPACE ALERTS AIRSPACE AGENCY VERTICAL LIMITS and FREQUENCIES Airspace 1 Airspace 2 Airspace 5 17 80 TOF TUNE O
192. The DTK value is inhibited because it is not usable in this context D The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible From waypoint To lt waypoint and Next waypoint To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed airway segment the airway segment that contains either the To or the Next waypoint is automatically expanded When an airway is loaded airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 212 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT KMKC KSEA KMKC KSEA 3 FEPOT Airwa Airway Q3FEPOT Q Collapsed View Airway Q3FEPOT collapsed she Expanded View MOm FINER FRFLY Approach KSEA ILS 16C PAE iaf 019 63 3NM FAMUK FEPOT Approach KSEA ILS 16C PAE iaf 619 63 3nn 77 QFT ERYKA 167 11 1NM 5688rr MGNUM 1511 4 0nm bed ANVIL 161 3lNM 3200FT ERYKA 167 11 11NM MGNUM 161 4 0Nm ANVIL 161 3 6NM SODOE faf 161 4 SNH RW16C map 161 4 4 NH 833FT 161 O Z NM OTLIE Figure 5 85 Expanded Collapsed Airways Collapsing expanding the airways in the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Collapse Airways or Expand Airways and press the ENT Key The airways are co
193. UDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 2 41 MDA DH Setting Timer References Window ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT APPENDICES INDEX 74 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 2 4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS The annunciations listed in Table 2 3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur see Figure 2 42 for examples Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode 2 N j JJ c z m Annunciation Location Description ii Lower left of Loss of Integrity Monitoring GPS integrity is insufficient for the current aircraft symbol phase of flight Lower left of Integrity OK GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits i INTEG OK ide Of aircratt symbol annunciation displayed for 5 seconds Upper right of Dead Reckoning System is using projected position rather than GPS position aircraft symbol to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints 2 Ae A Table 2 3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI T INJWJ YNVIN 1H5I14 NTEG OK JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Figure 2 42 Example HSI Annunciations Dead Reckoning Mode causes the CDI to be removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation e gt source and the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow a Current Track Indicator
194. UK un o 17 80 GS DTK TRK 133 300 121 980 com 15 58 8 200 COM2 x EG 7 I OPSHN 3NH FOUNTAIN OPSHN FSHER PYNON Approach KCOS RNAV 35RePs LPY lt HABUK iaf 261 0 9MM FALUR 261 5 0NM CEGIX faf 351 6 0NM RW35R map 351 5 1NM 6368FT 348 4NM MOGAL mahp ll Lu i a zc oY R A o ACTIVE VNV WPT 9000rT at HABUK iaf z VS TGT 611FPM FPA V5 REQ FPM TIME TO BOD V DEY 40FT LLJ Press the FPL key to T T i view the previous page dd L MAP view vw PROFCNCL NV WWW O OO t z Figure 5 137 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix IAF s aS Ne o P m a un Q LE lt x ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 262 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 23 After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV CDI scaling changes accordingly and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to the Glidepath Indicator as shown in Figure 5 138 when the final approach course becomes active ae en NORTH UP will ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS DTK DIS ALT Approoch KCOS RNAV 35RcePs LPV ABUK iof CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT FT at VS TGT FPH FPA VS REQ FPH TINE TO B00 L5 S V DEV CNCL VNV Figur
195. UM CITY SMALL CITY STATE PROV RIVER LAKE USER WAYPOINT AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ACTIVE FPL ACTIVE FPL WPT Med LARGE APT MEDIUM APT SMALL APT SAFETAXI HAZARD AVOIDANCE Fi RHY EXTENSION Text Label Size INT WAYPOINT None Small Med orLrg CARCI WR RRS aimu Display Range VOR WAYPOINT CLASS B TMA AFCS CLASS C TCA CLASS D RESTRICTED 2UB Nh MOA MILITARY 200Nm OTHER ADIZ TFR 5D NH ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 5 20 Navigation Map Setup Menu AVIATION GROUP Setup 5 a A NOTE Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps items are removed on the a PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages e g a setting S of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps while the PFD Inset Map removes the same item at 50 nm 2 2 136 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT MAP DECLUTTER The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option M3IAH3AO IN31SAS PAGE MENU 188NM 1 Declutter Level b SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Measure Bearing Distance Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page DCLTR Softkey Navigation Map Page Menu 7 Figure 5
196. V ORIENTATION North up AUTO ZOOM MAX LOOK FWD MIN LOOK FWD TIME OUT LAND DATA 0 LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR O On Off WIND VECTOR IDE s i c m S m NAY RANGE RING U TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA OBSTACLE DATA JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH FUEL RNG RSU Figure 5 18 Navigation Map Setup Menu LAND DATA Setup gt The label size TEXT sets the size at which labels appear on the display none small medium and large The range RNG sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display Selecting a Land or Aviation group item text size and range 4B 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed R 3 Select the Land or Aviation group 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor flashes on the first field E 5 Select the desired land option 6 Select the desired text size i 7 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size 7 8 Select the desired range 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 135 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi 9 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range tA oe F 10 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page MAP SETUP e GROUP E z LAT LON 7 FREEWAY NATIONAL HHY LOCAL HHY T tL b I Si LOCAL ROAD T None Sm all Med Iro PNE 2 Maximum Display Range ul LARGE CITY MEDI
197. V14 1VNOILIQQV Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a valid 3 D GPS position The G950 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite position GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity GPS MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude It is a widely used MSL altitude source S32IaN3ddV Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL Using the GPS position and altitude the Terrain Proximity feature portrays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft GPS position and GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts flight path in relation XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 269 HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N oe to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this way the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle o a conditions ng DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA a _2 The symbols and colors in Figure 6 1 and Table 6 1 are used to represent ob
198. VNVIN 1H5DI14 N v1 189 90 ID NAV2 ID 111 68 GHM The Morse Code Identifier Station for the GHM VOR is On Identifier Figure 4 21 NAV Radio ID Indication JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH VOLUME x ua NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 10096 using the VOL ID Knob Turning the knob clockwise increases volume counterclockwise decreases volume When adjusting the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies Volume level indication remains S for two seconds after the change 29 Nav1 11H 75 NAV Volume TENTI NC RR BEC e gt Level Remains E for Two Seconds 2 Figure 4 22 NAV Volume Levels z 2 J S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 95 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E AUTO TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD o a NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages e WPT Airport Information e NRST Nearest VOR S e WPT VOR Information NRST Nearest Frequencies FSS WX 55 e NRST Nearest Airports e NRST Nearest Airspaces Lu E The MFD provides auto tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages During enroute navigation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field During approach activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT pag
199. X 292 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 RevA A GARMIN ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS NOTE The P2006T aircraft Pilot s Operating Handbook POH supersedes information found in this document The G950 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following Annunciation Window The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text Text color is based on alert levels described in the following section The Annunciation Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the Annunciation Window A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window Alerts Window The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages Pressing the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the Alerts Window from the display When the Alerts Window is displayed the FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert message list Softkey Annunciation During certain alerts the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to accompany an alert The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level WARNING CAUTION or ADVISORY By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation the alert is acknowledged
200. X31GNI HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N E TRAFFIC MAP PAGE Pal nz The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude without clutter from the basemap Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up a unless there is no valid heading Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm as indicated z by the map range rings E The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page When the aircraft is on the ground TIS automatically enters Standby Mode Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches from Standby to Operating Mode and the G950 begins to display traffic information Refer to the System Status discussion for more information Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page 1 Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page 3 Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic Or a Press the MENU Key b Select Operate Mode shown if TIS is in Standby Mode and press the ENT Key AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Iraffic Mode Annunciation LESS TTKI TIS Not Available Voice Alert Status HAZARD Ll W lt q S a a Non Bearing Traffic PA i ra System Unable to a Determine Bearing Distance is 8 0 nm 1100 Above Range 5 Descending Marking Ty Rings o tc
201. ace the Cursor on ye the VOR Identifier E 7 the VOR Frequency r gt Figure 4 25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST Nearest VOR Page O lt ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 98 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN While enroute NAV frequencies can also be auto tuned from the NRST Nearest Airports WPT Airport Information WPT VOR Information and NRST Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key the FMS Knob and the ENT Key TOR ER S EE 5 134 D 14 TRK 14 ETE NAV2 NRST APT PHILI POS VSR BRG TPA TOWER navi 113 88 GS DTK 14 TRK 313 1 1 NAV2 115 58 STJ NRST NEAREST AIRPORTS NRST APT N NORTH UP KTOP AR r 7 PHILIP BILLARE uH VSR 3 BRG 19 TPA 1 TOWER 118 700 LONGEST RUNWAY 13 31 5099x100 MRST FREOS satimi mmi 115 58 STJ WPT AIRPORT INFORMATION 128 208 AIRPORT KTOP PUBLIC PHILIP BILLARD MUN TOPEKA KS N CEN USA NORTH UP KTOP P BILLARD M 3610 FPM 194 16581 FT 118 700 LONGEST RUNWAY 13 31 5099x100 NRS LAAkICAC PTTU HA G5 HAu2113 25 115 58 STJ HRST APT KTOP PHILIP BILLARD H POS N BRG Tea 1621 FT TOWER 118 700 M LONGEST RUNWAY M 13 31 NAVI d DTK 1 T navy2113 25 115 58 STJ NRST NEAREST NRST APT N KTOP PHILIP BILLARD H POS 5 8 NM N VSR 3510 FPM BRG 194
202. ach e Cannot be set for final approach course or course published holding patterns gt x lt H a 322 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL LLL LLL LL LLL LL APPENDIX D When OBS mode is active the G950 allows the pilot to set a desired course to from a waypoint using the CRS BARO Knob and HSI much like a VOR M3IAH3AO IN31SAS The most common application for using the OBS Soitkey is the missed approach The G950 suspends automatic waypoint sequencing indicated by a SUSP annunciation placed on the HSI when the missed approach point MAP is crossed This prevents the G950 from automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding point MAHP During this time the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP Selecting the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal functionality SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I14 WHY MIGHT THE G950 Nor AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENCE TO THE NEXT WAYPOINT The G950 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled i e no OBS or m SUSP annunciation on the HSI For automatic sequencing to occur the aircraft must also cross the bisector of i the turn being navigated The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an equal angle from each leg B amp How CAN A WAYPOINT BE SKIPPED IN AN APPROACH A DEPARTURE OR AN ARRIVAL a c The G950 allows the p
203. ack cenrs B A F9 V4 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 sw N Ae LL EL vere J w j ee j Leack atenrs E m Ifon f oeme f oms or ITIL Lack aenrs F V9 A V9 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 sw Figure 1 21 PFD Configuration Softkeys I1N3A35VNVIN 1H5I14 JINVGIOAV QuVZVH Ii sey ow J ar eno JL ver cope j enr j Back Jfar Fey V V9 V9 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level softkeys 77102 33 303 305 L5 20 E Jp sse J Ea ae Fe V9 V9 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 VN D eid Press the BACK Softkey to return y to the top level softkeys dl Figure 1 22 XPDR Softkeys 5 2 z A Ur Z c S 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 23 SYSTEM ee LiL o ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INSTRUMENTS INDEX 24 A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 GARMIN MFD SOFTKEYS MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected EIS and Navigation Map Page default MFD page softkeys are described here uro JL Pwr LE D p p dq ame pm rmarmc J roro J rennai uinwavs V3 TLE mp HW iea V3 D V V3 Select the BACK softkey to return to the top level softkeys Figure 1 23 MFD Softkeys Navigation Information Display Navigation Map Page AUTO or DEST Switches between AUTO and DEST mode for the Navigation Information
204. ackup 83 ID indicator 95 P our eee aera i Import Flight Plan 307 DME information window 59 TEE ig E 231 i Inset Map 47 DE F Intercom system ICS 113 E Emergency Frequency 115 Intersection z Engine Indication System EIS 71 18 Information 158 159 Entering Flight ID aia 102 107 Inverting a flight plan 200 EDESTTSIETREDIETDID LIES en eae 113 Estimated Position Error EPE 17 J Export Flight Plan 777777 aye Jeppesen aviation database 309 L us ia ua Land Symbols 133 lt 2 Flight plan Line Replaceable Units LRU 2 9 10 exe Closest point to reference 213 O ces 239 n Storing 322 d I E M 216 255 Sci MEN MEAM bu biegen Low Altitude Annunciation 72 z eS aaa 170 aa Eomae ru pregency spang sees eect tenet 91 M Sg Frequently asked questions 321 z Fuel Map Pann eea idee 12
205. affic information is displayed The mode can be changed manually using softkeys or the page menu Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Display Enabled Icon Traffic Map Page Other Maps TIS Operating eal SLNAINNYLSNI 1H5I14 v TIS Standb E also shown in white in center of page TIS Failed x See Table 6 5 for additional failure annunciations 2 gt Table 6 4 TIS Modes Switching between TIS modes 1 Select the Traffic Map Page 2 Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes The mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page Or a Press the MENU Key b Select Operate Mode or Standby Mode choice dependent on current state and press the ENT Key I1N3A35VNVIN 1H5I14 lt 2 z gt zZ A m S34n1V33 S32IaN3ddV TVNOILIGGV S21V XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 281 HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N zi The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of SE maps on which traffic can be displayed Table 6 5 N o v um Description Annunciation oz A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range E Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in nm altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing desce
206. altitude field Use the small FMS Knob to select the altitude Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the Sequence box The approach is previewed on the map Or b When minimums are selected off the cursor moves to the Sequence box The approach is previewed on the map AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt 7 Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page E Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page ct 25 1 Select the Nearest Airports Page t 2 Press the FMS Knob then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport The airport is previewed on the map 3 Press the APR Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Select Approach Window and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach 5 Press the LD APR Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Load Approach and press the ENT Key The Zu Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted 6 Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition and press the ENT Key E Lu qu 7 Barometric Minimums a To set MINIMUMS turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO and press the ENT Key Turn the small FMS o Knob to select the altitude and press the ENT Key The LOAD field is highlighted E Or S b To skip setting minimums press the ENT Key The LOAD field is highlighted 8 Press the ENT Key wi
207. an approach and the transition waypoints S21V Whenever an approach is selected the choice to either load or activate is given Loading adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed Activating also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach S34n1V14 1VNOILIQQV When selecting an approach a GPS designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach e g VOR or ILS The final course segment of ILS approaches for example must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 225 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N z The G950 WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV LNAV VNAV and LPV approaches according to the published SE chart LNAV V is a standard LNAV a
208. an import failed Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 T Flight plan partially imported Some flight plan waypoints were successtully imported trom the SD card however others had errors and were not imported A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system File contained user waypoints only The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan only user waypoints One or gt more of these waypoints did not import successfully S o Too many points Flight plan truncated The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support The 2 x flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible m Some waypoints not loaded Waypoints The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find locked in the aviation database The flight plan has been imported but must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use User waypoint database full Not all loaded The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints The quantity of stored user waypoints has exceeded system capacity therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD card have been imported Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are locked in the flight plan The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use One or more user waypoints renamed One or more imported user w
209. and the Mode S radar antenna Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the ground based radar antenna the signal may be temporarily interrupted a5 ET a a eaa NOTE Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual AIM for a more SS comprehensive explanation of limitations and anomalies associated with TIS g NOTE TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States This is often the case in mountainous regions gt J J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 325 APPENDIX E GARMI N i De WARNING Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage Operation of the ground stations e is the responsibility of the FAA Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map vn TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep Collected information is then sent through the Mode z S uplink on the next radar sweep Because of this the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old 2 TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay These algorithms 2 use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display Occasionally 7 aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page which affect relative bearing information and
210. ar the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings The copilot and passengers can communicate with each other The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings zu p Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated The copilot is isolated from the selected radios aural alerts and warnings and everyone else The pilot and passengers can hear the selected as radios aural alerts and communicate with each other When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated the pilot and copilot can hear the selected E OU radios aural alerts and communicate with each other The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot z but can communicate with each other A N When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished everyone hears the selected radios aural alerts and is able to communicate with everyone else 2 J m 2X 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 109 SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS EIS LL e 26 o a gt lt x ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT INDEX AUDIO PANEL AND CNS A GARMIN INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH The PILOT PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot passenger The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch The large knob controls the copilot passenger volume and squelch The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bott
211. arallel track geometry bad geometry PTK FAIL Parallel track unavailable da Invalid leg type for parallel offset invalid leg type AUDIO PANEL amp CNS _ i S A eL IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed o past IAF T z UNABLE V WPT Can t reach current The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path vertical waypoint angle and vertical speed constraints The system automatically transitions to the next vertical waypoint cz VNV Unavailable Unsupported leg The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn vector or other unsupported leg SES type in flight plan type prior to the active vertical waypoint This prevents vertical guidance to the active T gt vertical waypoint ML CMe The current crosstrack exceeds the limit causing vertical deviation to go invalid crosstrack error V VNV Unavailable Excessive track The current track angle error exceeds the limit causing the vertical deviation to go lt angle error invalid VNV Unavailable Parallel course i mm vt Nadie wale A parallel course has been selected causing the vertical deviation to go invalid NO WGS84 WPT Non WGS 84 The position of the selected waypoint xxxxx is not calculated based on the WGS84 waypoint for navigation booxj map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed Do not use GPS to navigate to the selected non WGS84 waypoint TRAFFIC FAIL Traffic devic
212. as in Figure 5 106 turn the small FMS Knob clockwise The Waypoint Information Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available f Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5 107 ZEB 97 78M Figure 5 107 List of Available Airways for TOP g Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5 107 242 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT h Press the ENT Key The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5 108 IN31SAS ENTRY TOP M3IAYJAO SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 260 97 7NM SI3 SND 8 TANVd OIGNV Figure 5 108 List of Available Exits for V4 i If necessary turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit In this case Salina VOR SLN is selected as in Figure 5 108 j Press the ENT Key The selected airway and exit are displayed and the prompt LOAD highlighted as in Figure 5 109 IDE s i c m m 3oNVGIOAV SAV QuVzvH S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV Figure 5 109 Ready to Load V4 S329IlaN3ddV k Press the ENT Key X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 243 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N z I V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5 110 uU cc LL 7 Z TIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS ua z MCI os TIFTO 286 u ES Enroute 2 TOP 146 Airway V4 S
213. atically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg activating the approach procedure see Figure 5 135 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS DTK TRE ETE 196 975 gt 118 808 con FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 136 975 cone NORTH UP _NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 OPSHN FSHER PYNON X m Approach KCOS RNAV 35Reps LPW ue HABUK inf A 42H FALUR 261 5 0NH CEGIX fof 351 B NH RW35R mop 37 5 1nn gt B3B58FT 348 dWM E37 r c MOGAL mahp 10000F r RO i no CURRENT VNU PROFILE E ACTIVE UNU WET SEQQFT ot HABUK iof V5 TGT bb4FPH FPA 3 0 E VS REG b8 rPH TIHE TO BoD 8209 v DEV SUFT Press the FPL key to 2n 4 view tha previews page VIEW VNV PROF CHEL VNV VNV IDE s gt c m S m Figure 5 135 Approach is Now Active Note To manually activate the approach procedure perform the following steps a Press the PROC Key b Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ACTIVATE APPROACH as shown in Figure 5 136 C Press the ENT Key to activate the approach JINVGIOAV QuVZvH PROCEDURES OPTIONS S21V S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV Figure 5 136 Manually Activate Approach S329IlaN3ddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 261 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zu 22 The IAF is the next waypoint At the TOD establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16 vu The aircraft altitude is 9 000 feet upon reaching HAB
214. avigation Status Box as seen in Figure 5 114 ors 7nm Bre 257 136 975 E DIS 3nn Bre 257 136 975 o 136 975 Figure 5 114 Turn to Intercept V244 246 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N FLIGHT MANAGEMENT 9 As seen in Figure 5 115 V244 is now the active flight plan leg IN31SAS 17 80 TOP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 388 lt 121 988 com 15 50 128 200 conz NORTH UP ACTIUE FLIGHT PLAN M3IAYJAO KMKC KCOS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Enroute TOP Airway 4 SLN SLN Airway 244 LAA HYS 262 LAA 251 rm Airway V263 TBE un TBE 210 Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL OPSHN 309 73 0NM SALINA z c VS TGT FPM FPA nO aU VS REQ FPM TIME TO TOD un rn r Press the FPL key to view the previous page MAP NEW WPT VIEW VNV PROF ICNCL VNV VNV Be JATK OFST ACT LEG SHH CHRT CHKLIST Figure 5 115 V244 Now Active Leg IDE s gt c m S m s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 24 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e zu 10 At Lamar VOR LAA V263 is intercepted See Figure 5 116 WN cc v S DTK TRK ETE 133 388 121 988 com o FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 con2 NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN m KMKC KCOS TOP 3 5 Airway V4 SLN u SLN Airway V244 L AA ES HYS AA Airway V263 TBE BE 210
215. awareness 2 x A NOTE Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75 North or 60 South G950 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO C151b certification standards It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain CFIT Do not confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS TAWS is more sophisticated and robust and it is TSO CI51b certified Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice alerts It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 QuVZVH gt lt J gt P A m Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly e Valid 3 D GPS position e Valid terrain obstacle database S21V Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the database Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness They should never be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain S34n1
216. ay and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure A 5 System Setup Page Alert Voice Settings AFCS ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu c c Lu e e lt x INDEX 308 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN APPENDIX B SD CARD USE AND DATABASES The G950 System uses Secure Digital SD cards to load and store various types of data For basic flight operations SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates M3IAH3AO IN31SAS CAUTION Do not load Jeppesen navigation data except ChartView onto Garmin Supplemental Data Cards SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 NOTE Loading a database in the system prior to it s effective date will result in the expiration date on the power up screen and the effective date on the AUX SYSTEM STATUS Page being displayed in yellow JEPPESEN DATABASES B The Jeppesen aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle The ChartView database is updated on a 14 vS day cycle If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date ChartView will no 2y longer function m Both these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom card slot on the MFD The aviation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user supplied
217. ayed at the bottom of the RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows e COMPUTE RAIM RAIM has not been computed e COMPUTING AVAILABILITY RAIM calculation is in progress e RAIM AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted to be available e RAIM NOT AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted to be unavailable AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt HAZARD AVOIDANCE The Satellite Based Augmentation System SBAS provides increased navigation accuracy when available SBAS can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page ADDITIONAL FEATURES AFCS APPENDICES INDEX 236 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT o 133 308 121 900 com lt lt 128 200 COM2 zi GPS STATUS m z 3NM ACTIVE GPS GPS1 NH 16FT GPS SOLUTION 3D DIFF NAV 23FT SBAS ACTIVE SBAS Status a GE POSITION s 02 39 eee Su NNI AAS SBAS SELECTION Box D o WAAS Enable Disable 7 ALTITUDE 99 GROUND SPEED TRACK GPS SIGNAL STRENGTH E gt S ec UU RAIM Softkey uu displays RAIM PREDICTION RAIM nrbe SBAS Softkey a ja o 3 displays SBAS Selection IDE Figure 5 100 SBAS Display Active s gt G m m Enabling Disabling SBAS 1 Select the AUX GPS Status Page 2 Press the SBAS Softkey 3 Press the FMS Knob The SBAS SELECTION WAAS field is highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS Press the EN
218. aypoint after the desired airway entry point r select the airway and it is added in front of the selected waypoint An airway can only be loaded if there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure The G950 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints gt gz 17 80 ToP ss DTK TRK ETE 133 388 121 988 com a2 15 90 sti FPL SELECT AIRWAY 128 200 con us T m Airway Entry Waypoint Selected Airway IDE Airways Available at TOP s gt G m m Airway Waypoint Sequence V508 Preview of Selected Airway V244 V5U KSLNSA INA JINVGIOAV QuVZvH E 35 T gt U532 e TR ed Ue a eee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee n S Figure 5 61 Select Airway Page Selecting Airway E Adding an airway to a flight plan B 1 Press the FPL Key E 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point If this waypoint is not a valid airway entry point a valid entry point should be entered at this time z i Se 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 189 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi 4 Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey or press the MENU Key and SE select Load Airway The S
219. aypoints were renamed when imported due to naming contlicts with waypoints already existing in the system Flight plan successfully exported The stored flight plan was successtully exported to the SD card Flight plan export failed The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card The SD card may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5I14 JINVGIOAV QuVZvH S21V S34n1V314 1VNOILIQQV gt m J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 307 APPENDIX A GARMI N ZE VOICE ALERTS az Voice alerts are provided to the G950 by the 1 GIA 63W should this unit fail audio and voice alerts are not generated T oe Aircraft is transitioning through the minimum descent altitude decision height MDA DH 2 Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent issued only when vertical navigation is enabled TIS voice alert Traffic Advisory TA issued F Table A 3 Voice Alerts The gender of the voice used to announce audio alerts may be set to male or female on the System Setup Page Changing the audio alert voice AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to displ
220. b to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key 7 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight MFD DSPL 8 Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display MFD KEY and repeat steps 4 7 ERR VS o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 9 To remove the menu press the CLR or MENU Key PFD DSPL HFD KEY SND 8 TANVd OIGNV 1N3IAN35VNVIA 1H5DI14 PFD Figure 1 37 PFD Setup Menu s3un1V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV GuVZVH X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 43 amp GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW M3IAH3AO ERR NS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 BLANK PAGE JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S 34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV S32IaN3ddV X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 44 GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS WARNING In the event that the airspeed attitude altitude or heading indications become unusable refer to the backup instruments Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easy to scan Primary Flight Display PFD that features a large horizon airspeed attitude altitude vertical speed and course deviation information In addition to the flight instruments navigation communication terrain traffic and weather i
221. beacon activity is heard Crew music is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources Soft muting is the gradual return of music to its original volume level The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one half and four seconds 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 Music Mutine ENABLE DISABLE JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH Pressing and holding the MKR MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off When switching either one or two beeps are heard one beep indicates that music muting is enabled two beeps indicate music muting is disabled Crew music muting is reset enabled during power up gt PASSENGER MUSIC z Passenger music Music2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted B o Bg UR gt 2 m 2 J S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 113 SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS EIS LL A i e a EJ t ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT INDEX AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N 4 6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE NOTE If the pilot and or copilot are using headsets that have a high low switch or volume control knob verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume setting On single pilot flights verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio system NOTE When the MAN SQ
222. c nS 1 From the Airport Information Page first page in the WPT group press the DP Softkey The Departure Information Page is displayed defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page 2 To select another airport press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor enter an identitier facility name city and TS press the ENT Key 5 E 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure The departure is previewed on the map 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures Press the ENT Key to select the departure The cursor moves to the Runway box The departure is previewed on the map E 5 Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways Press the ENT Key to select the runway The cursor moves to the Transition box only if there are available transitions The departure is previewed on the map 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions Press the ENT Key to select the transition The cursor moves to the Sequence box The departure is previewed on the map 7 Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN When plans change while flying IFR departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key an
223. cator 85 Safe Operating Annunciations 295 296 Sate laxi 2 285 288 SafeTaxi database 289 SBAS 235 237 238 Scheduler 41 42 285 286 291 Secure Digital SD card 6 309 Selected Altitude 46 72 Selected Altitude Bug 46 Selected Course 47 56 Selected Heading 47 56 Selecting a COM radio 84 Sequencing waypoints Automatic 223 Sequencing waypoints suspend 66 Slip Skid Indicator 46 50 Softkey annunciations 70 Softkeys MED 24 PFD 21 23 46 Sort Flight Plans 200 Speaker 108 Split COM operation 112 SQ annunciation 110 Standby frequency 84
224. ce i Airport Information Facility City Elevation m Runway Information y Ee Designation Surface j Length Width lE C NWORITIE um COMINAV Freq Info Identification as Frequency e Approaches Available e t IFANSTINGD ID a one only TL avallable if an approach Is E highlighted FLIGHT EN IEEE 2280877 NE UN mE VV in ow Selection Softkeys Figure 5 34 Nearest Airport Page Lid LL o lt lt 9s Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD NO S 1 Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 2 Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information Window 3 To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key with the cursor on BACK or press the CLR t Key The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves through the airport list alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information Window 4 Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD ADDITIONAL FEATURES 1 Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group 4 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page it is the first page
225. ciation Window Text Alerts Window Message Audio Alert D Gear Pump Powered x Lh Fuel Pump Rh Fuel Pump MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS Alerts Window Message Audio Alert ADDITIONAL FEATURES PFD FAN FAIL The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative MFD FAN FAIL The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative N Lu e a Lu e e lt x INDEX 296 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA G950 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS NOTE Upon power up certain windows remain invalid as G950 equipment begins to initialize All windows should be operational within one minute of power up If any window continues to remain flagged the G950 System should be serviced by a Garmin authorized repair facility When an LRU or an LRU function fails a large red X is typically displayed on windows associated with the failed data refer to Figure A 3 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs Refer to the Pilots Operating Handbook POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations GIA 63W Integrated aa DIS PRG EE G A63W Integrated Avionics Units WZ 534 Avionics Units NRST APT N KMCI KANSAS CITY INTL POS IS GDC 74A Air eee J x Data Computer HRS TPA 2058 F i ONGEST RUNWAY GDC 74A Air Sea Data Computer GEGAR E A dig AHRS NRST FREQS NONE WITHIN Eg m var ag IM GMU 44 200 NH eT ABT
226. cnam P2006T 69 M3IA83A0 IN31SAS un M JJ c m un S3u01V34 JONVdIOAV 1N3W3DVNVIN SND 8 S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3NVd Olanv sia X31GNI FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N 2 3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS SYSTEM OVERVIEW The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations SYSTEM ALERTING Messages appear in the Alerts Window in the lower right corner of the PFD Figure 2 36 when a warning caution advisory alert or G950 message advisory occurs System alert messages are provided for aware of G950 system problems or status and may not require pilot action The Alerts Window allows system alerts to be displayed simultaneously The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages The Alerts Window is enabled disabled by selecting the ALERTS Softkey If the window is already open when a new message is generated selecting the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray FLIGHT ue m LL ce 4 EIS The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued The annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey The softkey then reverts to the ALERTS Softkey label and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display a descriptive me
227. cnam P2006T 91 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E AUTOMATIC SQUELCH Parr nz Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM signals To disable Automatic Squelch press the VOL SQ Knob When Automatic Z Squelch is disabled COM audio reception is always on Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and E speaker if selected Pressing the VOL SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch e When Automatic Squelch is disabled a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency E Press the COM VOL IRSE NEA ee SQ Knob to turn off cQ Automatic Squelch e IM Press again to restore E Automatic Squelch Squelch Indication Figure 4 15 Overriding Automatic Squelch ua A v od VOLUME COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 10096 using the VOL SQ Knob Turning the knob clockwise increases volume turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume When adjusting volume the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change ef Lu P a 2 c lt FLIGHT MANAGEMENT 124 150 cont 135 6 75 35 VOLUME COM Volume Level Remains for Two Seconds HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure 4 16 COM Volume Level ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS INDEX 92 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS 4 3
228. counter clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan nearest recent user or airway waypoints 25 5 Enter the identifier facility or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of b waypoints and press the ENT Key 6 Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint 7 When all waypoints have been entered press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page The new flight plan is now in the list za os as eu lt x E zi 2S 2 184 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card 1 Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD 2 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page 4 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 5 Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan 6 Press the IMPORT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Import Flight Plan and press the ENT Key m If an empty slot is selected a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed Or If an existing flight plan
229. cretely addressed Mode S interrogations e VFR Automatically enters the VFR code 1200 in the U S A only a CODE Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0 7 z 0 7 Use numbers to enter code BKSP Removes numbers entered one at a time IDENT Activates the Special Position Identification SPI pulse for 18 seconds identifying z the transponder return on the ATC screen E TMR REF Displays Timer References Window NRST Displays Nearest Airports Window a ALERTS Displays Alerts Window SE 2 TT oe E958 ET Jer wes AERTS Fe FW V9 V V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V B Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through ve navigation sources ef GPS NAV1 VOR LOC NAV2 VOR LOC Figure 1 19 Top Level PFD Softkeys ADDITIONAL FEATURES ua Lu CCC ee a Vy V9 V3 V3 V3 V Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level softkeys gt lt Lu A Z Figure 1 20 INSET Softkeys 22 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW PFD o lt m JJ m ERR VS Ii orrs f wno p emer J usrewr erc2 J acruwrr sroeeno Back ALERTS FC F9 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 sw nn VF Press the BRG1 BRG2 Press the BACK Softkey to return softkeys to display remove to the top level softkeys the Bearing Information windows and cycle through bearing sources SLNAINNYLSNI 1H5I14 n NAV1 NAV2 zt GPS COO 1 Jd 1 gqsens cesgp ILL IE B
230. cute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP not recommended select the Active Flight Plan Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure AFTER A MISSED APPROACH HOW CAN THE SAME APPROACH BE RE SELECTED2 How CAN A NEW APPROACH BE ACTIVATED AUDIO PANEL amp CNS ge NOTE Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point Se MAP If an attempt to do so is made an alert message Are you sure you want to discontinue the current approach appears The G950 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into consideration any missed approach procedures if the current approach is reactivated a z After flying the missed approach procedure the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by q5 pressing the PROC Key Once the clearance is given for another attempt activate the approach by highlighting ze ACTIVATE APPROACH using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key The G950 provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point To activate a new approach for the same airport select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key Choose 3 SELECT APPROACH select the desired approach from the list shown and press the ENT Key Select the lt desired transition then activate the approach using the ENT Key To activate a ne
231. d course in either direction left or right course Course to Steer cursor Control Area control The total of all legs in a flight plan Cockpit Voice Recorder coverage control wheel steering cylinder density altitude database decibels 7 radar return declutter decrease fuel degree de icing departure The desired course between the active from and to waypoints destination Direct to Fix default degrade Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T DH Dilution of Precision DIR DIS Distance DME DOP DP DPRT DR DSBL DIK E ECU Efficiency EGT EIS ELEV ELEV EMERGCY EMI ENDUR Endurance ENG ENGD ENR Enroute Safe Altitude A GARMIN decision height A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality on a scale of one to ten lower numbers equal better geometry where higher numbers equal poorer geometry direction distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint Distance Measuring Equipment Dilution of Precision Departure Procedure departure dead reckoning disabled Desired Track empty east Engine Control Unit A measure of fuel consumption expressed in distance per unit of fuel Exhaust Gas Temperature Engine Indication System elevation elevator emergency Electromagnetic Interference endurance Flight endurance or total possible flight time based on available fuel on board engine en
232. d highlight Remove Departure FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt 5 zz 3 Press the ENT Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure NA ze 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal request highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key Or 2 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan B 3 Press the CLR Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure F 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal request highlight CANCEL and press the ENT zi Key eu E 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 5 E lt 2S 2 222 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT ARRIVALS A Standard Terminal Arrival STAR can be loaded at any airport that has one available Only one arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight plan the new arrival replaces the previous arrival The route is defined by selection of an arrival the transition waypoints and a runway LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key 1 Press the PROC Key The Procedures
233. dance Section provides more details on tratfic avoidance systems E TRANSPONDER CONTROLS a Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD Top level Mode Selection and lt a Code Selection When the top level XPDR Softkey is selected the Mode Selection softkeys appear STBY ON o ALT VFR CODE IDENT BACK x When the CODE Soitkey is selected the number softkeys appear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IDENT BKSP BACK The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters y the transponder code Ifan error is made selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the z revious digit Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit p 3 3 y ag P 3 Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys Selecting the BACK 5 Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top level softkeys Es F The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD Code entry must be completed with either g the softkeys or the FMS Knob but not a combination of both au Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the top level softkeys z After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity the system reverts back to the top level softkeys s lt us A 102 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PAN
234. ded The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position E The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance i e ILS or GPS WAAS approach The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF ui Entering modifiying an altitude constraint 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint 3 Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs To enter altitudes as a flight level turn the small FMS Knob counter clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character and the system automatically changes to show units of Flight Level Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter the three digit flight level AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint if the selected waypoint is an airport an additional choice is displayed Turn the small FMS Knob to choose MSL or AGL and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan In the event ui an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral ce a wayp
235. desired and press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the second waypoint field 3 Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key The statistics tor the selected leg are displayed z z In manual page mode the other eight trip input data helds must be entered by the pilot in addition to flight ye plan and leg selection z Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations 1 Press the MANUAL Softkey or select Manual Mode trom the Page Menu and press the ENT Key The cursor O may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes lt 2 Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value Press the ENT Key The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry tield Repeat until all d desired values have been entered 2 Ww os as eu lt x c a zi 2S a 234 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 5 10 RAIM PREDICTION M3IAH3AO IN31SAS RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit 2 0 nm for oceanic 2 0 nm for enroute 1 0 nm for terminal and 0 3 nm for non precision approaches During oceanic enroute and terminal phases of flight RAIM
236. dio is selected Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white INJINADVNVIN 1H5I13 Standby Active Fields Fields gt SI o gt o gt NAV 113 25 MCI zg nav2 1 16 90 m Tuning Box The NAV Radio is gt Selected by Selecting P the CDI Softkey a5 m Figure 4 17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation ne See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR Z as the source for the bearing pointer Y A 2 i x 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 93 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel Pressing the NAVI NAV2 DME or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source Selected audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers if selected All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS EIS Figure 4 18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs LL T 2 o a gt lt x Manually tuning a NAV frequency zu 1 Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box 2 2 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field 3 Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL ID Knob ay 4 Press the NAV VOL ID Knob
237. display see the Flight Management section for more information MAP Enables second level Navigation Map Page softkeys TRAFFIC Displays removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page TOPO Displays removes topographical data e g coastlines terrain rivers lakes on Navigation Map Page TERRAIN Displays removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page AIRWAYS Selects the desired display of Airways cycles through AIRWY ON All Airways displayed AIRWY LO Low Altitude Victor Airways displayed AIRWY HI High Altitude Airways Jetways displayed AIRWAYS Airways are not displayed BACK Returns to top level softkeys DCLTR 3 Selects desired amount of map detail cycles through declutter levels DCLTR No Declutter All map features visible DCLTR 1 Removes land data DCLTR 2 Removes land and SUA data DCLTR 3 Removes everything except the active flight plan Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 6 ACCESSING G950 FUNCTIONALITY TERRY V o lt m JJ m MENUS The G950 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context sensitive list of options This options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently displayed window page There is no all encompassing menu Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view edit select and review options Menus display NO
238. displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line The Attitude Indicator displays the pitch indicated by the yellow symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale roll and slip skid information SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT ue m c LL ce fm N Roll Pointer Roll Scale C 3 Horizon Line EIS 4 Aircraft Symbol 5 Land Representation 6 Pitch Scale C Slip Skid Indicator Sky Representation 10 10 G 9 Roll Scale Zero AUDIO PANEL amp CNS O OO j a Figure 2 7 Attitude Indicator Yu x The horizon line is part of the pitch scale Above and below the horizon line major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10 up to 80 Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5 increments up to og 25 below and 45 above the horizon line Between 20 below to 20 above the horizon line minor pitch marks a occur every 2 5 o IE The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale Major tick marks at 30 and 60 and minor tick marks at 10 20 and 45 are shown to the left and right of the zero Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale g The Slip Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration Slip skid is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the
239. dow PFD 2 Press the MENU Key and highlight Remove Arrival 3 Press the ENT Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal request highlight CANCEL and press the ENT SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Key m Or 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan i 3 Press the CLR Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure E 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal request highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor APPROACHES IDE gt gt c m m NOTE If certain GPS parameters WAAS RAIM etc are not available some published approach procedures for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH An Approach Procedure APPR can be loaded at any airport that has one available and provides guidance for non precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the active flight plan the new approach replaces the previous approach The route is defined by selection of
240. e speed range strip is located on the lt moving tape The colors denote flaps operating range normal operating range caution range and never exceed speed V p A red range is also present for low speed awareness The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color coded speed range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating One end of the magenta line is anchored to the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of acceleration or deceleration For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration the moving end of the line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds If the trend vector crosses V the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 48 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Vspeeds Glide V and V can be changed and their flags turned on off from the Timer Relerences Window Figure 2 5 When active on the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale By default all Vspeed values are reset and all flags turned off when power is cycled M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Changing Vspeeds and
241. e group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key Figures 4 23 4 24 and 4 25 Auto tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages 1 From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto tuned activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or selecting the appropriate softkey 2 Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency LL e 25 e a EJ lt x 2 3 On the Nearest VOR Nearest Airspaces and Nearest Airports pages select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor Su on the NAV frequency Figure 4 25 E 4 Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio 5 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field 5 z E Press the ENT x CLR ENT Key to Load a Highlighted orir mae FMS frequency into DL 112 69 116 88 e andby Turn the FMS NAV2 117 30 Knob to Scroll BEY ZON o Through a List a of Frequencies PUSH CRSR Figure 4 23 NAV Frequency Auto Tuning from the MFD ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 96 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS Or 1 When on the NRST pages press the MENU Key to display the page menu M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options 3 Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window 4 Scroll through the frequency selection
242. e 308 cm A UG Airport Procedures Weather Information Pages Airport Information 11780 vel a c INFO Softkey vn T 11758 vai 1210 gn mc ena TSS Jar Lu ut cI ven SEERE ag Departure Information ZIULEUCEUL INN ai p E 192300 121 Wem ec wn Tia 0u TIEU EST T TEX 193 308 921 988 cor DP Softkey wal je 115 58 11 128 200 ute wir i n 1 Tiele FI TEX LL eee 121 4908 en e w AREER 5 j 104 DERNE f 2 a Arrival Information ZU MEIN IE NEST d STAR Softkey n Approach Information ua uz APR Soitkey Intersection Information NDB Information VOR Information Airport Procedures Weather Information User W int Inf ti ser Waypoint Intormation Pages ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 1 27 Waypoint Pages APPENDICES INDEX 28 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW Auxiliary Page Group AUX wet 113 BE 117 88 Toe ns ore ox ETE 133 300 121 900 com T 115 58 128 298 2 TERRY V ENT p wert 113 88 117 80 ToPles cx207 mepa md 133 308 121 900 cor werd 115 50 51 128 208 Cie o lt m JJ m Trip Planning Utility GPS Status wert 11a 0E ELA TIFE TE TRE ETE IKE rr 115 58 aS 5 i25 ad Tg 1 SHH coe F ua ChAT e rs x E 133 300 12 1 908 co j h jg gu toe wet 11 8 11 T m 11558 s itie LT TJ FET GAT System Setup SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I13 System Status SI3
243. e 5 138 Descending to the FAF The descent continues through the FAF CEGIX using the Glidepath Indicator as one would use a glideslope indicator to obtain an altitude AT 7 800 feet at the FAF Note the altitude restriction lines over and under At the altitude in the ALT field in Figure 5 138 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 263 NE SINJINNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m m S3u01V34 JNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 2 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 H H zu 24 After crossing CEGIX the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to AT or ABOVE i i Pu 6 370 feet at the Missed Approach Point MAP RW35R as seen in Figure 5 139 un 17 80 133 300 121 900 com 15 58 128 200 comz T r EG us u un PYNON Approach KCOS RNAV 3bRePS LPY SN HABUK iaf orn as Re FALUR lt FORT CARSCIN CEGIX faf RW35R map 6368FT 348 4NM 637QFT MOGAL mahp 10000FT iU un FALUR hes AUDIO PANEL amp CNS into 29 Press the FPL key to view the previous page L HAP NEW WPT VIEW RSS SH ES LEG SHW CHRT Figure 5 139 Descending to the Missed Approach Point FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt BARO HIN 63 FT gez In this missed approach procedure the altitude immediately following the MAP in this case 6368tt is n
244. e Activate field is highlighted 9 Press the ENT Key to activate IDE gt gt c m m s380n1V34 JNVGIOAV S3oIaN3ddV 4ywoInaav SAV dYYZYH XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 179 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Removing a VNV altitude constraint a cc nS 1 Press the Direct to Key to display the Direct to Window 2 Press the MENU Key e I rye 3 With Clear Vertical Constraints highlighted press the ENT Key zz o z 17 80 TOP GS DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 980 cont wn 15 58 stJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 2008 coM2 5 nol PAGE MENU SA Sine JOSEF OPTIONS E m Page Menu j Clear Vertical Navigation QTCHISO Press the FMS CRSR knob to Constraints return to base page KFEU ZEAVEIKMGTH EP NSTIG A AUDIO PANEL amp CNS KUWE VAWRENGE QURE KIXD Kove BERENE FLIGHT LOCATION BRG DIS Lid LL o lt lt 169 COURSE OTTAWA o zw ACTIVATE Figure 5 52 Direct to Window Clearing Vertical Constraints ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 180 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 5 6 FLIGHT PLANNING M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Flight planning on the G950 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time adding waypoints along airways and inserting departures airways
245. e BACK Softkey to return to the top level softkeys The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury in Hg or hectopascals hPa when metric units are selected Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical deviation moving the descent path For large adjustments it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re establish on the descent path If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude the aircraft may not re establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting Selecting standard barometric pressure 29 92 in Hg 1 Select the PFD Softkey to display the second level softkeys 2 Select the STD BARO Softkey STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box Figure 2 11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units 1 Select the PFD Softkey to display the second level softkeys 2 Select the ALT UNIT Softkey 3 Select the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury in Hg Or select the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals hPa see Figure 2 10 4 Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top level softkeys 52 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
246. e FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited 4 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored Fight Plan Page is displayed 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted IDE gt gt c m m 6 Press the CLR Key The Remove airway name window is displayed 7 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan 3 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one dick to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page E 3 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited E 4 Press the EDIT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Edit Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Stored az Fight Plan Page is displayed 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted 6 Press the CLR Key The Remove procedure name gt trom flight plan window is displayed 7 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and a press the ENT Key 8 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor z Or
247. e Tecnam P2006T 284 A GARMIN ADDITIONAL FEATURES SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Additional features of the system include the following M3IAH3AO IN31SAS e SafeTaxi diagrams Scheduler SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 SateTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway runway and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the United States By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available a close up view of the airport layout can be seen The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as Switch fuel tanks Change oil or Altimeter Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD 8 1 SAFETAXI gt amp go SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range The en maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable When viewing at ranges close enough to 2 show the airport detail the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters numbers airport Hot Spots and airport landmarks including ramps buildings control towers and other prominent features Resolution is greater at lower map ranges When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position awareness 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways and or complex ramp areas Airport Hot Spots are out
248. e at one of the numbers listed below Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Toll free 800 800 1020 Tel 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A Toll free 800 525 6726 Tel 503 391 3411 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton S040 9RB U K Toll free within U K 0808 238 0000 Tel 44 0870 8501241 Fax 44 0870 8501251 Refer to the G950 Installation Manual for warranty registration instructions 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T A WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES GARMIN WARNING Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance feature The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight The terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance Terrain data is obtained from third party sources Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data aN WARNING The displayed minimum safe altitudes MSAs are only advisory in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitude
249. e has The G950 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system The traffic device should failed be serviced FAILED PATH A data path has failed A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63 W has failed MAG VAR WARN Large magnetic The GDU S internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e a LLI am e lt x variance Verity all course angles geographic locations near the magnetic poles Displayed magnetic course angles may differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2 SCHEDULER message Message criteria entered by the user INDEX 306 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT EXPORT MESSAGES In some circumstances some messages may appear in conjunction with others M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Flight Plan Import Export Results Flight plan successfully imported A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan File contained user waypoints only User The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan only user waypoints These waypoints imported successfully No stored waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints No flight plans stored in the flight plan data was modified system have been modified No flight plan files found to import The SD card contains no flight plan data Flight pl
250. e it reaches 50 feet above I the MDA DH alerting is disabled as Within 2500 feet Within 100 feet Altitude Reached INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5I13 MDA DH Bug zr MDA DH p 2 4 S x Settin BARO MIN 29 92IN g 2 AAFT z S m Figure 2 40 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations S34n1V33 S329IlaN3ddV IVNOILIGGY SAV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 73 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting for the alert If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA DH once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA DH alerting is disabled The MDA DH may be set from the PFD It is synchronized on both PFDs in a 3 Display System The function is reset when the power is cycled SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude decision height and bug 1 Select the TMR REF Softkey 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field Figure 2 41 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO OFF is selected by default Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field 4 Usethe small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude from zero to 16 000 feet 5 To remove the window press the CLR Key or press the TMR REF Softkey un m c LLJ ce N EIS MINIMUMS 4 BARO 1650FT A
251. e missing MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists system should be serviced ADDITIONAL FEATURES The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database Ensure that the data card is properly inserted Replace data card If problem persists the G950 system should be serviced N Lu e a LLI am e lt x The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database Ensure that the data card is properly inserted Replace data card If problem persists the G950 system should be serviced INDEX 300 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed Crosstill is off version mismatch Xtalk is off Install correct aviation database version in both displays The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed Americas type mismatch Xtalk is off European etc Crosstill is off Install correct aviation database type in both displays The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed Crossfill is off version mismatch Install correct terrain database version in both displays M3IA83A0 IN31SAS SLNAINNYLSNI 1H5I14 DB MISMATCH Terrain database The PFD and MFD have different terrain database
252. e other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft the altitude separation appears above the traffic symbol if below the altitude separation appears below Altitude trend is displayed as an up down arrow for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction to the right of the target symbol Traffic symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb descent information APPENDICES INDEX 274 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN nazar AVOIDANCE DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when TIS is operating PFD Inset Map e Trip Planning Page e Navigation Map Page Nearest Pages e Traffic Map Page e Active Flight Plan Page Displaying traffic information maps other than the Traffic Map Page 1 Press the MAP Softkey 2 Press the TRAFFIC Softkey When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page an icon is shown to indicate the feature is enabled for display Figure 6 8 NAVE MAP 36 975 COHZ mu x MENGE llc errs W365 n NEW KENT CO amus Non Threat Traffic Advisory J NRST FREGS 5 Traffic 5000 1000 Above E SEAS iHome TRAR FX Above Climbing Descending KRIC 119150 jur d NG DESTINATION AIRPORT TIHE REP neue Jaffe Traffic Display Status Enabled Icon Banner TERRAIN AIRWAYS Figure 6 8 TIS Traffic on the Naviga
253. e small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 3 Press the DELETE Softkey press the CLR Key or press the MENU Key highlight Delete Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Delete Flight Plan XX window is displayed w 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan To cancel the request press the CLR Key or OF highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 2 A NOTE The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight IDE Deleting all stored flight plans gt gt c m m 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Highlight Delete All and press the ENT Key A Delete all flight plans confirmation window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH FLIGHT PLAN EDITING gt A The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited The edits made to the active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN zS The G950 allows deletion of an active flight plan Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by E the G950 Deleting the active flight p
254. ed the CDI scale changes to 0 3 nm The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA CD CE CI CR DF FA FC FD FM IE or TF AUDIO PANEL amp CNS s After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA wi Ou E Flight Phase Automatic CDI Full scale Deflection s z ec E Enroute io a Approach Non precision None 1 0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on O Approach variables see Figure 2 29 lt Non precision with Vertical Guidance Approach LNAV VNAV 1 0 nm decreasing to a specified course width then Approach 0 3 nm depending on variables see Figure 2 30 LPV Missed Approach ADDITIONAL FEATURES Table 2 1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling APPENDICES INDEX 64 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS OBS MODE M3IAH3AO IN31SAS A NOTE VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended Enabling Omni bearing Selector OBS Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS flight plan GPS must be the selected navigation source but retains the current active to waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft symbol w
255. ed range to reserve fuel A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range If only ua reserve fuel remains the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle E E E Total Endurance Range Time to Reserve Fuel 4 Lu Range to Reserve Fuel AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt Figure 5 28 Navigation Map Fuel Range Ring 9s Displaying removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time 25 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option s 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Select the Map group 2 4 Press the ENT Key 5 Highlight the FUEL RNG RSV field 6 Select On or Off 7 Highlight the fuel reserve time field This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount of fuel reserve desired ADDITIONAL FEATURES 8 To change the reserve fuel time enter a time 00 00 to 23 59 hours minutes The default setting is 00 45 minutes 9 Press the ENT Key APPENDICES 10 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page INDEX 144 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT NAVIGATION INFORMATION DISPLAY The Navigation Information Display operates in two modes automatic mode and destination mode The mode is toggled by pressing the AUTO or DEST Softkey The display defaults in automatic
256. elect Airway Page is displayed The LD AIRWY Softkey or the Load Airway menu item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen the waypoint ahead of the cursor position un _2 5 Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list and press the ENT Key Low altitude airways are E shown first in the list followed by all altitude airways and then high altitude airways 5 6 Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list and press the ENT Key LOAD is highlighted 7 Press the ENT Key The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted n E IER 133 300 121 900 com 15 98 STJ E 128 200 CON2 Airway Entry Waypoint M S5 Selected Airway A d Selected Exit Point z zz HOPPS lt TEE TLENE ALMAS lt V244 V50 5 ee Airway Exit Points ui Available e F E Preview of lt review o ae Selected Airway KHPR4CPHERSON A T a ESPERE EE SEEN eS eee eee Figure 5 62 Select Airway Page Selecting Exit Point j zs Sc EE eu Ow et APPENDICES INDEX 190 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT E KMKC KCOS 2 z m z Departure KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO MCI _ TIFTO NM a Enroute 2 TOP 147 4 9NM Airway V4 SLN Inserted Airway Header SLN S77 Airway Identifier airway e Airway V244LAA identifier exit waypoint identifier TUS o
257. en activated VNV indications VNV Target Altitude RVSI VDI appear on the PFD in conjunction with the TOD within 1 minute message and Vertical track voice alert See the Flight Management Section for details on VNV features VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the criteria listed in Table 2 2 Top of Descent Message nav 111 90 188 98 I J2H TOD within 1 minute EE CRIER AENA HAVZ 108 90 Tew 136 975 COHZ i VNV Target le 3100 ELA Altitu e PUB a Erca Vertical Ea rea Deviation p180 Indicator o 6B8BB p E Required E Vertical P conn Speed Bug 29 9211 GPS Is Terminal Selected Phase of Navigation Flight Source DDR 4022 ALT 20 20 23 Figure 2 34 Vertical Navigation Indications PFD VNV Indication Removed Criteria Required Vertical Vertical VNV Target Speed RVSI Deviation VDI Altitude Aircraft gt 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change VNV cancelled CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD Aircraft gt 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit Active altitude constrained waypoint can not be reached within X maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed Table 2 2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to ox oe ors unsupported flight plan leg type see Flight Management X X X Section pe 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Te
258. er than the Terrain Proximity Page an icon to indicate the 2 feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown Figure 6 5 The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling disabling display of terrain and obstacles The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and 270 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN nazar AVOIDANCE obstacle data are decluttered from the display If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected the data is removed from the map Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data however obstacles recognized by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting limit Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation Map If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page 1 Select the Navigation Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key 3 With Map Setup highlighted press the ENT Key Figure 6 2
259. er waypoint name up to six characters 3 Press the ENT Key The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint B 4 lf desired define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways ai a Select RAD RAD using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the two reference waypoint 22 identitiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs d Or b Select RAD DIS using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the reference waypoint identifier m the radial and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs 5 Or c Select LAT LON using the small FMS Knob press the ENT Key and enter the latitude and longitude into the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs S lt 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 165 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi 6 If desired change the storage method of the waypoint to TEMPORARY or NORMAL by moving the cursor SE to TEMPORARY and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box gt 7 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor A Or oz 1 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor E 2 Enter a user waypoint name up to six characters 3 Press the ENT Key The message Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA is displayed i 4 With YES highlighted press the ENT Key
260. essage The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Changing the altitude buffer distance setting 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 4 Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key T 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Turning an airspace alert on or off gt 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor m 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF IDE 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor s gt c m m GS DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 900 com AUX SYSTEM SETUP 128 200 COM2 gt S DEFAULT PROFILE SA P 25 zi m MFD DATA BAR FIELDS 14 DEC 09 ALTITUDE BUFFER 200FT 22 4 7 SLCL CLASS B TMA OFF LOCAL 24hr OFF TIME FORMAT i ie CLASS C TCA it Airspace Alerts Box gt TIME OFFSET 00 0 CLASS D _ Airspace Altitude Buffer 4 RESTRICTED OFF Alert On Off NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC MOA MILITARY OFF SELECTED AUTO Default Settings Shown MAG VAR 4 E OTHER ADIZ SYS
261. ethod of the waypoint to TEMPORARY or NORMAL by moving the cursor to TEMPORARY and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page EDITING USER WAYPOINTS Editing a user waypoint comment or location 1 2 3 4 5 6 With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List if required and press the ENT Key Move the cursor to the desired field Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes Press the ENT Key to accept the changes Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Renaming user waypoints 1 2 3 190 01146 00 Rev A Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List Press the RENAME Softkey or press the MENU Key and select Rename User Waypoint Enter a new name Press the ENT Key The message Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB is displayed Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Sia SINJWNYLSNI MJIAYJAO 1H5I14 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd Olanv IDE gt gt c m m S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1VNOILIQQV QuVZzvH S32IaN3ddV XIGNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N e 4 With YES highlighted press the ENT Key F 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Changing the location of an existing waypoint to
262. ety Improvement Report postage paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs General Aviation District Offices Flight Standards District Offices and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators N W lt za ec eu lt N Lu e Lu e e lt INDEX 326 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL LL LLL LL LL APPENDIX F MAP SYMBOLS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS AIRPORTS BASEMAP Unknown Airport Interstate Highway SINJWNYLSNI 1H5DI14 Non towered Non serviced Airport State Highway Towered Non serviced Airport US Highway Bo 7 Non towered Serviced Airport meu onan a Ba gt Towered Serviced Airport ae a gt State Province Border m Restricted Private Airport International Border INTL BORDER _ NAVAIDS Railroad IE 1N3IAN35VNVIA 1H5DI14 Nem sbo Intersection Latitude Longitude JINVGIOAV QuVZvH NDB non directional radio beacon x ICAO Control Area m VOR DME Mode C Tower Area E mo VOR ILS Warning Area Prohibited Area Z Alert Area Restricted Area m VORTAC TACAN Caution Area Training Area Danger Area Unknown Area Class C Terminal Radar Service Area Mode C Area gt m J m A m N Military Operations Area MOA XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 327 APPENDIX F GARMI N e HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES MISCELLANEOUS o S Petre Symbol Fem
263. ext 23B0FT COVIE 227 9 NM Cross AT LEMYN z E MESE Large Light Blue Text 2 300 ft Approach KDFH RNAV 17LGPS LPV EZ RIVET iaf 259 18 8NM 5283 Small Light Blue Text eai DRAAK 176 3 3MM 2000FT ross M or BELOW INWOD 176 3 2NH Small Light Blue 3 000 ft MENOL faf NEC a 000ue0 Text Altitude Constraint pui EX 3 d Examples SOFT eae mall White Text with POI KE Altitude Restriction Bar Figure 5 88 Waypoint Altitude Constraints 216 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT eo J lt U mE White Text Light Blue Text Light Blue Subdued Text 2 T1 Large Altitude calculated by the system Altitude has been entered manually The system cannot use this estimating the altitude of the aircratt as Altitude is designated for use in giving altitude in determining vertical it passes over the navigation point This vertical speed and deviation guidance speed and deviation guidance altitude is provided as a reference and is Altitude does not match the published because of an invalid constraint Zim not designated to be used in determining altitude in navigation database or no condition eo vertical speed and deviation guidance published altitude exists s ua Altitude is not designated to be used in Altitude is designated for use in giving The system cannot use this determining vertical speed and deviation vertical speed and deviation guidance altitude in
264. failure the G950 System automatically switches to reversionary backup mode In reversionary mode all important flight information is presented on the remaining display s in the same format as in normal operating mode PFD failure MFD enters reversionary mode e MFD failure PFD enters reversionary mode If a display fails the appropriate IAU display Ethernet interface is cut off Thus the IAU can no longer communicate with the remaining display refer to Figure 1 1 and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS ADC Engine Airframe Unit and Transponder as required The change to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required 8 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN If the system fails to detect a display problem reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the display backup button installed in the cockpit Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode NAV1 and COM1 provided by the failed PFD Flagged Invalid Figure 1 8 G950 Reversionary Mode Failed PFD G950 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS When an LRU or an LRU function fails a large red X is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing failed data Figure 1 10 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs Upon G95
265. ftkey 3 Press the FMS Knob The WAYPOINT field is highlighted 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 5 Enter the desired waypoint JINVGIOAV QuVZvH a Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier facility or city name and press the ENT Key Refer to Section 1 7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G950 Or a Turn the small FMS Knob counter clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan b Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST RECENT or AIRWAY waypoints if required C Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint The G950 automatically fills in the identifier zS facility and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint dz mz d Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry z 6 Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key 7 Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key E 8 With the cursor highlighting COMPUTE RAIM press the ENT Key Once RAIM availability is computed one of the following is displayed i e COMPUTE RAIM RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint time and date combination e COMPUTING AVAILABILITY RAIM calculation in progress S Sx e RAIM AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint time and date e RAIM NOT AVAILABLE RAIM is predicted
266. g the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code z The pre programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200 If a VFR code change is required contact a ui c Garmin authorized service center for configuration c E VFR Code T TI zo ALERTS Figure 4 37 VFR Code IDENT FUNCTION ua a UW od Lu e jan lt A NOTE In Standby Mode the IDENT Softkey is inoperative z Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control ATC The indication ru distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controllers screen The IDENT Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys When the IDENT Softkey is selected a green IDNT E indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection the system reverts to the top level az softkeys ax ds IDNT HE Indication Select the DXPUR iila p 15 3 IDENT n APDR IEEE ALERTS A to Initiate the ID Function Figure 4 38 IDENT Softkey and Indication ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 106 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS FLIGHT ID REPORTING M3IAH3AO IN31SAS NOTE If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it contact a Garmin authorized service center for config
267. gaged enroute The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct to 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN APPENDIX C e un ENT enter FOB Fuel On Board E EPE Estimated Position Error FPL flight plan n EPU Estimated Position Uncertainty fom feet per minute ERR error FREQ frequency ESA Enroute Safe Altitude FRZ freezing z Estimated A measure of horizontal GPS position FSS Flight Service Station m Position Error error derived by satellite geometry ft foot feet onalni ib BST gol Fuel Flow The fuel flow rate expressed in units of Estimated The estimated time at which the fuel per hour Time of aircraft should reach the destination E Arri Fuel On The total amount of usable fuel on rrival waypoint based upon current speed Board board the aircraft and track Estimated The estimated time it takes to reach P Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the G S GS glideslope A present position based upon current GA go around 2 x ground speed gal gl gallon s m ETA Estimated Time of Arrival GBOX gearbox imated Time Enrout nA gt ETE Estimated Time Enroute GDC Garmin Air Data Computer T EXPIRD expired GDL Garmin Satellite Data Link 2E GDU Garmin Display Unit z T degrees Fahrenheit GEA Garmin Engine Airframe Unit FA Course From Fix to Altitude GEO geographic zz FAA Federal Aviation Administration GFC Garmin Flight Control SS FADEC Full Authority Digital Engine
268. ghlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box Zu 4 Enter the minimum runway length zero to 99 999 feet and press the ENT Key os zs SYSTEM UTILITIES lt x For flight planning purposes timers trip statistics and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX Utility v Page The timers available include a stopwatch like generic timer a total time in flight timer and a record of the time of departure Trip statistics odometer trip odometer and average trip and maximum groundspeeds ia are displayed from the time of the last reset A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder et messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Alerts Window on the PFD see Figure 1 36 2 a 38 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN AREE ENT 117 88 TOP KANSAS CITY INTL Pos 3 3 NM W BRG 089 TPA 2050 FT TOWER 128 200 LONGEST RUNWAY 01L 19R 10881x150 NRST FREQS ARTCC DEPARTURE TIME ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER TRIP AVERAGE GS MAXIMUM GS PWR ON GS DTK TRK ETE AUX UTILITY 00 00 00 00 20 35 21 66LCL SYSTEM OVERVIEW 133 300 1121 988 com 128 200 COM2 One Time KANSAS CITY 127 900 ATIS KMCI 128 375 DEST APT NO DESTINATION AIRPORT NO CARD One Time ET eS eo a a EEUU een S ee ees US EMEDERN Figure 1 35 Utility Page TIMERS The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time HH MM SS Whe
269. ght Most G950 maps can display the following information e Airports NAVAIDs airspaces airways land data Aircraft icon representing present position highways cities lakes rivers borders etc with names e Nav range ring Fuel range ring Map Pointer information distance and bearing to pointer location of pointer name and other pertinent Flight plan legs information User waypoints Map range Track vector Wind direction and speed Topography scale Map orientation Topography data cons for enabled map features e Obstacle data The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted All Map Group Pages MAP Flight Plan Pages FPL All Waypoint Group Pages WPT Direct to Window e AUX Trip Planning e PFD Inset Map All Nearest Group Pages NRST Procedure Loading Pages MAP ORIENTATION Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options allowing flexibility in determining aircraft position relative to other items on the map north up or for determining where map items are relative to where the aircraft is going track up desired track up or heading up The map orientation is shown in the upper right corner of the map 199 3006 127 906 con 128 206 coz HORTH UP Lt UEFE Figure 5 3 Map Orientation e North up NORTH UP aligns the top of the map display to north default setting Track up TRK UP aligns t
270. ght the AUTO ZOOM field SS 6 Select Off MFD Only PFD Only or ALL On 7 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option The flashing cursor highlights the MAX LOOK FWD field E Times are from zero to 999 minutes 3 8 Usethe FMS Knobs to set the time Press the ENT Key S 9 Repeat step 8 for MIN LOOK FWD zero to 99 minutes and TIME OUT zero to 99 minutes i 10 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 123 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N ZE MAP PANNING E Map panning allows the pilot to e View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range e Highlight and select locations on the map e Review information for a selected airport NAVAID or user waypoint Designate locations for use in flight planning View airspace and airway information Z When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick the Map Pointer flashes on the map display A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircrafts present position and the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer z az 17 80 ToP ss 126k pTK258 rRk258 ee 17 27 133 300 gt 121 900 com e ss 15 58 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 COH2 e 1 MAP POINTER ADA EAST 18800rFT msl N 39
271. gt m TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION The G950 System displays traffic symbolically on the PFD Inset Map the Navigation Map Page MFD and various other MFD page maps Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix E for more details about the Traffic Information Service TIS When a traffic advisory TA is detected the following automatically occur INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5DI14 The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic A flashing black on yellow TRAFFIC annunciation Figure 2 37 appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area JINVGIOAV QuVZvH A single Traffic aural alert is generated unless an optional Traffic Advisory System TAS is installed refer to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment P If additional TAs appear new aural and visual alerts are generated A 508 NORTH UP AEM 1i gt TO LAG S Traffic E Symbols zo 12E Ot m rA A h Figure 2 37 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed z m S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T ra A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN ALTITUDE ALERTING The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and aural alerts when the aircraft is approaching the Selected Altitude Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed the Altitude Alerter is reset The Altitude Alerter is independent of
272. gt g gt 1 NDB Frequency 5 5 Figure 5 39 Nearest NDB Page gt ri A N S3un1v34 S39IQN3ddV 4v NOIIIGOV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 161 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi VORs n amp az The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals since ILS signals can be received on a NAV receiver or to quickly auto tune a VOR or ILS frequency Localizer information 7 cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is cu listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME it is displayed as VOR DME E In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area the VOR Information Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled VOR INFORMATION FREQUENCY and NEAREST AIRPORT 7 Selected VOR Navigation Map Showing Selected VOR x 17 80 Topics 121kr_ ork 29 tR287 eve 21 43 _ 133 300 121 900 com 15 50 stu WPT VOR INFORMATION 128 200 CoH2 J NoRTH UP Am p VOR Identifier Type Facility Name LEAN NM UR cC EMPTUM ILS wy Nearest City LL ERN 0 Frequency NEAREST AIRPORT Nearest Airport Info Identifier Type symbol Bearing Distance to Airport AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Class Magnetic Variation Region Lat Long
273. gure 4 35 Entering a Code Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob 1 2 3 4 5 Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the previous code Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically 190 01146 00 Rev A Press the ENT Key to Complete Turn the Small ERANG Code Entry FMS Knob to E PDR Zi Enter Two Code Turn the dar FMS Kno ENT BKSP _ BACK ALERTS Digis ata Time harder Cursor to the PUSH CRSR Next Code Field Figure 4 36 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T AUDIO PANEL AND CNS M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 Qo A a U 13NVd OIGNV s380n1V34 JONVGIOAV 1NIWI YNYWN S3DIQN3ddV jpnoiiaav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 XIGNI AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N zz VFR CODE o az The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey then the VFR Softkey When the VER Softkey is selected the pre programmed VER code is automatically displayed in the code field n of the Transponder Data Box Selectin
274. h up AUTO ZOOM Off N MAX LOOK FHD MIN LOOK FHD U5 TIME OUT Cf ES LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR 0 Track Vector Wind Vector On Off VePPAIT deep Q On O Nav Range Ring On Off NAV RANGE RING O Look Ahead Time TOPO DATA 0 N TOPO SCALE mr TERRAIN DATA Fuel Range OBSTACLE DATA 40 On Of FUEL RNG RSU Off Fuel Reserve Time Figure 5 25 Navigation Map Setup Menu TRACK VECTOR WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING FUEL RANGE RING Setup AUDIO PANEL amp CNS WIND VECTOR The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right hand portion of the screen Wind vector information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt Wind Direction 2 NORTH UP Wind Speed Figure 5 26 Navigation Map Wind Vector HAZARD AVOIDANCE NOTE The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving It is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages AFCS Displaying removing the wind vector 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Select the Map group 4 Press the ENT Key ADDITIONAL FEATURES a 5 Highlight the WIND VECTOR field e ii 6 Select On or Off 7 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page 2 2 14
275. he ENT Key 208 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG The G950 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the active leg the flight plan leg which is currently used for navigation guidance M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Activating a flight plan leg 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the destination waypoint for the desired leg 3 Press the ACT LEG Softkey MFD only or press the MENU Key highlight Activate Leg and press the ENT Key 4 Tl 25 G un rm A confirmation window is displayed with ACTIVATE highlighted e 4 Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg To cancel press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key gt 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor eS az 17 88 TOP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 308 121 900 com 13 98 FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 COM2 r NORTH LP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS S z 2T Enroute Cur r ent i m Active Leg z3 Airway V4 SLN zr TNT Or LA 25 SBN Selected Destination oN Airway V263 TBE Waypoint TBE 210 71 18 c Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL 309 73 NM gt TI A un UNITED STATES OF Press the FPL key to gt 300NH
276. he ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identitier in the Nearest Intersection Box 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 158 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path In addition 2 to displaying a map of the surrounding area the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in m three boxes labeled NEAREST INT INFORMATION and REFERENCE VOR The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time If there are more than can be shown the list can be scrolled If there are no items for display text indicating that fact is displayed SINIWNYLSNI 1H5I13 A NOTE The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm Nearest Intersection Navigation Map Showing Nearest Intersection 17 88 TOP cs 15 50 STJ gt c l go Intersection Information nO Identifier Symbol Te Bearing Distance to m intersection from aircraft position gt cn E m INFORMATION ln 3918 99 Intersection Lat Long Reference VOR Info 22 dentifier Type symbol 25 VOR Frequency m Bearing Distance to VOR S21V Figure 5 37 Nearest Intersections Page S3un1v34 S39IQN3ddV 4v NOIIIGOV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmi
277. he MAP it is decided to execute a missed approach Automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended past the MAP Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure A direct to is initiated to MOGAL which is the Missed Approach Hold Point MAHP as seen in Figure 5 140 The aircraft is climbing to 10 000 feet The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI 17 88 gs 115kr prk35T TRK 351 ETE 10 42 133 308 121 988 com 15 50 128 200 conz PYNON Nh eae Approach KCOS RNAV 35RoPs LPY HABUK iaf Mc M FALUR ECCE NET D OLOR WO SPRIMBS X UEBIX faf M i I RW35R map 6365F7 Ji ER 6368FT ME TC n NEU o gt MOGAL mahp 205MM 18000rT Y Van gt G ONM gt FORT CARSON d d IS IB V5 REQ e REL mnm Ld EE FALUR w E Press the FPL key to 3 NN view the previous page MAP NEW HPT VIEW VNV PROFICNCL VNV YNY B ATK OFST ACT LEG SHW CHRT Figure 5 140 Missed Approach Active 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 265 266 GARMIN 26 The aircraft continues climbing to AT or ABOVE 10 000 feet at MOGAL A holding pattern is established at the MAHP MOGAL as shown in Figure 5 141 pork 168 TRK 232 ete 8 15 133 388 121 988 cont FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 288 COM2 EIE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
278. he marker beacon receiver is always on and detects any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 The receiver detects the three marker tones outer middle and inner and provides the marker beacon annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD SI3 Outer Marker Middle Marker Inner Marker Indication Indication Indication Qo A a e 13NVd OIGNV INJINADVNVIN 1H5DI13 JINVGIOAV QuVZVvH Figure 4 28 Marker Beacon Keys The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation On Muted and Deselected Pressing the MKR MUTE key selects and deselects marker beacon audio The key annunciator indicates when marker beacon audio is selected During marker beacon audio reception pressing the MKR MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the 5 marker annunciations Figure 4 27 The marker tone is silenced then waits for the next marker tone The E MKR MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated indicating audio muting The audio returns when the next marker m z beacon signal is received If the MKR MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception O M I indication while a marker beacon audio is muted the audio is deselected and the MKR MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity The HI SENS function annunciator illuminated is used to provide an earlier indication whe
279. he top of the map display to the current ground track 120 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Desired track up DTK UP aligns the top of the map display to the desired course Heading up HDG UP aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading NOTE When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non North Up orientation the map does not show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed NOTE Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page Any other displays that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page Changing the Navigation Map orientation 1 With the Navigation Map Page displayed press the MENU Key The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option Map Setup Selection Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to bose page Figure 5 4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window 2 Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window 3 Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key once to select the ORIENTATION field Map Group Selection Orientation Field Figure 5 5 Map Setup Menu Window Map Group 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation 5 Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation 6 Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 121 M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJINNYLSN
280. hen OBS Mode is selected 7a ol JJ c m un While OBS Mode is enabled a course line is drawn through the active to waypoint on the moving map If desired the course to from the waypoint can now be adjusted When OBS Mode is disabled the GPS flight m plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints following the course set in OBS vs Mode The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line bs 178 KMPR DIs 19 9mm Bre 177 a P KMPR DIS 18 81 BRG 177 gt as m GPS Selected E OBS Mode Ec Enabled me Extended m Course T z Line CDI cor j Selecting the OBS Selecting the OBS p Softkey Suspends Softkey Again lt Waypoint Sequencing Returns to Normal e gt Operation 2 Ov m Figure 2 30 Omni bearing Selector OBS Mode Enabling disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan a 1 Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode 2 Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to from the waypoint Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint 2E 3 Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing SS n gt gt m Se 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 65 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point MAP automatic approach waypoint sequencing is suspended SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower r
281. hes are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the WAAS This approach combines the LNAV VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System ILS LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums JINVGIOAV QuVZvH If WAAS is not available for the final approach course the approach downgrades as indicated by the Approach downgraded Use LNAV minima message Wuat is RAIM AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS z When WAAS is unavailable the GPS receivers use Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM to perform the following functions e Monitor and verify integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites zS e Notify pilot when satellite conditions do not provide necessary coverage to support a certain phase of flight FE us Predict satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is sufficient to satisfy requirements refer to the System Overview Section for instructions on RAIM prediction Detect and exclude bad satellites from the navigation solution Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection limit 4 0 nm for oceanic 2 0 nm for enroute 1 0 nm for terminal and 0 3 nm for non precision approaches Without WAAS or RAIM GPS position accuracy integrity cannot be monitored gt m i rm A m
282. hile taxiing and during level flight Z go 9 When the MFD powers up the Power up screen Figure 1 5 displays the following information 2 e System version m Copyright and database name and version SafeTaxi database information see Additional Features 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5DI14 Terrain Airport Terrain Obstacle and Aviation database name version and effective dates Current database information includes valid operating dates cycle number and database type When this information has been reviewed for currency to ensure that no databases have expired the pilot is prompted to continue JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Pressing the ENT Key or right most softkey acknowledges this information and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon pressing the key a second time When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to xs gt determine a position the aircrafts current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page A lt 4002 40 Gare sque er cubs S DATABASE j TA Checklist Fila N A S O WP Bme Lond 300 m A Selai Expires 11 FEB 2010 iai gt ae Teron 204 e Aircort Terroin 2 04 AN Obstrce Dores hides gt V kvection Expires 14 JAN 2078 9 3 m z A m ua Press FMS kneb to chenee profile Press ENT or rightsest sof thes GARMIN te contirue Figure 1 4 PFD Initialization Figure 1 5 Example MFD Power up Screen m 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T SYSTEM
283. his auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum minimum times can be adjusted M3IAH3AO IN31SAS The time out time configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group determines how long auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob At the expiration of this time the auto zoom range is restored Setting the time out value to zero causes the manual override to never time out SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 When the maximum look forward time is set to zero the upper limit becomes the maximum range available 2000 nm e When the minimum look forward time is set to zero the lower limit becomes 1 5 nm 7 Auto Zoom ORIENTATION Nc th up AUTO ZOOH n gt Off MFD Only PFD Only All On HAX LOOK FMD 30min Maximum Look Forward Time m 3 Manual Range Override a a E Minimum Look Forward Time ac Expiration Time UND Un a e TRACK VECTOR Huy WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING Off TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA Off OBSTACLE DATA Off FUEL RNG RSV Of IDE s gt c m S m Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page Figure 5 7 Map Setup Menu Window Map Group Auto Zoom JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Configuring automatic zoom 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option gt 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed z 3 Select the Map group 4 Press the ENT Key a5 gt 5 Highli
284. i B GMA 1347 Audio Panel Controls 82 de id mu S b 4 2 COM Operation 84 GPS Receiver Operation sennen 13 a 15 G950 Controls 19 COM Transceiver Selection and Activation 84 COM Transceiver Manual Tuning 05 PEINE eos BE li Quick tuning and Activating 121 500 MHz 86 DR iid ee 2 Auto tuning the COM Frequency ee 8 1 6 Accessing G950 Functionality 25 Auto tuning from the MED 98 MENUS ener 2 Frequency Spacing senennnenees 91 piciu eene 2 Automatic Squelch eee 92 Pate OUD ard cara E URS 21 NV e cctreescre rect oie scetecesntee cee ce toeseses 92 E e 31 43 NAV Operation 93 een IN UU eee i NAV Radio Selection and Activation 93 1 7 Display Backlighting 4 NAV Receiver Manual Tuning 94 SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Auto tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD 96 2 1 Flight Instruments 48 Auto tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation 100 Airspeed Indicator e 48 Marker Beacon Receiver see 101 Attitude Indicator LLL 50 44 GTX33 Mode S Transponder 102 Altimeter suu 51 Transponder Controls eee 102 Vertical Speed Indicato
285. idance 217 Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI 54 256 257 Vertical navigation Memo 215 Vertical Speed Indicator VSI 46 54 257 Vertical Track alert 308 VFR code 106 VNAV 179 306 VNV 255 319 Guidance Disabling 214 Enabling 214 Target Altitude 54 VNV indications PFD 69 Voice alerts 296 Voice alerts TIS Traffic 11 279 VOL annunciation 110 4 A GARMIN VOR NearestSee Nearest VOR VOR ae e ese deutet ual etu fee ute 93 VSISee Vertical Speed Indicator VSI Vspeeds 49 VS TGT 216 255 W WAAS 239 302 AR NIN eea E 295 Warning alerts 296 Warranty j Waypoint Automatic sequencing
286. ight of the aircraft symbol The OBS Softkey label changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2 31 Pressing the SUSP Softkey deactivates the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT ue m LL ce 4 EIS SUSP Annunciation SUSP Softkey Suspends Waypoint Sequencing AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Figure 2 31 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT INDEX 66 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 2 2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA M3IA83A0 IN31SAS A NOTE Selecting the DFLTS Softkey a second level PFD softkey turns off metric Altimeter display the Inset Map and wind data display In addition to the flight instruments the PFD also displays various supplemental information including the Outside Air Temperature OAT wind data and Vertical Navigation VNV indications OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE un M JJ c m un The Outside Air Temperature OAT is displayed in degrees Celsius C in the lower left of the PFD under m un normal display conditions During reversionary display conditions the OAT is displayed to the right of the flap indicator Normal Display P newt 188 40 118 95 ors i 118 100 133 958 ccm go nave 115 10 120 280 cw Ae d a gt m 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5I13
287. ignator E 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway if more than one for the selected airport 4 To remove the flashing cursor press the FMS Knob z i Se 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 153 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Viewing a destination airport From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key Select View Destination Airport The Destination Airport is displayed The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table Communication Frequencies Navigation Frequencies Approach Control Pre Taxi Arrival CTA Radar ASOS Departure Ramp ATIS Gate Terminal AWOS Ground TMA Center Helicopter Tower Class B Multicom TRSA Class C Other Unicom Clearance May include Additional Information DENN Table 5 5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations A departure arrival or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page See the Procedures section for details METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather The G950 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport informat
288. ilot to manually select any approach departure or arrival leg as the active leg of the 2 m flight plan This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 WHEN DOES TURN ANTICIPATION BEGIN The G950 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15 bank angle with the ability to roll up to 30 and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation A waypoint alert Next DTK in seconds or Next HDG in seconds appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero JINVGIOAV QuVZvH e A flashing turn advisory Turn right left to in seconds appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the turn and flashes as it counts down to zero Turn right lett to now or Next DTK HDG to now is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI GPS mode automatically sequences to the next DTK or HDG value e The To From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been crossed nO E WHEN poes THE CDI SCALE CHANGE SS us Once a departure is activated the G950 Course Deviation Indicator CDI full scale deflection is set to 0 3 nm The CDI scale changes to 1 0 nm terminal mode
289. imums press the ENT Key 7 Press the ENT Key with LOAD highlighted to load the approach procedure or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ACTIVATE and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure ADDITIONAL FEATURES A NOTE When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course the message NOT APPROVED FOR GPS is displayed GPS provides guidance to the approach but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach APPENDICES INDEX 226 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN Available Procedure Actions Destination Airport WORTH UF AIRPORT KCOS PUBLIC SELECT APPR APPROACH CHANNEL E A L p Vu CHANNEL 97789 SELECT ARRIVAL SELECT DEPARTURE Arrival ECO TBE LOADED EERE OPSHN EIC FSHER PYNON ARRIVAL bec KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL Acts DEPARTURE KHMKC ALL TIFTOZ TIFTO CURRENT VN A ACTIVE VNU WPT VS TGT VS REQ v DEV CEGIX fuf RH35R mop Press the PROC key ta Press the view the previous pagg au Pad tha Loaded Procedures Approach Preview Approach Choices Figure 5 93 Approach Selection Selected Approach Loaded Approach ETT APPROACH DHANNEL cH 97799 APPROACH SMA 35 900081 P5 LPY TRANSITION HABLE Inf 391 GON 780011 AAT AUR BARD p4 6368FT 348 TET 6370r1 PRIMARY FREQUENCY 10000 1 SEQUENCE HABLE iof FALUR CEGIX fef RWi52 mon CURRE
290. in Figure 1 2 The m G950 is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment vS e S TEC 55X Autopilot e KN 63 DME s KR 87 ADF S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1VNOILIQQV QuVZvH 1H5DI14 S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0 GARMIN 1 1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS GDU 1040 2 The left hand GDU is configured as a Primary Flight Display PFD and the right hand GDU as a Multi Function Display MFD Both feature 10 4 inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution The displays communicate with each other through a High Speed Data Bus HSDB Ethernet connection Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU SYSTEM E Lu gt e FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS GMA 1347 1 The Audio Panel integrates navigation communication radio NAV COM digital audio intercom and marker beacon controls and is installed between the displays This unit also provides manual control of display reversionary mode red DISPLAY BACKUP Button see Section 1 5 System Operation and communicates with both IAUs using an RS 232 digital interface FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD AVOIDANCE AFCS GIA 63W 2 The Integrated Avionics Units IAU function as the main communication hubs linking all LRUs with the on side display Each IAU contains a GPS WAAS receiver VHF COM NAV GS receivers and
291. ing 22 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page z 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 urn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box wn 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key NEAREST AIRPORTS The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page A minimum runway length and or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed Default settings are 0 feet or meters for runway length and any for runway surface type AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria any hard only hard soft water UO SE 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor E 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box a 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option any hard only hard soft water and press the zS ENT Key Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria V 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to hi
292. int distance 1 Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG LEG Soitkeys E 3 Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance or press the LEG LEG Softkey to view leg to leg waypoint distance 4 Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys A Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance E e 121 988 com CTIVE FLIGHT PLAN ponz NORTH UP MIn E ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS KMEC KEOS OTK DIS ALT E OTK jd Departure KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO Denortura KHKC ALL TIFTOZ TIFTO IDE D gt gt c m S m TIFTO z8b a F Enroute Enroute e Ai ek Airwoy V244LAA Airey VALAA JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Ary 263 1BE i s a 5t d Arey VERTES Arrival KCOS TBE DERY1ALL ASS ey d tels gt WIDE Softkey NARROW Softkey LEG LEG Softkey CUM Softkey mg Figure 5 83 Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg vs Cumulative Distance 5S n gt Switching between wide and narrow view gt a 1 Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page zZ 2 Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Soitkeys P 3 Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view 4 Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys i S lt
293. ion very useful if an immediate landing is required The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of up to 25 nearest airports three entries can be displayed at one time If there are more than three they are displayed in a scrollable list If there are no nearest airports available NONE WITHIN 200NM is displayed Bearing Distance to Airport f NEAREST AIRPORTS Airport Identifier 120 6 5NN VFR i Approach Available Type a NICOM 122 00 RNwv 2440FT Length of Longest COM Freq Info Runway Identification P s 111 1 NH ILSE E n Fey AP Siar Additional Airports within 200 nm 148 14 9NM 133 000 RNWY RPORT 1200 ALT e LL 2131 19 IDENT TMR REF NRST ALERTS NRST Softkey Figure 5 32 Nearest Airports Window on PFD 154 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list M3IAH3AO IN31SAS AIRPORT INFORMATION Airport Information 91K OLATHE KS En ID TypelCity CEDAR li cav PUBLIC UTC 6 El 0 5 2 irport Information N CEN USA sagelTime Eley N 38 55 88 SAEI 7 ifport Information WA94 53 10
294. ion Map Aviation Data ps Geographic Data CREE Topographic Data ATCHISON Hazard Data EN i 30 7502 Aircraft Icon Ay Ti Naive titan at Present Position orig SK ctive Flight Plan Leg Flight Plan Leg mamme WE J BINSINS S Sis J iy DER LAKE T 6s mccum au I i Lo CTY v i died aes Ses OV AU EK s EKEWC su KFOE a hvatnce ge x s wy Z a a EN KTE GRANDVIEW i KOR ud BELTON M um 5 adi 80 Map Range Figure 5 2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following information MCI TIFTO DIS 28 6mm eRe 286 PFD Navigation Status Box 118 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT e Active flight plan leg e g D KICT or KIXD gt The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the 22 KCOS or flight plan annunciations e g Turn MFD contains four data fields each displaying one of m right to 021 in 8 seconds the following items Distance DIS and Bearing BRG to the next Bearing BRG waypoint or flight plan annunciations e g TOD Distance DIS within 1 minute Desired Track DTK e Endurance END Symbol p Prices UNE ES Active Leg The symbols used in the PFD status bar are SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 A Direct to Estimated Time Enroute ETE Right Procedure Turn Fuel on Board FOB c e
295. ion Window Airspace ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 128 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE Distance and bearing from the aircrafts present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be calculated using the Measure Bearing and Distance selection from Navigation Map page menu The bearing and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying points with which to measure Lat Long distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a window at the top of the navigation map M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 Measuring bearing and distance between any two points 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed 2 Highlight the Measure Bearing Distance field E 3 Press the ENT Key A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft s present position 4 Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location The bearing and distance are displayed at the top of the map Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed Pressing the ENT Key changes the starting point for measuring 2 5 To exit the Measure Bearing Distance option press the Joystick or select Stop Measuring from the Page m Menu and press the ENT Key Measurement Information 17 80 TOP scs DTK TRK 133 300 121 900 C
296. ion field highlighted Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT A direct to with altitude constraints creates a descent path and provides guidance to stay on the path from the aircrafts current altitude to the altitude of the direct to waypoint The altitude is reached at the waypoint or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered All VNV altitudes prior to the direct to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct to All VNV altitudes following the direct to waypoint are retained See the section on Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and oftset distances M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Entering a VNV altitude and along track offset for the waypoint 1 Press the Direct to Key to display the Direct to Window 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the VNV altitude field 3 Enter the desired altitude 7 4 Press the ENT Key The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed 5 Turn the small FMS Knob to select MSL or AGL w 6 Press the ENT Key The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field oS E 7 Enter the desired along track distance before the waypoint n 8 Press the ENT Key Th
297. ir Mode Heading Invalid FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Operation HAZARD AVOIDANCE Figure 1 12 AHRS Operation AFCS Loss of GPS magnetometer or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information indicated by red X flags over the corresponding flight instruments Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS If GPS information from one of the inputs fails the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot If both GPS inputs fail the AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid ADDITIONAL FEATURES N D If the magnetometer input fails the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information however the 2 heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red X Ba q Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information Invalid unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information m e 12 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N SYSTEM OVERVIEW GPS RECEIVER OPERATION Each Integrated Avionics Unit IAU contains a GPS receiver Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to
298. is opened These pages can also be accessed from the Stored Flight Plan page using the LD softkeys Turning the 7 FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages ea Procedure Loading Page Group PROC io tae te oe TS Departure Loading 08 oio Arrival Loading ee wie B sachs p Approach Loading na m W T ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 1 31 Procedure Loading Pages Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section Checklist pages may be accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey APPENDICES INDEX 30 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM OVERVIEW The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters Time format local 12 or 24 hr or UTC Displayed measurement units Baro transition alert see Flight Instruments Section Airspace alerts Arrival alerts Audio alert voice e MFD Data Bar Navigation Status Box fields e GPS Course Deviation Indicator CDI range COM transceiver channel spacing e Displayed nearest airports TERRY V o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 ua 128 208 COM2 ACTIVE DEFAULT PROFILE o 9 Pos 3 3 NM USED CREATE E o v umm AVAILABLE 25 TT BRG Wo 5 TPA 2050 AIRSPACE ALERTS MFD DATA BAR FIELDS TOWER 128 200 LONGEST RUNWAY D L 19R 1801x150 ARTC
299. is available nearly 10096 of the time The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within 15 min of the specified arrival date and time Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches there may be times when RAIM is not available RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination 4 Tl 2e G un or some other reason that compromises navigation precision If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the v final approach course the approach does not become active If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF the missed approach procedure must be flown B GS DTK 133 300 121 980 com 00 COM2 AO aD GPS1 GPS SOLUTION 3D DIFF NAV ACTIVE B cn REA JT POSITION V 390739 XRATH PREDICTION ap nons S RAIM PREDICTION Box Hes d irr 03 28LCL Prediction Waypoint z NEU add 16 DEC 09 Arrival Time GROUND SPEED WT Arrival Date TRACK 289 SLE el RAIM Status GPS SIGNAL STRENGTH Se A J gt RAIM Softkey a displays RAIM PREDICTION GPS2 SBAS Pa SBAS Softkey Te Js z displays SBAS Selection S a Figure 5 99 RAIM Prediction n2 2 Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint m 1 Select the AUX GPS Status Page 5 A 2 Press the FMS Knob The RAIM Prediction WAYPOINT field is highlighted 5
300. is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link TIS receives traffic information from ground stations and is updated every 5 seconds The G950 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7 5 nm radius from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft Traffic is displayed using TCAS symbology TIS Symbol Non Threat Traffic AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT O Traffic Advisory TA e Traffic Advisory Off Scale Table 6 2 TIS Traffic Symbols HAZARD Ll W lt q S a AFCS Traffic Advisories TA alert the crew to intruding aircraft When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA a solid yellow circle symbol is generated A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving to the nearest 45 Traffic information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing non bearing traffic is displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page Figure 6 12 or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on which traffic can be displayed ADDITIONAL FEATURES The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet If th
301. is selected an Overwrite existing flight plan OK or CANCEL prompt is displayed vS Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the 2y SD card If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired select CANCEL using the FMS Knob press the m ENT Key select another flight plan slot and press the IMPORT Softkey again 7 Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing 8 Press the ENT Key to initiate the import IDE s gt G m m 9 Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import FLIGHT PLAN IMPORTING FLIGHT PLAN IMPORTING zr o gt FILE LIST N Select file to load into stored flight plan 4 Select file to load into stored flight plan 4 gt KMKC KCOS 9000 Fol 9000 Fpl LA KMKC KCOS 0001 fpl 00601 fpl n KMKC KCOS 0002 f pl 0003 fpl 00603 fpl 0004 fpl 0004 fpl P61 fpl FP 1 fpl x FP 2 F pl FP 2 f pl rn FP 3 fpl FP 3 fpl NAME KMKC TBE KMKC TBE CREATE ON 14 NOV 88 14 58 38UTC CREATE ON 14 NOV 808 14 58 38uTC m S CREATE BY Unknown CREATE BY Unknown gt AN INFO So DEPARTURE KIXD Flight plan successfully imported dus DESTINATION KMCI r TOTAL DISTANCE 676NM ENROUTE SAFE ALT gt Press the FPL key to a view the previous page mou E COPY DELETE IMPORT EXPORT i rm Import Export Softkeys List of Flight Plans to Import amp Import Successful e Details for the
302. is selected on the Audio Panel COMI MIC or COM2 MIC Key Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel d Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray The standby frequency in the tuning Z box is white The other standby frequency is gray Active Standby Fields iis a2 SE 135 100 r gt x Q COM2 Radio is Selected on the Audio Panel Figure 4 3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit ADDITIONAL FEATURES COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio APPENDICES INDEX 84 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS TRANSMIT RECEIVE INDICATIONS During COM transmission a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow On the Audio Panel when the active COM is transmitting the active transceiver COM MIC Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second M3IAH3AO IN31SAS During COM signal reception a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 121 888 Rx 118 680 com Annunciator s GOMZ Flashes During Transmit and Transmission Receive Indicators Figure 4 4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications Qo A a U 13NVd OIGNV COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the
303. ise to select EDIT and press the os ENT Key The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed 2 4 Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the highlighted waypoint 5 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Turning it clockwise displays a blank x Waypoint Information Window turning it counter dockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan nearest recent user or airway waypoints 6 Enter the identitier facility or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint trom the submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan l LLI Su o o a gt x NOTE If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates a Duplicate Waypoint Window is displayed Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint a Lu o G DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS 7 WAYPOINT IA GR LKS USA A O NE USA ee YUGOSLAVIA E e RUSSIA E BRAZIL t CHICAGO IL TAFFS N 41 59 06 059 T WO87 47 34 Ire JO 2S t Press ENT to select duplicate or CLR to cancel Figure 5 60 Duplicate Waypoints Window Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD ADDITIONAL FEATURES 3 Select the point in the flight plan bef
304. isory TA 71 Traffic Annunciation 47 Traffic Information Service TIS 325 326 Voice alerts 71 Transponder 3 SUS DO a ae a ae 46 Transponder code entry 105 Transponder data box 79 Transponder ground mode 103 Transponder mode field 79 103 104 Transponder standby mode 104 Trend Vector Turn Rate 58 Trip Planning 231 232 233 Statistics aaa 40 232 233 True Airspeed TAS 46 48 233 304 Turn anticipation 323 Turn Rate Indicator 46 58 TX indicator 85 U Units measurement niena 34 Updating Garmin databases 289 V VDISee Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI Vertical Deviation 52 Guidance 217 Direct to 215 Navigation 216 Speed Gu
305. k of airspeed The G950 system should zS be serviced E AHRS1 GPS AHRS1 using backup The 1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path Primary GPS path has failed The G950 GPS source system should be serviced when possible AHRS1 GPS AHRS1 not receiving The 1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information Check AFMS any GPS information limitations The G950 system should be serviced i AHRS1 GPS AHRS1 not receiving The 1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information The G950 system should be backup GPS information serviced AHRS1 GPS AHRS1 operating The 1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no GPS mode The G950 system should be exclusively in no GPS mode serviced AHRS1 SRVC AHRS1 Magnetic tield The 1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date Update magnetic field model model needs update when practical GEO LIMITS AHRS1 too far North The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation Heading is South no magnetic compass flagged as invalid AUDIO PANEL amp CNS m 29 mismatch communication halted zZ S GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES az Message Comments E HDG FAULT AHRS1 magnetometer A fault has occurred in the H GMU 44 Heading is flagged as invalid The AHRS uses aq fault has occurred GPS for backup mode operation The G950 system should be serviced mismatch communication halted D x GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES OPTIONAL GDL6
306. lan gt 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD z 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Delete Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Delete all waypoints in flight M plan window is displayed 3 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan To cancel the request press the CLR E Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 2S 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 201 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS Pal nS Individual waypoints entire airways and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan Some waypoints in the final approach segment such as the FAF or MAP can not be deleted individually Attempting to delete n a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying Invalid flight plan modification os Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan t 5 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted 3 Press the CLR Key The Remove XXXXX window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing curso
307. lected Departure Selected Runway Selected Transition Departure Transition Points Available 2591 257 Preview of Selected Departure Selected Departure End Point ar aa E a ae ed TET ee EE eee Figure 5 66 Departure Loading Page Selecting Transition 07 KMKC KCOS Departure KMKC ALL WLDCT2 SLN Inserted Departure Header Departure Identifier departure LN n departure transition departure end point Enroute e g KMKC ALL WLDCT2 SLN HYS 262 77 7Wwn Airway 244 LAA LAA 291 165mm Airway 263 TBE TBE 210 71 1mm Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL Figure 5 67 Stored Flight Plan Page Departure Inserted 194 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT ARRIVAL STAR A Standard Terminal Arrival STAR is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan Only one arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan The route is defined by selection of an arrival the transition waypoints and a runway 17 80 ToP ss 133 300 121 980 com 15 50 STJ 128 200 COM2 K PUBLIC CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS COLORADO SPRINGS CO M3IAYJAO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Destination Airport ARRIVAL rmi Selected Arrival a On Arrivals Available at KCOS RUNWAY Selected Runnay z go SEQUENCE nO Arrival Waypoint Sequence aD 73 0NM 9 8NM iB 11 9NM 18 NM gt De mo Preview of Selected Arrival gt lt S Figure 5
308. lerts 293 950 System Message Advisories 299 Flight Plan Import Export Messages 307 SD Card Use and Databases 309 Jeppesen Databases sssesseeenenenes 309 Qno 319 Frequently Asked Questions 321 General TIS Information ss 325 Map Symbols ssssssse 327 INDEX Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T Vii TABLE OF CONTENTS GARMI N BLANK PAGE viii Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The G950 Integrated Flight Deck System presents flight instrumentation position navigation communication and identification information to the pilot using flat panel color displays The system is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units LRUs ERR VS o lt m JJ m SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display PFD e GDC 74A Air Data Computer ADC GDU 1040 Multi Function Display MFD e GTX 33 Mode S Transponder e GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System Beacon Receiver AHRS GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units IAU GMU 44 Magnetometer j Figure 1 1 shows interactions between the LRUs Additional optional equipment are shown
309. light plan with an altitude constraint designated for vertical guidance Pressing the VNV Direct to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page allows the flight plan to be flown while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct to waypoint is provided The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current position to the vertical direct to waypoint not just along the leg for the direct to waypoint A direct to with altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct to Key also provides vertical guidance but would bypass flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct to waypoint A top of descent TOD point is computed based on the default flight path angle descent begins once the TOD is reached Current Vertical Navigation Profile Current Vertical Navigation Profile Prior to VNV Direct to After VNV Direct to 17 88 ToP cs ETE 33 388 121 988 com OP Gs 33 388 121 988 com 15 58 stu FPL STIVE FLIGHT PLA 28 200 con 5 PL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN e8 208 cone ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAS a ACTIVE FLIGHT PLA Koel ae KMET KEOS id AME ELUS F l F DTE DIS ALT Departure KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO MCT gy iI E pizii 285 15 188 12000FT 205 TET BARRE 1 i24 Enroute TOP MT 323w 120006 p 147 323 11800FT Airam V4 SLM SLN 87 7MH 12000FT SLN 260 S7Lhe 11200FT Airwoy Vz44 L A T Hd T2DOFT HYS 252 Tw 1805800rT LAA l amp 5uH 12000FT ET z251 15a J9
310. lined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum configured range The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen Navigation Map Page e VOR Information Page Inset Map PFD User Waypoint Information Page p Airport Information Page e Trip Planning Page ntersection Information Page Nearest Pages e NDB Information Page Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages o 59 co az VN gt r S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 RevA Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 285 A ADDITIONAL FEATURES GARMIN TP i During ground operations the aircrafts position is displayed in reference to taxiways runways and airport 5 a features In the example shown the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo approaching the High Alert Intersection boundary N e on KSFO airport Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta When panning over the airport features such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor ia cm IS NAV1 108 80 GS gt 118 208 com 25 nav2 113 00 lt gt 115 80 SFO MAP NAVIGATION MAF 127 675 COM2 E F a et
311. llapsed expanded CLOSEST POINT OF FPL Closest Point of FPL calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Closest Point Of FPL and press the ENT Key A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted 3 Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key The G950 displays the bearing BRG and distance DIS to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this location The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 213 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I14 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s i c m S m S3un1V34 39NVGIOAV S3oIaN3ddV 4vwOIILIQGV SAV QuVzvH XIGNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 9 7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION o z NOTE The G950 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA CI FA FM HA HM PI _2 VA VD VI VR and VM Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight pla
312. lways oriented north up with the outer circle representing the horizon the inner circle representing 45 above the horizon and the center point showing the position directly overhead Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo random noise PRN number i e satellite identification number Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak or missing signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites a signal strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view with the appropriate satellite PRN number 01 32 or 120 138 for WAAS below each bar The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages as indicated by signal bar appearance No bar Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite Hollow bar Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data Light blue bar Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used Green bar Satellite is being used for the GPS solution Checkered bar Receiver has excluded the satellite Fault Detection and Exclusion D indication Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations Each satellite has a 30 second data transmission that must be collected signal strength bar is hollow before the satellite may be used for navigation signal strength
313. m P2006T 79 GARMIN PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY 0060 OC GARMIN 113 00 mam I m TOP DIS NM BRG 121 908 con1 15 58 SUE UNE Sd P BA NEAREST AIRPORTS KT OPI MM NETT ILS TOWER 118 700 RNwv 5 99FT KFOE 188 15 6NM ILS TOWER 120 800 RNWY 12802FT KLWC 4 120 21 3Nh ILS UNICOM 123 000 RNWY 57 FT POR 1200 AT 182418 IDENT TMR REF NRST ALERTS 0O Figure 4 1 PFD Controls NAV COM Frequency Tuning Boxes and NRST Window Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS NAV VOL ID Knob Controls NAV audio volume level Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 2 NAV Frequency Transfer Key Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies 3 NAV Knob Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver large knob for MHz small knob for kHz Press to move the tuning box light blue box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2 SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 4 NAV Frequency Box Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields volume and station ID The frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green 5 COM Frequency Box Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume The selected COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green SI3
314. n G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 159 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E NDBs yi az The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding area the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled 7 NDB INFORMATION FREQUENCY and NEAREST AIRPORT E wi oz Selected NDB Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB ue ua 17 80 ToP ss 12 1 r pred E21 43 133 3880 121 900 com eee a RR 128 200 HORTH UP NDB Identifier Type Facility Name Nearest City NDB Information ui Type Zu Region z Lat Long 1 NDB Frequency l Nearest Airport Info LS Identifier Type symbol C ui Bearing Distance to z9 Airport l Z lt o e c E o z Figure 5 38 NDB Information Page O lt NOTE Compass locator LOM LMM a low power low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction with the instrument landing system When LOM is used the locator is at the Outer Marker when LMM is used the locator is at the Middle Marker Selecting an NDB Efa Sc _ EE a a 1 With the NDB Information Page displayed enter an identifier the name of the NDB or the city in which it s located in the NDB Box 2 Press the ENT Key 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
315. n ILS LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode the system switches to NAV Mode as T the final approach course is intercepted within 15 nm of the FAF See the Flight Management Section for details NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation 5 When loading or activating a VOR or ILS LOC approach the approach frequency is automatically transferred to a NAV frequency field as follows If the current CDI navigation source is GPS the approach frequency is transferred to the NAVI or NAV2 active frequency fields The frequency that was previously in the NAVI or NAV2 active frequency fields are transferred to standby LL ae 3s e ax EJ et If the current CDI navigation source is GPS and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAVI or NAV2 standby frequency field the standby frequency is transferred to active e If the current CDI navigation source is NAVI or NAV2 the approach frequency is transferred to the standby frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT APPENDICES INDEX 100 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS MARKER BEACON RECEIVER M3IAH3AO IN31SAS NOTE The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned off The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS T
316. n Window If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process If duplicate entries exist for an identifier a Duplicate Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 151 NE SINJINNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m S3u01V34 JNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Lu WAYPOINT INFORMATION is IDENT FACILITY CITY Sarr Identifier with i ns Duplicates CHICAGO IL SSS SSS DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS OO WAYPOINT a ke NORTH UP TA j an ae eee WILHET T gu E DUPLICATES os Sess Dashes NDB GR LKS USA Duplicate z ES EE o RS n yfai NE L Waypoints N CERD Ep x LIN TE E WA ERACHTER PARK EHT INFORMATION CHICAGO IL TAF e Lu LOCATION c pk GRLKS USA BRG W5 fepe TEn Press ENT to select duplicote or CLR to cancel n 44BNM N 4153 06 DIS 9N gg 27 34 ui Duplicate Message Press ENT For dups ds a Figure 5 30 Waypoint Information Window Duplicate Identifier gt lt AIRPORTS NOTE North Up orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed the pilot needs to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page Map
317. n is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active ACTIVE FLIGH KMKC KO Departure K MCI TIFTO Enroute TOP Airway V4 S SLN Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track Airway V244 HYS LAA PAGE MENU Delete Flight Plan Collapse Airways Remove Departure Remove Arrival Closest Point Of FPL Selecting Parallel Track Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page Airway V263 TBE Figure 5 76 Active Flight Plan Window Selecting Parallel Track Activating parallel track 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Parallel Track and press the ENT Key The Parallel Track Window is displayed with the direction field highlighted 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select Left or Right and press the ENT Key The DISTANCE field is highlighted 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance trom 1 99 nm and press the ENT Key ACTIVATE PARALLEL TRACK is highlighted 5 Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track activation 206 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN Offset Distance RHA COUNTY STATE LAKE TIFTO p 17 88 TOP ss 134 r otk 147 TRK 148 ETE H6 14 s A iE P HAP NEW WPT VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV VNV Be ATK OFST ACT LEG SHW CHRT CHKLIST
318. n nearing a marker during an S approach The LO SENS function annunciator extinguished results in a narrower marker dwell while over a UA station gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 101 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N 4 4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER aS The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A Mode C and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities x Selective addressing or Mode Select Mode S capability includes the following features E cu Level 2 reply data link capability used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities u E e Surveillance identifier capability Flight ID Flight Identification reporting The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID T Altitude reporting Airborne status determination e Transponder capability reporting e Mode S Enhanced Surveillance EHS requirements ua W e Acquisition squitter Acquisition squitter or short squitter is the transponder 24 bit identification address The transmission is sent periodically regardless of the presence of interrogations The purpose of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System TAS to l Lu Qa 2 A lt _ _ amp recognize the presence of Mode S equipped aircraft for selective interrogation Su The Hazard Avoi
319. n the countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a countdown the digits are reset to the initial value If the timer is counting up when reset the digits are zeroed Setting the generic timer 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction UP DN and press the ENT Key 4 Ifa desired starting time is desired a Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH MM SS field b Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key 5 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight START and press the ENT Key to start the timer The field changes to DIOP 6 To stop the timer press the ENT Key with STOP highlighted The field changes to RESET 7 To reset the timer press the ENT Key with RESET highlighted The field changes back to START and the digits are reset 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 39 TERRY V o lt m JJ m s3un1V34 JONVdIOAV 1N3W3DVNVIN SND 8 SINAINNYISNI S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3NVd Olanv sid 1H5IT4 X31GNI A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 1 1 GARMIN The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power up or from the time that the aircraft lifts off the timer can also be reset to ze
320. n to the previous level The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels label changes if messages are issued SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 INSET Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner OFF Removes Inset Map DCLTR 3 Selects desired amount of map detail cycles through declutter levels m DCLTR No Declutter All map features visible DCLTR 1 Declutters land data DCLTR 2 Declutters land and SUA data gt DCLTR 3 Removes everything except for the active flight plan e 2 TRAFFIC Displays traffic information on Inset Map as TRAFFIC No Traffic displayed on Inset Map TRFC 1 Traffic displayed on Inset Map TRFC 2 Traffic Only display shown TOPO Displays topographical data e g coastlines terrain rivers lakes and elevation scale on Inset Map 1N3IN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 TERRAIN Displays terrain information on Inset Map PFD Displays second level softkeys for additional PFD configurations sz DFLTS Resets PFD to default settings including changing units to standard E WIND Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters ay OPTN 1 Displays headwind tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components OPTN 2 Displays wind direction arrow with numeric speed OPTN 3 Displays wind direction arrow with numeric headwind tailwind and cross wind speed components OFF Information not displayed BRG1 Cydes the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1 or GPS waypoint identifier as and GPS derived distance information and ADF frequency z
321. nam P2006T ii A WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES GARMIN CAUTION The GDU 1040 PFD and GDU 1040 MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI REFLECTIVE COATING It is very important to clean the lens using a clean lint free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings 4 CAUTION The Garmin G950 does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot s authority to operate this device under FAA FCC regulations NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document including screen images of the G950 panel and displays are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G950 system Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment A NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation A NOTE Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground Moving the airc
322. name of the User Waypoint or scroll to the desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob 2 Press the ENT Key 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Or 1 With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed press the FMS Knob 2 Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box 3 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 164 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT UE GRAUE a ERIS ERE a ERN ees ERN ee Figure 5 43 Nearest User Waypoint Page o Selected User Waypoint Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint lt T zm AST i TRK ETE 133 300 121 980 com IEEE NRST NEAREST USER PS 128 208 conz NORTH UP i Nearest User Wpt List z i Tm Identifier aon gt Bearing Distance from die aircraft position m cu Dew eee un BEEN A un M Kansas clay User Waypoint Info 2 Comment Qo Lat Long O n gt m Reference Wot Info Identifier Radial Distance L d oco uu ceo sCEONEPREED QE 2 CREATING USER WAYPOINTS User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways gt lt Se B2 gt J Le rm Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page 1 Press the NEW Softkey or press the MENU Key and select Create New User Waypoint x 2 Enter a us
323. nc GPS CDI SYSTEM CDI ERE T m fer NAV ANGLE MAGNETIC M a MILITARY ll SELECTED HAG VAR G E OTHER ADIZ OFF gt sysTeH CDI Ors SPD NAUTICALCNHLET ARRIVAL ALERTI OH CONFIG ALT VS FEETCFT FPH OFF B ONH CHANNEL SPACING CELSIUSCO Em uer n me ESTO apro ALERT NEAREST APT LL FUEL GALLONS GL GL HR yorce FEMALE RNWY SURFACE lt WEIGHT POUMNDSC B Em MIN LENGTH FLIGHT DIRECTOR FORMAT ACTIVE SNGL CUE POSITION HDDOMM HM r BARO TRANSITION ALERT OFF ALTITUDE J1800GF ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 2 26 GPS CDI Settings AUX System Setup Page When set to Auto default the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of flight Figure 2 27 Table 2 1 APPENDICES INDEX 62 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS IN31SAS M3IAH3AO 1 0 nm 2 0 nm 1 0 nm 1 0 nm 0 3 nm Refer to accompanying approach CDI scaling figures CDI Full scale Deflection O 0 3 nm 7a j JJ c m un T Enroute Missed o Departure Terminal Oceanic if gt 200 nm Terminal Approach from nearest airport Approach Figure 2 27 Automatic CDI Scaling go e When a departure procedure is active the CDI is scaled for departure 0 3 nm en n gt The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling 1 0 nm under the followi
324. nd points to the tail of the aircraft just like a conventional To From flag Depending on the navigation source the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two zu Be 3 25 different ways an arrowhead GPS VOR OBS or a diamond LOC L Z9 Course Pointer mr Navigation Flight Phase Source Annunciation T Lateral Course Deviation and ui ud To From Indicator cale Figure 2 17 Arc HSI The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading While the HSI is displayed as an arc if the Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose the digital reading displayed AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 2 Adjusting the Selected Heading E Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading lt x Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading ui The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted While the zz HSI is displayed as an arc the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140 Hs currently shown wz Adjusting the Selected Course Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course a Press the CRS Knob to re center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or navigation station see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course E Current Track Indicator Current Heading
325. nd press the ENT Key 6 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt MAP SETUP GROUP o E lt No Airway Display Selection AIRWAYS Off Al A nh HI Only LOW ALT AIRWAY n Low Altitude Airway Range ir d asii High Altitude Airway Range Figure 5 23 Navigation Map Setup Menu AIRWAYS Setup O lt The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed Selecting an airway range LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY 1 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option 2 Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed 3 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airways group and press the ENT Key ADDITIONAL FEATURES i 4 Highlight the LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY range field 2 5 To change the range setting turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list E 6 Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob 7 Press the ENT Key i 8 Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page 140 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT The following range items are configurable on the airways menu E Airway Type Symbol Default Maximum m Range nm Range nm Low Altitude Airway LOW ALT AIRWAY 200 500 pessime 00 7 SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I14 High Altitude Airway
326. nd the prediction is no longer valid Half standard Turn Rate Arrow Shown Standard for Turn Rate Turn Rate gt 4 deg sec Figure 2 21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector BEARING INFORMATION A NOTE When the Arc HSI is displayed the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV GPS and sources The pointers are light blue and are single BRG1 or double lined BRG2 an icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer type The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability Bearing 2 Bearing 1 Pointer Pointer DME Information Window optional Station Distance to Identifier Bearing Source Distance to Station Bearing Source Identifier 401 4 NM p Pointer Bearing Icon Source NAV Bearing 2 Information Window Bearing Pointer Source Icon Bearing 1 Information Window Figure 2 22 HSI with Bearing and DME Information 58 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS When a bearing pointer is displayed its associated information window is also displayed The Bearing E Information windows Figure 2 22 are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show m Bearing source NAV GPS ADF
327. ndicator VDI gt A 6 Bearing Information Windows 13 Current VNV Target Altitude Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Figure 2 2 Primary Flight Display Additional Information m S ed aS a gt U m A h z s gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 4 A FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GARMIN 2 1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS SYSTEM OVERVIEW AIRSPEED INDICATOR A NOTE Refer to the Pilot s Operating Handbook POH for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values FLIGHT N m T LLJ ce 4 The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape The true airspeed TAS is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots Speed indication starts at 20 knots with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer The pointer remains black until reaching never exceed speed V p at which point it turns red EIS AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Airspeed Actual Trend Airspeed Vector E a Vspeed mms Color coded Reference E Speed Ranges m Figure 2 4 Red Pointer 22 howi d E Showing Overspee o Irue ze ILE Fm Airspeed Figure 2 3 Airspeed Indicator D A color coded red white green yellow and red white barber pol
328. nding ui Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds If after another 6 seconds data is not received traffic is removed from the display The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases The displayed data is not current 6 to 12 seconds since last message The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting 12 to 60 seconds since last message Traffic may exist within the selected display range but it is not displayed Traffic data has failed Traffic has not been detected The traffic service is unavailable or out of range AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page Shown in center of Traffic Map Page Table 6 5 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations HAZARD Ll W lt q S a ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS INDEX 282 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM M3IAH3AO IN31SAS A NOTE Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual AFM for the installed autopilot 7 1 S TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT OPTIONAL SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION A NOTE Only the additional FD mode annunciation that may appear in the G950 AFCS Status Box is discussed d below This mode annunciation is not analogous to both the G9
329. ned geographical positions internal database or pilot entered positions and are used for all phases of flight planning and navigation Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned automatically from various Waypoint Information WPT pages Nearest NRST pages and the Nearest Airports Window on PFD This auto tuning feature simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on auto tuning Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier entering the name of the facility or by entering the city name See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G950 As a waypoint identifier facility name or location is entered the G9505 Spell N Find feature scrolls through the database displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point A direct to navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct to Key on any of the waypoint pages WAYPOINT INFORMATION Identifier Entry Field 5 7 Pra Waypoint Identifier F acility LOGAN CO Type symbol City Entry Field Entry Field VETERE n Name Cit xum nas AH i ERRI 508 j Sp TERS T durum Map Area Showing Entered Waypoint on Entered Waypoint Map LOCATION LOCATION TENSE ae me e Wail Waypoint Location DIS 352H DIS HH Press ENT to occept Press ENT to accept Figure 5 29 Waypoint Informatio
330. nformation are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilots Guide 7a ol JJ c m un The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD a Airspeed Indicator showing Vertical Deviation Glideslope e Timer References Window True airspeed and Glidepath Indicators showing gt _ Airspeed awareness ranges e Vertical Speed Indicator VSI Generic timer 2 M M Horizontal Situation Indicator Vspeed values and flags E showing Barometric minimum descent E Reference flags _ u Heading and course indications altitude MDA or decision e Attitude Indicator with slip skid height DH Turn Rate Indicator x 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5I14 oe E e System time e Altimeter showing ea ec nee NT Course Deviation Indicator Wind data CDI Vertical Navigation indications Barometric settin i Bearing pointers and Selected Altitude information windows Outside Air Temperature OAT JINVGIOAV QuVZvH The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations s3un1V34 TVNOILIQQV SAV S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 45 SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT ue m LL ce 4 ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INDEX FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 46 c OO mv 188 48 118 9
331. ng conditions m The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA CD CF CI CR DE FA FC FD FM IE or TF see Glossary for leg type definitions 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA e At 20 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling changes to 2 0 nm over a distance of 1 0 nm except under the following conditions When navigating with an active departure procedure the flight phase and CDI scale will not change until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint if more than 30 nm from the departure airport or the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct to waypoint is activated JINVGIOAV QuVZvH e f after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft and the approach procedure has not yet commenced the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight 2 0 nm S21V Within 31 nm of the destination airport terminal area the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2 0 nm to 1 0 nm over a distance of 1 0 nm except under the following conditions When navigating with an active arrival route the flight phase and CDI scale will not change until the aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrival route if within 31 nm from the destination airport S34n1V14 1VNOILIQ
332. ng the course data e g GPS VOR and the flight plan phase e g Departure DPRT Terminal TERM Enroute ENR Oceanic OCN Approach LNAV LNAV V L VNAV or or LPV or Missed Approach MAPR S z The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD When the system is in reversionary mode the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner The Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey Pressing the INSET Softkey again then pressing the OFF Softkey removes the Inset Map IDE gt gt c m m The Navigation Map displays aviation data e g airports VORs airways airspaces geographic data e g cities lakes highways borders topographic data map shading indicating elevation and hazard data e g traffic terrain weather The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey The Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways North Up NORTH UP Track Up TRK UP Desired Track Up DTK UP or Heading Up HDG UP JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations The basemap upon which these are placed are from a source with less resolution therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features a is not exact
333. nnunciation see Figure A 3 Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Message advisory voice alerts generated when the message advisory is issued do not repeat CAUTION ADVISORY gt Figure A 3 Softkey Annunciation ALERTS Softkey Labels a e SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATIONS This level of alert provides general information about conditions which are safe for operation S B9 Safe operating annunciation alert text is shown in green in the Annunciation Window no aural tone is SS generated It is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation see Figure A 3 Pressing the F ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the alert gt m J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 295 APPENDIX A GARMI N AIRCRAFT ALERTS o S The following alerts are configured specifically for the the P2006T aircraft See the Pilots Operating Handbook POH for information regarding pilot responses 2 WARNING ALERTS E 5 Rh Low Coolant Repeating Tone Main Door Open Rear Door Open Left engine fire detected AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Right engine fire detected CAUTION ALERTS o Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Message Audio Alert E Single Chime a Pitot Heat Fail SE E SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATIONS Annun
334. ns zS AEA AE Ee e The G950 system Vertical Navigation VNV feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and teminal phases of flight Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct to waypoint is provided It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path which is provided as a linear deviation from the desired path The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified A altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint altitude The vertical waypoints are integrated into the active flight plan Current Vertical Navigation Profile Current Vertical Navigation Profile Disabled fields dashed Enabled valid data 33 300 121 988 com 17 88 roP cs T 33 300 121 908 con 28 200 conz FPL ACTIVI PLAN 8 200 COMZ AUDIO PANEL amp CNS ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KKT 4p L DIK OIS ALT DTK DIS ALT Deporture KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO i 28 y piai 15 1NH 12000FT moute 32 344 12000rT FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt Airway V4 SLN 37 7 12000FT Airway V244L AA m LINA 1200Q0FT 155uM 12000FT Lud Te O UJ Airway V263 TBE ce et et CURRENT VNV PROFILE 1 CURRENT VNV PROFILE gt ACTIVE VNV WPT F n ACTIVE VNV ai a ot HADUK io o FPN FPA VS TGT T gt x FPN TIME TO TOD VS REO Press the FPL key te NH view the previous poge CNCL VNV VNV amp E Pau ENBL VNV Softkey C
335. o creates a descent path and provides guidance to stay on the path from the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct to waypoint Vertical navigation is based on barometric altitudes not on GPS altitude and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight The Direct to Window allows selection and activation of direct to navigation The Direct to Window displays selected direct to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD 17 80 ToP cs DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 900 com 15 50 STJ MAP NAVIGATION MAP 128 200 conz DIRECT TO Lu Sin dE o a 2 lt IDENT FACILITY CITY Direct to Point Info Identifier Symbol Region Facility Name City VNV Constraints Altitude at Arrival Along Track Offset uj Map of Selected Point Ne o HE o ae LOCATION Location of Destination lt Vah HIG DIS Bearing Distance Desired Course 74 COURSE EE 6s EN ACTIVATE Figure 5 48 Direct to Window MFD ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 174 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT D RECT TO Direct to Point Info Identifier SymbollCity a PLACE M UM Ip Facility Name VNV Constant E OFFSET tENH Altitude at Arrival Along Track Offset DIS 23UNH Direct to Point Info Bearing Distance Desired Course ACTIVATE Activation Command Figure 5 49 Direct to Window PFD Any waypoint can be entered
336. o discussed LAND SYMBOLS The following items are configured on the land menu Land Symbols Symbol Default Maximum Text label size can be None Small Medium Med or Large Range nm Range nm Lrg M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I14 Latitude Longitude LAT LON 2000 Highways and Roads gt go Z Ae Interstate Highway FREEWAY as International Highway FREEWAY Local Road LOCAL ROAD L8 US Highway NATIONAL HWY D a 25 State Highway LOCAL HWY 30 Z 5 5 amp o N Railroads RAILROAD 30 Se AM LARGE CITY gt 200 000 MEDIUM CITY gt 50 000 gt MALL CITY gt 5 000 E States and Provinces STATE PROV m s w Ce RES SERWATEONT m fm 8 Table 5 1 Land Symbol Information e B z a 2 gt x 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 133 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N E AVIATION SYMBOLS ir nS The following items are configured on the aviation menu Aviation Symbols Symbol Default Maximum a Text label size can be None Small Medium Med Range nm Range nm H E or Large Lrg Active Flight Plan Leg ACTIVE FPL EN 2000 2000 z Non active Flight Plan Leg ACTIVE FPL 2000 2000 a Active Flight Plan Waypoint ACTIVE FPL WPT See Airports NAVAIDs 2000 2000 Ul Large Airports LARGE APT 60 Iu B 250 Medium Airports MEDIUM APT 150 3 Small Airports SMALL APT Q Q s Taxiways SAFETAXI Runway Extension
337. oach CF rolls to Fix gt APT airport aerodrome CHT nee Head Temperature P ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated El d CHNL channel ARSPC alrspace a2 ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center CHT SE TO Eep gt S ARV arrival ks one 22 CLR clear AS airspeed ASB Aviation Support Branch e Md m gt ASOS Automated Surface Observing System ens ae peal ole 5 ATC Air Traffic Control CO canbenemononds ATCRBS ATC Radel Beso System COM COITPUIIC SERERE ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service CONFIG configuration E RIS Le COOL coolant S AUTOSEQ automatic sequence COPLT co pilot s 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 313 SYSTEM OVERVIEW AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e Lu e e lt INDEX APPENDIX C Course Course to Steer CR CRG CRNT Crosstrack Error CRS CRS CRSR CTA CTRL Cumulative CVR CVRG CWS CYL D ALI DB DBASE dBZ DCLIR DECLIR DEC FUEL deg DEIC DEICE DEP Desired Track DEST DF DELT DGRD The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce course error or stay on course Provides the most efficient heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along the flight plan Course to Radial Cockpit Reference Guide current The distance the aircraft is off a desire
338. of the flight plan was selected i If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg 5 being flown The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to the E z selected leg If the entire flight plan is selected then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight z plan was selected e Enroute safe altitude ESA The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT 5 Destination sunrise and sunset times SUNRISE SUNSET These times are shown as hours minutes a and are the local time at the destination lt ui e 232 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT FUEL STATISTICS The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning inputs Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already been flown M3IAH3AO IN31SAS e Fuel efficiency EFFICIENCY This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current fuel flow SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 e Time of fuel endurance TOTAL ENDUR This time is shown as hours minutes This value is obtained by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow e Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg REM FUEL This value is calculated by taking the amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required
339. oint the G950 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be ic rovided The G950 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited o p p y p t Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD z 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint 3 Press the CLR Key A Remove VNV altitude constraint confirmation window is displayed 4 4 Select OK and press the ENT Key 2 wi Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered E Lu lt 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MED z 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint z 3 Press the CLR Key A Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT confirmation window is ia displayed 4 Select REMOVE and press the ENT Key The manually entered altitude is deleted it is replaced by a system calculated altitude if available 2S 2 218 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value IN31SAS 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint
340. oints are allowed M3IAH3AO IN31SAS A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan so the system limits the along track distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint If the selected waypoint is the active waypoint the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint Assigning an along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted An along track offset is not allowed at or after the final approach fix of an approach SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered If the along track offset distance must be changed the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset m distance 17 8 TOP GS 133 300 121 900 con 15 58 STJ 128 200 CON2 w as Vn D gt TIFTO Enroute TOP Airway V4 SLN SLN 10NH 258231 Along Track Offset AZ SLN J Waypoint and Distance iE Airway V244LAA from Flight Plan Waypoint m HYS 62 NERE Along Track _ se Offset Waypoint and Distance lt SE S gt gt N o rm Press the FPL key to 2 view the previous page 4 L MAP NEW WPT VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV YNV B ATK FST ACT LEG SHW CHRT Figure 5 75 Along Track Offset gt mO We Entering an along track offset distance zo n gt 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Fligh
341. om of the unit indicate which function the knob is controlling Pressing the PILOT PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished Automatic Squelch is on the PILOT PASS Knob controls only the volume pressing the PILOT PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL SQ selection When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated Manual Squelch the PILOT PASS Knob controls either volume or squelch selected by pressing the PILOT PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ annunciation Manual Squelch Annunciator Off for Automatic Squelch On for Manual Squelch Automatic Manual Squelch Pilot Volume or Manual Squelch Press to switch between VOL and SQ Turn to adjust Squelch when SQ Annunciation is lit Volume when VOL Annunciation Is lit Volume Annunciation b d bh d MAN SQ PLAY b iiv wv PILOT COPLT ICS ISOLATION PILOT O PASS Copilot Passenger Volume or Manual Squelch Squelch Annunciation Figure 4 42 Volume Squelch Control 110 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS o PASSENGER ADDRESS PA SYSTEM up zm A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker When the PA Key is pressed on the Audio Panel the COM
342. onal features or making A S setting changes PROC Key Gives access to IFR departure procedures DPs arrival procedures STARs and approach procedures IAPs for a flight plan or selected airport z 15 ENT Key Validates confirms menu selection or data entry FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor ON OFF Flight Management Data Entry With cursor ON turn to enter data in the highlighted field large zS System Knob knob moves cursor location small knob selects character for highlighted cursor E location aS Scrolling When a list of information is too long for the window box a scroll bar z appears indicating more items to view With cursor ON turn large knob to scroll through the list E Page Selection Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view large knob selects a z page group small knob selects a specific page from the group UA 17 Softkey Selection Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD MFD display Keys ALT Knob Sets the Selected Altitude shown above the Altimeter the large knob selects the thousands the small knob selects the hundreds 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 19 A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 GARMIN The NAV CRS BARO COM FMS and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs each having small inner and large outer control portion When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text either may be used SYSTEM 2 ce Lu gt e Large
343. onal purposes only All database information depicted should be considered not current The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure various Victor Airways and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12 000 feet an 7 LPV WAAS approach selected for runway 35R and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point MAP A few enroute changes are demonstrated 1 Prior to departure the TIFTO2 departure the airways and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded See the 2 Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5 102 indicating the AS active departure leg a E After takeoff ATC assigns a heading of 240 2 Figure 5 102 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240 TERM Terminal is the current CDI flight phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1 0 nm CDI scaling IDE DTK TRK 133 380 121 988 com FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 COH2 s gt G m m ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS DTK DIS ajo Departure KMKC ALL TIFTOZ TIFTO MCI TIFTO Enroute SLN Airwoy V244 L AA nts LAA JINVGIOAV QuVZvH S21V Airvay V263 TBE TBE 210 Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL CURRENT VNV PROFILE ACTIVE VNV WPT FT a Tr vs TGT S34n1V33 1VNOILIQQV Press the FPL kev to view the previous puse CNCL VNV Figure 5 102
344. one with the transfer arrow In the example shown pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver LL T 2 e ax EJ et TA COM1 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT 121 588 118 48H conz Press for Two Seconds to Load 121 500 MHz Figure 4 7 Quickly Tuning 121 500 MHz ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 86 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS AUTO TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following Nearest Airports Window PFD NRST Nearest Frequencies Page ARTCC FSS e WPT Airport Information Page WX e NRST Nearest Airports Page e NRST Nearest Airspaces Page AUTO TUNING FROM THE PFD COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on the PFD When the desired frequency is entered it becomes a standby frequency Pressing the Frequency Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field Auto tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD 1 Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed 2 Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency 3 Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box 4 Press the Frequency T
345. onfiguration settings do not match backup configuration GIA2 CONFIG GIA2 config error memory The G950 system should be serviced _ gt Config service req d S GIA1 CONFIG GIA1 audio config zo error Contig service req d The GIA1 and or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration The G950 system cz GIA2 CONFIG GIA2 audio config should be serviced error Contig service req d GIA1 COOLING GIA1 temperature too low The GIA1 and or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly Allow units to SIDIGNAddV GIA2 COOLING GIA2 temperature warm up to operating temperature too low GIA1 COOLING GIA1 over temperature The GIA1 and or GIA2 temperature is too high If problem persists the G950 system GIA2 COOLING GIA2 over should be serviced temperature 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 301 APPENDIX A GARMI N zz aS nS GIA1 SERVICE GIA1 needs service Return the unit for repair The GIA1 and or GIA2 self test has detected a problem in the unit The G950 system a GIA2 SERVICE GIA2 needs service should be serviced cu Return the unit for repair Z2 HW MISMATCH GIA hardware H mismatch GIA1 communication et A GIA mismatch has been detected where only one is WAAS capable HW MISMATCH GIA hardware 7 mismatch GIA2 communication halted MANIFEST GIA1 software mismatch communication halted The GIA1 and or GIA 2 has incorrect software ins
346. onfirmation window is displayed a 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated the stored flight plan is not changed AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 3 Press the ACTIVE Softkey or press the ENT Key twice or press the MENU Key highlight Activate Flight Plan FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt a and press the ENT Key The Activate Stored Flight Plan window is displayed SE 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and zS press the ENT Key Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD V 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 3 Press the INVERT Softkey or pres
347. ore which to add the new waypoint The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the highlighted waypoint APPENDICES 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Turning it clockwise displays a blank Waypoint Information Window turning it counter dockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan nearest recent user or airway waypoints INDEX 5 Enter the identifier facility or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint trom the submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered 188 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan IN31SAS 1 Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint 2 Press the LD WPT Softkey or press the MENU Key select Load Waypoint and press the ENT Key The user waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx using the next available in sequence and is added to the end of the active flight plan ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan Choose a flight plan add the desired M3IAH3AO SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 airway entry point if not already in the flight plan select the w
348. orm Both the FAA Advisory Circular Subject Thunderstorms and the Aeronautical Information Manual AIM recommend avoiding by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense radar echo WARNING Lamp s inside this product may contain mercury HG and must be recycled or disposed of according to local state or federal laws For more information refer to our website at www garmin com aboutGarmin environment disposal jsp WARNING Because of variation in the earth s magnetic field operating the G950 within the following areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications North of 72 North latitude at all longitudes South of 70 South latitude at all longitudes North of 65 North latitude between longitude 75 W and 120 W Northern Canada North of 70 North latitude between longitude 70 W and 128 W Northern Canada North of 70 North latitude between longitude 85 E and 114 E Northern Russia South of 55 South latitude between longitude 120 E and 165 E Region south of Australia and New Zealand EN WARNING Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a NON WGS84 WPT by a system message NON WGS84 WPT waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS known as WGS84 and may be positioned in error as displayed 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tec
349. ot part 25 of the published procedure It is simply a Course to Altitude CA leg which guides the aircraft along the runway x centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded This altitude is provided by Jeppesen and may be below equal to or above the published minimums for this approach In this case if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude 6 368 feet after crossing the MAP a direct to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6 368 feet is reached After reaching t 6 368 feet a direct to is established to the published MAHP in this case MOGAL If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP a direct to is established to the published fix MOGAL to begin the missed approach procedure In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure For example a procedure may dictate a climb to 5 500 feet then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold Point MAHP In this case the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as 5500ft Again if the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude a direct to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the missed approach procedure is activated ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 264 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN 25 Upon reaching t
350. ower usage The PFD and or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming E MFD1 COOLING MFD1 has poor the display If problem persists the G950 system should be serviced ne cooling Reducing power usage PFD1 KEYSTK PFD1 keyname Key is Stuck A key is stuck on the PFD and or MFD bezel Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing MFD1 KEYSTK MFD keyname Key it several times The G950 system should be serviced if the problem persists is stuck CNFG MODULE PFD1 configuration The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed The G950 system should module is inoperative be serviced did Voan L ON The PFD1 voltage is low The G950 system should be serviced voltage Reducing power usage ia deals MFD1 has low The MFD voltage is low The G950 system should be serviced voltage Reducing power usage 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 299 gt m J m A m N XIGNI APPENDIX A GARMI N dE DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES ae MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 aviation v database error exists The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database Attempt to reload E PFD1 DB ERR PFD aviation the aviation database If problem persists the G950 system should be serviced I database error exists 2 MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 basemap ae The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 basemap 5 database error exi
351. ows displayed in the lower Decision Height readout o v z Outside air temperature OAT right corner of the PFD ee Glideslope DME Information Window Timer Reterences Mme p Nearest Airports e Altimeter Barometric Setting zu Selected Altitude 25 Selected Heading readout Flight Plan ae ae E E arget Altitude Qu Selected Course readout AE APPENDICES INDEX 76 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM M3IA83A0 IN31SAS NOTE The G950 Engine Indication System EIS is not available in the Tecnam P2006T Refer to the Pilot s Operating Handbook POH for engine display information and operating limitations 4 1 eL G un j4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IAN39VNVIN SND 8 QuVZVvH 1H5I14 TANVWd Olanv S 34n1V31 1VNOILIQQV S32IaN3ddV X31QNI 190 01146 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 11 amp GARMIN ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv BLANK PAGE 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S34n1V13 1VNOILIQQV SAIDIGNAddV X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 18 GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 4 1 OVERVIEW The Communication Navigation Surveillance CNS system incl
352. pace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF Changing the altitude buffer distance setting 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5DI14 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box 4 Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key ARRIVAL ALERTS The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the Alerts Window arrival alerts to be turned ON OFE and the alert trigger distance up to 99 9 units set for alerts in the Alerts Window and the PFD JINVGIOAV QuVZvH gt Navigation Status Box An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a user A specified distance from the final destination the direct to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan When Arrival Alerts is set to ON and the set distance is reached an Arrival at waypoint message is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box and a WPT ARRIVAL Arriving at waypoint xxxx is displayed in the nS Alerts Window When Arrival Alerts is set to OFF only the PFD Navigation Status Box message Arriving E at waypoint is displayed and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten ne seconds r S 2 i run Mee e ae i e U 2 i s Figure 1 33 Arrival Alert Settings System Setup Page zi 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilo
353. peed Garmin Transponder Hold Terminating at Altitude heading The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro Hold Terminating at Fix Horizontal Figure of Merit mercury high High Sensitivity Hold with Manual Termination A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft s horizontal position hectopascal Horizontal Protection Level hour High Speed Data Bus Horizontal Situation Indicator heat Horizontal Uncertainty Level Hertz Inner Marker Initial Approach Fix Indicated Air Temperature Integrated Avionics Unit International Civil Aviation Organization Intercom System Identification Morse Code Identifier identification Initial Fix Instrument Flight Rules Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T INACTV INC FUEL IND Indicated INFO in HG INT INTEG IrDA IRDA KEYSTK kg kHz km kt LAT LBL Ib LCD LCL LED Left Over Fuel On Board Left Over Fuel Reserve Leg LIFR A GARMIN Imperial gallon Instrument Landing System Instrument Meteorological Conditions inch inactive increase fuel indicated Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation on the aircraft panel information inches of mercury intersection s integrity RAIM unavailable Infrared Data Association key stuck Kilogram kilohertz kilometer knot left left runway latitude label pound Li
354. peed Indication RVSI Figure 2 14 for reaching a VNV Target Altitude once the TOD Top of Descent within 1 minute alert has been generated Refer to Section 2 2 Supplemental Flight Data for more information about VNV indications on the PFD VERTICAL DEVIATION EIS NOTE The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when WAAS is available The Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI Figure 2 13 is a magenta chevron indicating the baro VNV vertical deviation when Vertical Navigation VNV is being used The VDI appears in conjunction with the TOD within AUDIO PANEL amp CNS E l minute alert The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid See the Flight cz Management Section for details on VNV features and refer to Section 2 2 Supplemental Flight Data for more E information about VNV indications on the PFD The Glideslope Indicator Figure 2 14 appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator like a glideslope needle on a a conventional indicator If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope NO GS is displayed in a place of the diamond E E The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance LNAV V L VNAV LPV When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the
355. pilot can change settings keeping in mind the notes above 114 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS 4 7 ABNORMAL OPERATION Abnormal operation of the G950 includes equipment failures of the G950 components and failure of associated equipment including switches and external devices STUCK MICROPHONE If the push to talk PTT Key becomes stuck the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of continuous operation An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone The COMI MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck COMT PTTESEEE LETS rn 1 key is stuck Figure 4 47 Stuck Microphone Alert COM TUNING FAILURE In case of a COM system tuning failure the emergency frequency 121 500 MHz is automatically tuned in the radio in which the tuning failure occurred Depending on the failure mode a red X may appear on the frequency display I Emergency Channel ERU oaded Automatically COM 135 100 e 118 4080 conz 135 100 118 488 conz2 Figure 4 48 COM Tuning Failure AUDIO PANEL FAIL SAFE OPERATION If there is a failure of the Audio Panel a fail safe circuit connects the pilots headset and microphone directly to the COMI transceiver Audio will not be available on the speaker PFD FAILURE REVERSIONARY MODE The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode See the System O
356. ppendix A advising that E one or more stored flight plans need to be edited ne Whenever an approach departure or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan a set of approach departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument E procedure the pilot selected The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active unless an instrument x procedure is activated when the procedure is loaded S When the database is updated the airways need to be reloaded also Each airway segment is reloaded from a the database given the entry waypoint the airway identifier and the exit waypoint This reloads the sequence of waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints the sequence may change when the database is updated The update of an airway can fail during this process If that happens the airway waypoints are changed to regular 2X non airway flight plan waypoints and an alert is displayed see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 181 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N m z The following could cause the airway update to fail F e Airway identifier entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database e Airway entry exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway either the waypoint is no longer on e the airway or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being
357. pproach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in S maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach This guidance is displayed on the G950 PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond In all cases where LNAV V is indicated by the system during an approach LNAV minima are used The active approach type z is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table mf z LNAV V GPS approach using published LNAV minima Tag Advisory vertical guidance is provided We Approach Type LNAV L VNAV GPS approach using published LNAV VNAV ini LNAV V minima AN GPS approach using published LPV minima LPV Table 5 9 Approach Types AUDIO PANEL amp CNS LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key 1 Press the PROC Key The Procedures Window is displayed 2 Highlight SELECT APPROACH and press the ENT Key The Approach Loading Page is displayed 3 Usethe FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt E 4 Select an approach trom the list and press the ENT Key 5 Select a transition if required and press the ENT Key 6 Minimums A a To set MINIMUMS turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO and press the ENT Key Turn the small FMS z Knob to select the altitude and press the ENT Key Or b To skip setting min
358. quid Crystal Display local Light Emitting Diode The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or direct to The amount of flight time remaining based on the amount of fuel on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or direct to and a known consumption rate The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints Low Instrument Flight Rules 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN LNAV LO LOC LOI LON LPV LRU LT LING LVL M m MAG MAG VAR MAHP MAN IN MAN SQ MAP MASQ MAX MAXSPD MDA MET METAR MEPT MFD MGRS MHz MIC MIN Minimum Safe Altitude MKR MOA MOV mpm 190 01146 00 Rev A Lateral Navigation low localizer loss of integrity GPS longitude Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance Line Replacement Unit left lightning level Middle Marker meter Magnetic Magnetic Variation Missed Approach Hold Point manifold pressure inches Hg Manual Squelch Missed Approach Point Master Avionics Squelch maximum maximum speed overspeed barometric minimum descent altitude manual electric trim Meteorological Aviation Routine manual electric pitch trim Multi Function Display Military Grid Reference System megahertz microphone minimum Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the aircraft present position marker beacon Military Operations Area movement meters per minute
359. r Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt 3 Press the CLR Key The Remove airway name gt window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key 25 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor j Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted 3 Press the CLR Key The Remove procedure name gt trom flight plan window is displayed i 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and EE press the ENT Key qu 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Or 5 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD a 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to
360. r VSI 54 Transponder Mode Selection 103 Vertical Deviation suu 54 Entering a Transponder Code 105 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 55 IDENT glo su 9 Pitt M taentaneteaee 106 Course Deviation Indicator CDI 60 Pignt ID RODORIDIO s csseceit bn e bti 107 2 Supplemental Flight Data 67 4 45 Additional Audio Panel Functions 108 Outside Air Temperature eee 67 POWE U M E N 108 Wind Data e eee 68 Mono Stereo Headsets eeeeeee 108 Vertical Navigation VNV Indications 69 Jr m 108 2 3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions 70 jj ten EE 109 System Alerting 70 Passenger Address PA System 111 Marker Beacon Annuncia ONS cc 71 Clearance Recorder and Player 111 Traffic Annunciation 11 Split COM Operation ee 112 Altitude Alerting e 2n Entertainment Inputs eene 113 Low Altitude Annunciation sss 72 4 6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure 114 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting 73 yi Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN 4 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 9 5
361. r Waypoint Information Page za os as eu lt x 5 E lt 2S 2 168 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT DELETING USER WAYPOINTS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Deleting a single user waypoint 1 Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field 2 Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key Yes is highlighted in the confirmation window 3 Press the ENT Key 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor Or SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 1 Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field T 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Select Delete User Waypoint 4 Press the ENT Key twice to contirm the selection es 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor E A NOTE The option to Delete All User Waypoints is not available while the aircraft is in flight IDE Deleting all user waypoints gt gt c m m 1 Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Select Delete All User Waypoints JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH 4 Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor S34n1V313 S32IaN3ddV TVNOILIGGV S21V XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 169 GARMIN 5 4 AIRSPACES The G950 can display the follo
362. r measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with it via an RS 485 digital interface S34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV eu m S329IlaN3ddV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0000000000000 GARMIN SYSTEM GDU 1040 GMA 1347 GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display Audio Panel Multi Function Display 2 ce TT gt L FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Reversionary Control J GDC 74A J Reversionary Control EIS Air Data Computer No 1 GIA 63W OAT No 2 GIA 63W ui Integrated Avionics Unit aod Integrated Avionics Unit ntegrated Avionics Unl Altitude ntegrated Avionics UNI Vertical Speed W System Inegration Processors C7m System Integration Processors o a oo I O Processors I O Processors VHF COM VHF COM VHF a GRS 77 VHF E Glideslope AHRS Glideslope Attitude Lu GPS Output Rate of Turn GPS Output E Slip Skid UG zs E GMU 44 Magnetometer Heading o e ea Kao gt TS t ua W LL t Figure 1 1 Basic G950 Block Diagram ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 4 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL SYSTEM OVERVIEW o lt m JJ rm METRIA SINIWNYLSNI 1H5I13 m ua No 1 GIA 63W No 2 GIA 63W Integrated
363. raffic Control Center Frequency Frequencies of ARTCC nearest to present position visible when nearest frequency detected Frequency of Weather Station nearest to present position visible when nearest weather station is detected DESTINATION AIRPORT BOX The Destination Airport Box is displayed in automatic and destination mode The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if No arrival or approach is loaded or An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded or The active leg is past the MAP The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure s in the active flight plan if An arrival and or approach is loaded and neither are active The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded or The approach is active The destination airport is the Direct to waypoint if The Direct to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport If none of these conditions are met then the destination airport is undefined and a single label is displayed in the box reading NO DESTINATION AIRPORT When a destination airport has been determined the fields shown in Figure 5 34 are displayed in the Destination Airport Box 148 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00
364. raft more than 100 yards away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition A NOTE Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank NOTE This product its packaging and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like additional information please refer to our Web site at www garmin com prop65 IV Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N REVISION INFORMATION Record of Revisions Part Number Revision Date Page Range 190 01146 00 2 10 10 ce ms release for 9 15 software 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T V TABLE OF CONTENTS _ GARMI N SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2 4 Abnormal Operations 15 1 1 Line Replaceable Units 2 Abnormal GPS Conditions eee 9 1 2 Secure Digital SD Cards 6 Unusual Attitudes nnnn 10 1 3 System Power up ssssee SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM 14 System Operation 9 SECTIONA AUDIO PANELAND CNS Display Operation e a 8 41 Overview LLL LLL 79 bate IMEI MO Sce rooted i PFD Controls and Frequency Display 80 Spem ats adu M 5 0
365. ransfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field MELIE TIFTO TOP ois 4 7nn prc 147 e 121 988 com navz 113 25 115 50 st 1288880 118 200 conz 12200 12100 xd i xD INNEN iaat I celect the NRST PNT L DE POR ENT TURE es ALERTS Softkey to Open the Nearest Figure 4 8 Nearest Airports Window Airports Window 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 87 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 Qo A a U S3u01V34 JNVGIOAY 1NIWI YNYWN S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3NVd Olan X31GNI AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E AUTO TUNING FROM THE MFD nz Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key Figures 4 10 4 11 and 4 12 Auto tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages 1 From any page that the COM frequency can be auto tuned activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or 2 selecting the appropriate softkey 2 Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency Figure 4 11 s 3 Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio 4 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field Press the ENT Key to TE CLR ENT Load a Highlighted Za Frequency into oS STRE FMS
366. ration incomplete or altitude input from the air data configuration module failure computer AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 5 Display system is not receiving Ee GPS information is either valid true airspeed information E not present or is invalid for from air data computer navigation use Note that Display system is not receiving AHRS utilizes GPS inputs valid OAT information from air ui during normal operation data computer 22 AHRS operation may b lt x operation may be Display system is not receiving is degraded if GPS signals are not Xo 9 g valid transponder information lt INI BSEC A red X through any other isplay fiel h as engin Other Various Red X disp AA suc ne Me o Display system is not receivin Indications Maa rd TAY J indicates that the field is not lt airspeed input from air data receiving valid data computer ADDITIONAL FEATURES Table A 2 G950 System Annunciations N Lu c T Lu a a lt x INDEX 298 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL BPENDIXA G950 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES This section describes various G950 system message advisories Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an LRU function failure Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red X annunciation as shown previously in the G950 System Annunciation section M3IAH3AO IN31SAS NOTE This Section provides information regarding G950 message adviso
367. re not appropriately surfaced from being displayed Default settings are O feet or meters for runway length and HARD SOFT for runway surface type Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria go Z 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page 2 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor E 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option ANY HARD ONLY HARD SOFT WATER 5 Press the ENT Key 6 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor IDE s i c m m Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box P 4 Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length zero to 25 000 feet and press the ENT Key e 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor nO B So mz e r GPS CDI SELECTED 9 SYSTEM CDI U m COM CONFIG e CHANNEL SPACING 25 0 kHz cL ua Ru EMI caret Airport Criteria RNWY SURFACE HARD SOFT _ Type of Runway Surface MIN LENGTH OFT Minimum Runway Length z J m X Figure 5 35 System Setup Page Nearest Airport Selection Criteria 190 01146 00 Rev A
368. red flight plan that contains nS locked flight plan locked waypoint Remove locked waypoint trom flight plan Update flight plan with current waypoint as i ngs Way Pela Arriving at waypoint xxxx where xxxx is the waypoint name STEEP TURN Steep turn ahead A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead Prepare to turn INSIDE ARSPC Inside airspace The aircraft is inside the airspace gt m J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 305 APPENDIX A GARMI N Ez nS ARSPC AHEAD Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within than 10 minutes 10 minutes phe MEAR EE Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position F ahead 25 Ai u E PROFONDA UIS USNOMIGdU Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position z than 2 nm APPR INACTV Approach is not The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active Activate active approach when required n SLCT FREQ Select appropriate The system notities the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV frequency for approach receiver Select the correct trequency for the approach SLCT NAV Select NAV on CDI for The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver Set the CDI to approach the correct NAV receiver PTK FAIL Parallel track unavailable Bad p
369. remove the flashing cursor a 2 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 229 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi MISSED APPROACH MI Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan x 1 Press the PROC Key cu 2 Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH e 3 Press the ENT Key The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP Or Press the Go Around Button a COURSE TO ALTITUDE In this missed approach procedure the altitude immediately following the MAP in this case 6368ft is not part of the published procedure It is simply a Course to Altitude CA leg which guides the aircraft along the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded This altitude is provided by Jeppesen and may be below equal to or above the published minimums for this approach In this case if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude 6 368 feet after crossing the MAP a direct to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6 368 feet is reached After reaching 6 368 feet a direct to is established to the published MAHP in this case MOGAL If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP a direct to is established to the published fix MOGAL to begin the missed approach procedure AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt In some missed
370. res however if the departure and arrival airport are already 7 loaded the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport saving some time selecting the correct airport on the Procedure Loading Page Whenever an approach is selected the choice to either load or activate 7 is given Loading adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed Activating also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in z the approach gs DEPARTURES lt x A Departure Procedure DP is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan Only one departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight plan the new departure replaces the previous departure The route is defined by selection of a departure the transition waypoints and a runway LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key NA ze 1 Press the PROC Key The Procedures Window is displayed 2 Highlight SELECT DEPARTURE 3 Press the ENT Key The
371. resolved lt K 5000 JUU a Altimeter za Sc Figure 2 39 Low Altitude on RNAV GPS Approach with Vertical Guidance zs Ow lt 5 A s lt ui A 72 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN LLL FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING For altitude awareness a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude MDA or Decision Height DH can be set in the Timer References Window and is reset when the power is cycled When active the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter once the altitude is within the range of the tape M3IAH3AO IN31SAS The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA DH e When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA DH setting the BARO MIN box appears with the altitude in light blue text The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range 7a ol JJ c m un When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA DH the bug and text turn white a Once the aircraft reaches the MDA DH the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert Minimums Minimums is generated Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting 2 for the alert If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA DH onc
372. ries that may be displayed by the system Knowledge of the aircraft systems flight conditions and other existing operational priorities must be considered when responding to a message Always use sound pilot judgment The Pilots Operating Handbook POH takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 MFD amp PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES i DATA LOST Pilot stored data was The pilot profile data was lost System reverts to default pilot profile and settings The pilot may recontigure the MFD amp PFD with preferred settings it desired z S crosstalk error has occurred be serviced mm PFD1 SERVICE PFD1 needs service Return unit for repair The PFD and or MFD self test has detected a problem The G950 system should be MFD1 SERVICE MFD1 needs serviced service Return unit for repair MANIFEST PFD1 software mismatch Communication halted The PFD and or MFD has incorrect software installed The G950 system should be MANIFEST MFD1 software serviced mismatch Communication halted PFD1 CONFIG PFD1 configuration The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory The G950 error Contig service req d system should be serviced 1N3A35VNVIN 1H5I14 JINVGIOAV QUuVZVH error Contig service req d 3950 system should be serviced e version mismatch Xtalk is off be serviced PFD1 COOLING PFD1 has poor nO cooling Reducing p
373. right side of each PFD Manually tuning a COM frequency 1N3IA35VNVIA 1H5DI14 1 Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box large knob for MHz small knob for kHz 2 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field 3 Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL SQ Knob 4 Press the COM VOL SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Turn the VOL SQ Knob to adjust ey cl s pu Press the Frequency Transfer 5 un Automatic Squelch On or O Key to Transfer COM Frequencies Between Active and Standby Frequency Boxes gt Turn the COM Knob to nS ue the Frequency in c e the Tuning Box zd 128 400 com nS 12 1 688 COM2 n s 2 Figure 4 5 COM Frequency Tuning d S A U z X 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 85 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N E SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED o az Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the upper and lower radio frequency fields 135 100 oz dim E x Press the COM Knob to Switch the Tuning Box From One COM Radio to the Other Figure 4 6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes UICK TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121 500 MHZ Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency COM frequency 121 500 MHz in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning the
374. rily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box i 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the i profile list and nighignt the desired profile EE 5 Press the ENT Key The G950 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile F Renaming a profile ic 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 2 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight RENAME in the Pilot Profile Box 4 Press the ENT Key 5 In the Rename Profile window turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename 32 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW 6 Press the ENT Key 7 Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key 8 With RENAME highlighted press the ENT Key 9 To cancel the process use the large FMS Knob to select CANCEL and press the ENT Key Deleting a profile 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight DELETE in the Pilot Profile Box 4 Press the ENT Key 5 In the Delete Profile window turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete 6 Press the ENT Key 7 With DELETE highlighted press the ENT Key 8 To cancel the process u
375. ro at any time SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le Setting the flight timer starting criterion 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page E 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor E 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion PWR ON or IN AIR and press the ENT Key vs Resetting the flight timer 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page 2 Press the MENU Key 3 With Reset Flight Timer highlighted press the ENT Key The G950 records the time at which departure occurs measured from system power up or aircraft lift off The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page AUDIO PANEL amp CNS T Setting the departure timer starting criterion E 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor ad 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time i2 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion PWR ON or IN AIR and press the ENT Key lt Resetting the departure time 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page 2 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Use the FMS Knob to highlight Reset Departure Time and press the ENT Key da TRIP ST
376. rom the Approach Loading Page press the MENU Key The page menu is displayed with Load amp Activate Approach highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course the message NOT APPROVED FOR GPS is displayed GPS provides guidance to the approach but the HS must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN When plans change while flying IFR approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan IDE gt gt c m m JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH Removing an approach from the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD 2 Press the MENU Key and highlight Remove Approach a 3 Press the ENT Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key E Or gt 9 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD E 2 Press the FMS Knob and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan 3 Press the CLR Key A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the removal highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key S 5 Press the FMS Knob to
377. rom the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database Or update the waypoint name identifier to reflect the new information z FPL WPT MOVE Flight plan The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new Zn waypoint moved aviation database update Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint ao locations m TIMER EXPIRD Timer has expired The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired DB CHANGE Database changed This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent gt Verity user moditied procedures with the aviation database This alert is issued only after an aviation database SES update Verify that the user modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and E up to date m DB CHANGE Database changed This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent Verify stored airways with the aviation database This alert is issued only after an aviation database update Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed x FPL TRUNC Flight plan has been This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete approach truncated or arrival used by a stored flight plan The obsolete procedure is removed from the flight plan Update flight plan with current arrival or approach z LOCKED FPL Cannot navigate This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a sto
378. s aN WARNING The altitude calculated by G950 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters such as the GDC 74A Air Data Computer or other altimeters in aircraft GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation Always use pressure altitude displayed by the G950 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft WARNING Do not use outdated database information Databases used in the G950 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current Pilots using any outdated database do so entirely at their own risk WARNING Do not use basemap land and water data information for primary navigation Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to enhance situational awareness WARNING Traffic information shown on the G950 Multi Function Display is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic WARNING The Garmin G950 has a very high degree of functional integrity However the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and or self test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical Although unlikely it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the G950
379. s small knob for 100 ft E increments increments reduce to 10 feet for approach If set to Metric mode the large knob adjusts the Selected as Altitude in 500 meter increments the small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50 meter increments If set the Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height MDA DH value is also available for the Selected Altitude Selected 1200HT Altitude Altitude 1N3IAN359VNVIA 1H5DI14 JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Indicated Altitude Indicated Meters Altitude Altitude Trend Vector S21V Selected Altitude Bug 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Bu g J Barometric Setting Hectopascals Barometric Figure 2 9 Altimeter Figure 2 10 Altimeter Metric Units s3univ3J S3oIQN3ddV WWNOILIGGV X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 51 SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT un m c LLJ ce N ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS APPENDICES INDEX FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N Selected and current altitudes can also be displayed in meters readouts displayed above the normal readouts in feet Figure 2 10 Note that the altitude tape does not change scale Displaying altitude in meters 1 Select the PFD Softkey to display the second level softkeys 2 Select the ALT UNIT Softkey 3 Select the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts 4 Select th
380. s are detected m gt COM Frequency frequency of airport primary communication channel Visible when destination mode active or nearest airport is same as destination airport 3 Nearest Weather Station frequency of weather station nearest to destination airport Visible when destination m mode active or nearest airport is same as destination airport zZ Longest Runways identifier and size of the longest or the two longest runways Identifier and size of the longest or Q the two longest runways One Always visible Two visible when destination mode active or nearest airport is same e as destination airport z J m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 149 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N TIME BOX The Time Box is always visible SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS ETA 22 34LCL FLT 05 00 32 Figure 5 35 Time Box EIS Estimated Time Enroute visible when destination Is set Estimated Time of Arrival sum of the present time and ETE visible when destination is set OO d Time total time since takeoff FLT if in air timer is selected on AUX Utility Page otherwise PWR Always visible AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX 150 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN etic MANAGEMENT 5 3 WAYPOINTS Waypoints are predetermi
381. s from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly when all of the following occur PFD IBS CDI Softkey Cycles Through Navigation Sources INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5I13 Figure 2 25 Selecting a Navigation Source JINVGIOAV QuVZvH A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan The final approach fix FAF is the active leg the FAF is less than 15 nm away and the aircraft is moving toward the FAF z e A valid localizer frequency has been tuned n e The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1 2 times full scale deflection gt GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture up nS to the Final Approach Fix FAF for an ILS approach or until GPS information becomes invalid Activating a Vector to Final VTF see the Flight Management Section also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation as source GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch gt Y 2 A UA 2 i x 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 61 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ GARMI N GPS CDI SCALING When GPS is the selected navigation source the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow If the current leg in the flight plan is a heading leg HDG LE
382. s stuck G S1 FAIL G S1 is inoperative A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and or receiver 2 The G950 G S2 FAIL G S2 is inoperative system should be serviced G S1 SERVICE G S1 needs service Return unit for repair A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and or receiver 2 The receiver G S2 SERVICE G S2 needs service may still be available The G950 system should be serviced when possible Return unit for repair I1N3A35VNVIN 1H5I14 JINVGIOAV QuVZVH gt A GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES Comments 2 XPDR1 CONFIG XPDR1 config error The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration ai Config service req d memory The G950 system should be serviced SE MANIFEST GTX1 software The transponder has incorrect software installed The G950 system should be ur mismatch communication halted serviced XPDR1 SRVC XPDR1 needs service Return unit for repair XPDR1 FAIL XPDR1 is inoperative There is no communication with the 1 transponder The 1 transponder should be serviced when possible gt m J m A m N XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 303 APPENDIX A GARMI N a GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES AHRS1 TAS AHRS1 not receiving The 1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer The AHRS airspeed relies on GPS information to augment the lac
383. s the MENU Key highlight Invert amp Activate FPL and press the ENT Key du The Invert and activate stored flight plan window is displayed 5 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and eu press the ENT Key lt x COPY A FLIGHT PLAN z The G950 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot allowing editing etc without ia affecting the original flight plan This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a a modified version of the original stored flight plan Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD z 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan 200 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT 3 Press the COPY Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Copy Flight Plan and press the ENT Key The Copy to Flight Plan XX window is displayed 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan To cancel the request press the CLR Key or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G950 memory M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Deleting a stored flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn th
384. s with the FMS Knob 5 Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio 6 Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 PAGE MENU SI3 PAGE MENU PAGE MENU PAGE MENU ARTIC Wii OPTIONS go Le un TANVWd OIGNV Press the FMS CRSR knob to Press the FMS CRSR knob to Press the FMS CRSR knob to Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page return to base page return to base page return to base page Nearest Airports Menu Nearest VOR Menu Nearest Frequencies Menu Nearest Airspaces Menu Figure 4 24 Nearest Pages Menus saunivas JONVGIOAV _LNGINJDWNVIN SDIANIddY yNoILaAdY SAV QuvzvH 1H5I14 X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 97 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS GARMI N z In the example shown the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu The FMS Knob ru z ir or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and 2 loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key n nav1 113 08 121 988 com 115 50 sTJ NRST NEAREST VOR 128 200 conz zz 25 u E z a S INFORMATION e het AIRPORT a THE Press the ENT LS Key to Load cu he Frequency i into the NAV EE Standby Field ag Select the VOR Softkey Select the FREQ Softkey lt to Place the Cursoron to Pl
385. se the large FMS Knob to select CANCEL and press the ENT Key DATE TIME The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD Time and date format local 12 hr local 24 hr or UTC are modified on the System Setup Page Universal Coordinated Time UTC also called Greenwich Mean Time GMT or Zulu date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed An offset is provided to add or subtract the desired amount of time hours minutes from UTC to define current local time Configuring the system time 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Time Format field 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection The Time Offset field is highlighted for local time formats 5 Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset HH MM and press the ENT Key to confirm selection 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 33 TERRY V o lt m JJ m S34n1V14 j4V JINVGIOAV 1N3IN359VNVIN SND 8 NE SINJWNYLSNI 1VNOILIQQV QuvzvH 1H5DI14 TANVd Olanv 1H5I14 S32IaN3ddV XIGNI SYSTEM ee LiL o ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS EIS INSTRUMENTS INDEX SYSTEM OVERVIEW DISPLAY UNITS A GARMIN Units
386. set Map Press the TOPO Softkey Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map When topographic data is removed trom the page all navigation data is presented on a black background Displaying removing topographic data TOPO DATA using the Navigation Map Page Menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed The cursor flashes on the Map Setup option Press the ENT Key The Map Setup Menu is displayed Select the Map group Press the ENT Key Highlight the TOPO DATA field Select On or Off Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN MAP SETUP GROUP ORIENTATION AUTO 200M MAX LOOK FWD MIN LOOK FWD TIME OUT LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR WIND VECTOR NAY RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA OBSTACLE DATA FUEL RNG RSV North up TOPO DATA On Off FLIGHT MANAGEMENT MAP SETUP GROUP Map ORIENTATION AUTO 200M MAX LOOK FWD MIN LOOK FWD TIME OUT LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR WIND VECTOR North up NAY RANGE RING 0 TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA OBSTACLE DATA FUEL RNG RSU TOPO DATA Range Figure 5 15 Navigation Map Setup Menu TOPO DATA Setup The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed A NOTE Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the
387. sired altitude then pressing the ENT Key The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it will be used by the system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance DTK TRK ETE 133 388 121 988 cont FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 288 11 COM2 NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN BE ELS ae j ne KMKC KCOS LLI Su o o a gt x HVS LAA Airway V263 TBE LLJ TBE NEN lt E uu Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL cu SE ct Ly as ca CURRENT VNV PROFILE lt a o Ae N amp ACTIVE VNV WPT l BO0rT ot OPSHN 3N o T gt x Press the FPL key ta JAHH view the previous page un T od CNEL VNV VNV f LL lt x Figure 5 120 Direct to Active 12 The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R so it is selected ADDITIONAL FEATURES a Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window APPENDICES INDEX 250 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT b SELECT APPROACH should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5 121 IN31SAS PROCEDURES M3IAH3AO SELECT ARRIVAL SELECT DEPARTURE SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I13 APPROACH ARRIVAL KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL rr DEPARTURE e KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO gt e go Ae Press the PROC key to E view the previous page r Figure 5 121 Procedures Window c Press the ENT Key A list of available approaches for the des
388. ss the ENT Key An Activate vertical Direct to to NNNNNFT at XXXXXX confirmation window is displayed 4 Press the ENT Key Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target VS TGT and or flight path angle FPA in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box Modifying the VS TGT and FPA 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD 2 Press the VNV PROF Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Select VNV Profile Window and press the ENT Key The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box 3 Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS The G950 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical navigation These altitudes are depending on the specific instance manually entered or retrieved from the published altitudes in the navigation database The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures that call for Cross at altitudes If the procedure states Expect to cross at then the altitude is not in the database In this case the altitude may be entered manually zaai KIXD KDFW Di Cross AT isplayed Text or ABOVE Examples 5 000 ft KARLA 227 11 7NH 4 Large White T
389. ssage of the alert AUDIO PANEL amp CNS The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated j 2 annunciation text for aircraft alerts Text color is based on alert level warnings appear in red cautions in vic yellow advisory alerts in white New alerts regardless of priority are displayed at the top of the Annunciation i lt e te Window separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts Once acknowledged they are sequenced based on priority a Annunciation ac Window 25 x Alerts Window TRAFFIC FAILED dI state has failed PFD FAN FAIL PFD display fan D is inoperative FAILED PATH A data path has LEL 19 51 02 Softkey DENT TMR REF NRST A IDENT TMR REF NRST Fa on Figure 2 35 G950 Alerting System ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 70 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude Outer marker reception is indicated in blue middle in yellow and inner in white Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Outer Marker Middle Marker Inner Marker M T 7a ol JJ c m un g m FE d JHU Altimeter E gt amp Figure 2 36 Marker Beacon Annunciations eS A v n
390. stacles and aircraft altitude when os the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display Terrain Proximity uses black yellow and red to represent Ec 5 terrain information relative to aircraft altitude The color of each obstacle is associated with the altitude of the aircraft N Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude Lt Aircraft Altitude Red terrain is above or within 100 ft below 100 ft Threshold the aircraft altitude AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Figure 6 1 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle TEM lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD LL YW lt S x below the aircraft altitude Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude z Table 6 1 Terrain Proximity Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology F Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages zi e PFD Inset Map e Trip Planning Page lt Navigation Map Page e Flight Plan Page 7 e Terrain Proximity Page z Displaying terrain and obstacle information maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page g 1 Press the MAP Softkey for the PFD Inset Map press the INSET Softkey 2 Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data x When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps oth
391. sts MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 terrain database error exists PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 terrain database error exists MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 terrain database missing PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 terrain The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in display Replace terrain card If problem persists the G950 system should be serviced AUDIO PANEL amp CNS The terrain database is present on another LRU but is missing on the specified LRU database missing ou MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 obstacle 7g D The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database Ensure that the data card is properly inserted Replace data card If problem persists the G950 system PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 obstacle souls A database error exists W zz MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 obstacle ya database missing E 3 The obstacle database is present on another LRU but is missing on the specified LRU PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 obstacle database missing MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 airport terrain V PETT P The MFD and or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database Ensure that ef the data card is properly inserted Replace data card If problem persists the G950 PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 airport terrain database error exists MFD1 DB ERR MFD1 airport terrain database missing The airport terrain database is present on another LRU but is missing on the PFD1 DB ERR PFD1 airport terrain specified LRU databas
392. t G m S m s3un1V34 3oNVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI SYSTEM OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FEATURES AVOIDANCE APPENDICES INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct to destination 1 2 3 4 5 5 While navigating an active flight plan press the Direct to Key The Direct to Window is displayed with the active flight plan waypoint as the default selection Turn the small FMS Knob counter clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan Select the desired waypoint Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to Or Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD Select the desired waypoint Press the Direct to Key Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to Any NRST RECENT USER or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct to destination in the Direct to Window Selecting a NRST RECENT USER or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct to destination 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the Direct to Key The Direct to Window is displayed with the active flight plan destination as
393. t KMKC KCOS Selected Flight Plan KICT WICHITA Preview of Selected Flight Plan EE m Stored Flight Plan Info DESTINATION KMCI Departure Airport KLAHOMA CITY j ENROUTE SAFE ALT 4200FT Total Flight Plan Distance OKLAHOMA Press the EPL key to Enroute Safe Altitude 300NM view the previous page a0 MAP NEW ACTIVE INVERT EDIT COPY DELETE IMPORT EXPORT n Dd FPL Editing oftkeys Figure 5 74 Stored Flight Plan Information Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window 1 Press the MENU Key 2 Highlight Store Flight Plan 3 Press the ENT Key 4 With OK highlighted press the ENT Key The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 199 si SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi SORT FLIGHT PLANS ne The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name comment assigned to each flight plan Sorting by flight plan name comment 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page z 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Highlight Sort By Comment and press the ENT Key A c
394. t Lat Long Elev Fuel Available ae Time Zone UTC Offset ez RUNWAYS m 17 35 Runway Information 255512 x 75F Designation Slot he it Length Width Surface Airport Runwa inis Lighting Available D y FREGUENCIES lagram ASOS Rx 118 425 m MULTICOM 122 900 COM NAV Fr eq Info ua 132 500 Identification 122 5650 z Frequency Availability Additional Information gt i AS Softkeys m Figure 5 31 Airport Information Page IDE The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page s gt G m m Usage type Public Military Private or Heliport e Runway surface type Hard Turf Sealed Gravel Dirt Soft Unknown or Water e Runway lighting type No Lights Part Time Full Time Unknown or PCL Freq for pilot controlled lighting JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH COM Availability TX transmit only RX receive only PT part time i additional information available Selecting an airport for review by identifier facility name or location P 1 From the Airport Information Page press the FMS Knob P 2 Usethe FMS Knobs and enter an identifier facility name or location 3 Press the ENT Key az 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor E 5O Selecting a runway aS 1 With the Airport Information Page displayed press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor z 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the RUNWAYS Box on the runway des
395. t SLN TIUE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS Departure KHKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO MCI TIFTO 286 45 8Nh Enroute SLN 240 90 3mm Airway 244 LAA HYS 262 LAA 251 165mm Airway V263 TBE TBE 210 71 1mm Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY1 ALL VS TGT VS REQ ii TIME TO TOD Figure 5 104 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan C Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window Enter the desired entry point for V4 Topeka VOR TOP as shown in Figure 5 105 WAYPOINT INFORMATION PERRY LAK non S Press ENT to accept Figure 5 105 Entering V4 Entry Point 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 241 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s i c m S m s3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLidav SAV QuVzvH XIGNI EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT A GARMIN d Press the ENT Key TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5 106 TIVE FLIGHT PLAN KMKC KCOS Departure KMKC ALL TIFTO2 TIFTO MCI TIFTO Enroute TOP A a Airway 244 LAA HYS LAA Airway 263 TBE 286 146 260 262 Pa 45 4 NH 32 3NM 97 7NM TIME TO TOD EX Figure 5 106 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan e With SLN still highlighted
396. t if the G950 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to calculate a GPS position the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning DR Mode In DR Mode the G950 uses its last known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data when available to calculate and display the aircrafts current estimated position It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G950 in DR Mode may become increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation If while in DR Mode airspeed and or heading data vS is also lost or not available the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and o consequently the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft Estimated 2 m position information displayed by the G950 through DR while there is no heading and or airspeed data available should not be used for navigation DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements needed to determine a position Changes in wind speed and or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy of DR Mode Because of this degraded accuracy other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position awareness until GPS derived position data is restored IDE gt gt c m m DR Mode is indicated on the G950 by the appearance of the letters DR superimposed
397. t Plan Window PFD i 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor not required on the PFD and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight gt the waypoint for the along track offset m i 3 Press the ATK OFST Softkey MFD only or press the MENU Key highlight Create ATK Offset Waypoint and A press the ENT Key a 4 Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of 1 to 99 nm limited by leg distances 5 Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint S X 6 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 205 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT PARALLEL TRACK A GARMIN The Parallel Track PTK feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current flight plan When Parallel Track is activated the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel C LL course and waypoint names have a lower case p placed after the identifier Using direct to loading an approach a holding pattern or editing and activating the flight plan automatically cancels Parallel Track Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120 or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change A NOTE Vertical navigatio
398. t s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 35 SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le ADDITIONAL AFCS HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS APPENDICES INDEX 36 SYSTEM OVERVIEW GARMIN Enabling disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF Changing the arrival alert trigger distance 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box 4 Usethe FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key AUDIO ALERTS The gender of the voice used to announce audio alerts may be set to male or female on the System Setup Page See the Appendices for voice alerts Changing the audio alert voice 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
399. talled The G950 system should be mismatch communication halted COM1 TEMP COM1 over temp Reducing transmitter power AUDIO PANEL amp CNS The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and or COM2 The transmitter operates at reduced power If the problem persists the G950 system E Soe eee ee tame should be serviced E Reducing transmitter power ms COM1 SERVICE COM needs service Return unit for repair The system has detected a failure in COM1 and or COM2 COM1 and or COM2 may COM2 SERVICE COM2 needs still be usable The G950 system should be serviced when possible az service Return unit for repair lt 25 a e The COM1 and or COM2 external push to talk switch is stuck in the enable or b pressed position Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation If the problem persists the G950 system should be serviced 2 dial iPad iin The COM1 and or COM transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed position Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation If the problem persists the G950 system should be serviced COM2 RMT XFR COM2 remote transfer key is stuck LOI GPS integrity lost Crosscheck uod GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight n ia pud Ls of ie Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites navigation Insufficient satellites Bis n p Eyal Gh Loss of GPS navigation due to position error navigation Position
400. ted the G950 System automatically updates the information provided the procedure has not been modified Should an approach departure or arrival procedure no longer be available the flight plan becomes locked until the AUDIO PANEL amp CNS procedure is deleted from the flight plan wi Yu n H HU j g n wl Can sLANT GotF G BE FILED USING THE G950 lt gt G may be filed for a flight plan Non precision GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired w database See the approved Airplane Flight Manual AFM as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual z AIM for more information NA Ng zS Whar Does THE OBS Sorrkev po The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints Activating OBS mode sets the current active to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next N z waypoint in a flight plan When OBS mode is cancelled automatic waypoint sequencing is continued and the G950 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active waypoint dy Normal OBS not activated OBS 25 e Automatic sequencing of waypoints e Manual sequencing holds on selected a 1 waypoint Manual course change on HSI not possible e Manually select course to waypoint from t HSI e Always navigates TO the active waypoint Indicates TO or FROM waypoint Must be in this mode for final appro
401. ted Leg s 3 Not Available A HYS Not Available 9 p Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints Figure 5 98 Trip Planning Page Waypoint Mode ES 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 233 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N zi Selecting automatic or manual page mode A cc nS Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Auto Mode or Manual Mode and press the ENT Key E Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode T ES eS Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Flight Plan Mode or Waypoints 5 Mode and press the ENT Key Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics u 1 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight CUM or REM The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the small FMS Knob to select the desired leg The Inset Map also displays the selected data Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode 1 Press the WPTS Softkey or press the MENU Key highlight Waypoints Mode and press the ENT Key The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field sm LL Z uo o o a gt lt x Le 2 Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint or select from the Page Menu Set WPT to Present Position E if that is what is
402. tes and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing a solution When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution 3D NAV is indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition Satellite Based Augmentation System SBAS status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point When acquisition is complete the solution status changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active SBAS Selection SBAS Softkey is pressed In certain situations such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area it may be desirable to disable WAAS or MSAS although it is not recommended When disabled the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling disabling Disabling WAAS or MSAS l 2 Select the GPS Status Page If necessary press the SBAS Softkey Press the FMS Knob and turn the large FMS Knob to hightlight MSAS or WAAS Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box UJ 4 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor SBAS SELECTION Figure 1 14 Enable Disable SBAS 14 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW RAIM PREDICTION Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM
403. th LOAD highlighted to load the approach procedure or turn the large FMS Knob to gt lt highlight ACTIVATE and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure The system continues navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course the message NOT APPROVED FOR GPS is displayed GPS provides guidance to the approach but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach 228 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT ACTIVATING AN APPROACH A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window M3IAH3AO IN31SAS Activating a previously loaded approach 1 Press the PROC Key The Procedures Window is displayed with Activate Approach highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key to activate the approach SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 In many cases it may be easiest to load the full approach while still some distance away enroute to the destination airport Later if vectored to final use the steps above to select Activate Vector To Final which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final i 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window 2 Highlight ACTIVATE VECTOR TO FINAL and press the ENT Key A Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key a3 1 F
404. the default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active Turn the small FMS Knob counter clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints the FPL list is populated only when navigating a flight plan and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST RECENT USER or AIRWAY waypoints Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to The Direct to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct to navigation If the direct to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages the default waypoint is the active flight plan waypoint if a flight plan is active or a blank waypoint field Direct to requests on any WPT page defaults to the displayed waypoint Selecting any waypoint as a direct to destination 1 2 3 4 Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint Press the Direct to Key to display the Direct to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct to destination Press the ENT Key The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE Press ENT again to activate the direct to Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination
405. the Tecnam P2006T 25 SYSTEM OVERVIEW GARMIN Besides character by character data entry the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier turning the small FMS Knob counter clockwise accesses five different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection flight plan FPL nearest NRST recently entered RECENT user defined USER and airway AIRWAY AIRWAY available when active leg is SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le part of an airway The G950 automatically fills in the identifier facility and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint B Using the FMS Knob to enter data 1 If needed press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor T 2 Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field 3 Begin entering data a To quickly enter a waypoint identifier turn the small FMS Knob counter clockwise to display a list of waypoints in the active flight plan list is titled FPL If desired turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists of other waypoints NRST USER AIRWAY RECENT b Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key Or AUDIO PANEL amp CNS g a Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder Se Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet where appropriate toward the letter Z star
406. the aircraft present position E 1 Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List then press the ENT Key 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Select Use Present Position 4 Press the ENT Key twice The new waypoint s location is saved 5 5 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier bearing and distance If a system generated comment has been edited a new comment can be generated Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment 1 Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List then press the ENT Key 2 Press the MENU Key 3 Select Auto Comment AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT 4 Press the ENT Key The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint A U LL o lt lt The default type of user waypoint normal or temporary can be changed using the user waypoint information page menu Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting NA ze 1 With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed press the MENU Key 2 Move the cursor to select Waypoint Setup and press the ENT Key 3 Select NORMAL or TEMPORARY as desired and press the ENT Key 4 Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the Use
407. the installed AFCS The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude SYSTEM OVERVIEW e Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude shown above the Altimeter changes to black text on a light blue background flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated FLIGHT N m c LLJ ce N e When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds e After reaching the Selected Altitude if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band 200 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated EIS Within 1000 feet Within 200 feet Deviation of 200 feet Figure 2 38 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations AUDIO PANEL amp CNS Z d is LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION A NOTE The Low Altitude Annunciation is only available when WAAS is available O l z E When the Final Approach Fix FAF is the active waypoint in a RNAV GPS approach using vertical guidance x o a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the FAE A black on yellow LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is
408. through the list The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the ENT Key 190 01146 00 Rev A Gs 134kT 15 54 STJ A SA Li 1 Zang ck m yr Ts RT TER jj 1 EN RUNWANZgItA XTW AYER S E CTEKON 1 1 ANGAR DTK 147 WPT AIRPORT INFORMATION CONTROL ALRPORT PROXMM Tap TRK 14 7 ETE 82 08 NORTH UP MOWER e NM DP STAR APR NOTAM CHKLIST o 121 988 com CON2 128 200 PUBLIC PHILIP BILLARD MUN TOPEKA KS N CEN USA N 3904 12 W 95 3 7 35 3a 2rr x 1 FT HARD SURFACE PCL FREQ 118 700 RX 121 275 121 900 121 900 118 700 UNICOM 122 950 CENTER 123 800 FSS 1224501 CLEARANCE GROUND TOWER Figure 4 11 WPT Airport Information Page Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T Selected Airport Identifier and Information Runway Information Press ENT Key to load frequency into PFD COM Standby Field Cursor then advances to the next frequency Select INFO Softkey for AIRPORT RUNWAYS and FREQUENCIES Windows 89 90 GARMIN COM frequencies can also be auto tuned from the NRST Nearest Airspaces NRST Nearest Frequencies and NRST Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key the FMS Knob and the ENT Key 6s 134 ok 14 TRK 14 ETE H2 H8 121 8BB com 13 98 STJ z NRST NEAREST FREQUENCIES 128 200 conz NORTH UP NEAREST ARTCC 1 KANSAS
409. tic MANAGEMENT uu o 19 After passing OPSHN the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5 133 The magenta arrow lt in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active Sm DTK TRK ETE 133 388 121 388 cor mee FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 conz GEE B353FT NORTH UP ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 2 FORI CARS JE uve F RENE KI ALY ALLS m zum Sa GIL KETA Airway V263 TBE E jon BE TIEN j Arrival KCOS TBE DBRY 1 ALL is P PSHN 3hH OPSHN mes TERET CUN FSHER 352 JINA 10100FT PYNON 352 119NH 101BUFT Approach KCOS RNAV 35RePs LPV v HABUK inf A217 SNM sagar FALUR 251 S H segar CEGIX faf 351 GWH 7B8D rT r CURREHT VNV PROFILE gt l ACTIVE VHV WPT S00OFT ot HABUK inf V5 TGT Bl FPM FPA 30 i o US REO __ FPH TIHE TO TOD 11 19 E rm ar Press the FPL key ta aane view the previous puse El aT VIEW VNV PROF CNCL VNV VNV Ex Figure 5 133 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg IDE s gt c m S m 20 The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON see Figure 5 134 At a point 31 nm from the destination airport the phase of flight scaling tor the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying TERM on the HSI A descent to HABUK is in the next leg Note the TOD point on the map Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent as well as the
410. ticular aspect of G950 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in the index contact Garmin see the copyright page or back cover for contact information or a Garmin authorized dealer Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers Whar is WAAS The Wide Area Augmentation System WAAS uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal errors These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances timing and satellite orbit errors It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite The signal SINJINNYLSNI 1H5I14 correction is then broadcast through one of two geostationary satellites This correction information can then i be received by any WAAS enabled GPS receiver WAAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy availability and integrity necessary to enable users to rely on GPS for all phases of flight WAAS is currently available in the United States including Alaska and Hawaii o9 E How poes WAAS AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS Both LNAV VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of WAAS to include vertical glide path guidance capability The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to an expanded number of airports throughout the U S 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities LPV approac
411. tination airport is displayed as in Figure 5 122 IDE s gt G m S m AIRPORT RCS Al Prd m APPROACH RNAV 35RGPS LPV JINVGIOAV QuVZvH I G IT RW35R mop OAL we xz LOAD on ACTIVATE gt S ea 30 RE Figure 5 122 List of Available Approaches z d Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5 122 A Ur z i m gt lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 251 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N i T TE e zu e Press the ENT Key A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5 123 o o Z AIRPORT CO P PUBLIC CITY OF COLORADO SPRINGS YT CoL DORADO SPRINGS CO APPROACH CHANNEL CHANNEL 97799 ID W35A 25 APPROACH hra ES RNAV S35Rops LPW 2 TRANSITION e Lt SEQUENCE HABUK inf FALUR CEGIX fof RW35R map LOAD oR ACTIVATE Figure 5 123 List of Available Transitions AUDIO PANEL amp CNS f Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition In this case the Initial Approach Fix IAF at HABUK is used g Press the ENT Key h Barometric Minimums Figure 5 124 To set MINIMUMS turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO and press the ENT Key Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude and press the ENT Key Or To skip setting minimums press the ENT Key FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIO
412. ting at EE K and the digits zero through nine Afterwards turning the knob counter clockwise scrolls in the opposite gt direction s b Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field cc SE C Repeat using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor until the 2a field is complete d Press the ENT Key to confirm entry 7 Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry the field reverts back to its previous information W ef za os as eu lt x c a zi 2S a 26 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW PAGE GROUPS TERRY V o lt m JJ m A NOTE Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot s Guide for details on specific pages Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function The page group and active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen below the Navigation Status Box In the bottom right corner of the screen the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom Number of pages available in the group are displayed in a list above the page groups The current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan For some of these pages Airport Procedures Weather Information Procedure Loading the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same SINIWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Page Gro
413. tion Map Page 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 275 NE SIN3IAQHISNI M3IAS3A0 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV 1N3IAN35VNVIA 1H5I13 gt lt i gt A m IO FA S3un1V13 SADIGNAddV IVNOILIGAV S21V X31GNI SYSTEM OVERVIEW FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL EIS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT amp CNS INSTRUMENTS HAZARD Ll W lt q S a ADDITIONAL FEATURES AFCS APPENDICES INDEX HAZARD AVOIDANCE GARMI N The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling disabling display of traffic The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data symbols and labels are decluttered from the display If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected the data is removed from the map Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page Displaying traffic information PFD Inset Map 1 Press the INSET Softkey 2 Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map TRFC 1 3 Press the softkey again to display the trattic only inset TRFC 2 4 Press the softkey again to remove traffic data Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page 1 Select the Navigation Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key 3 With Map Setup highlighted press the ENT Key Figure 6 9 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Ke
414. tkey If Altitude Mode is selected a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information ADDITIONAL FEATURES ALT Mode Mode C Altitude FTP ee cm Reporting a Se ALERTS Figure 4 33 Altitude Mode gt lt E 104 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN REPLY STATUS When the transponder sends replies to interrogations a white R indication appears momentarily in the reply status field of the Transponder Data Box Reply to Interrogation KPOR 1200 ALT R LOL 20 23 13 Figure 4 34 Reply Indication ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE Entering a transponder code with softkeys 1 2 3 Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys for digit entry Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field When entering the code the next softkey in sequence must be selected within 10 seconds or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code Selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered the transponder code becomes active Entering a Code LCL 28 2 7 53 XPDR E ALT ZENTREN ALERTS Fi
415. to 25 nearest VOR stations in three a boxes labeled NEAREST VOR INFORMATION and FREQUENCY The list only includes waypoints that vS are within 200 nm 2 A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR Up to eleven VORs are visible at a m time If there are more than can be shown each list can be scrolled If there are no VORs in the list text indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed If there are no nearest VORs in the list the information is dashed IDE s gt G m m Nearest VOR Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR 17 88 ToP ss 15 58 stu NORTH US ieee KSTU JINVGIOAV QuVZvH VOR Identifier Symbol Bearing Distance to VOR from aircraft position S21V INFORMATION 2 VOR Information LES Facility Name City M Class Magnetic Variation i Lat Long FREQUENCY S34n1V33 1VNOILIQQV y VOR Frequency ata SADIGNAddV ILOBEKA MAP VOR FREQ Figure 5 41 Nearest VOR Page X31GNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 163 EIS FLIGHT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW AUDIO PANEL amp CNS FLIGHT Lid LL o lt lt ADDITIONAL HAZARD APPENDICES FEATURES AFCS AVOIDANCE INDEX FLIGHT MANAGEMENT USER WAYPOINTS A GARMIN The G950 can create and store up to 1
416. to change this setting Table 1 1 Display Units Settings System Status Page 34 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T Airspeed Indicator True Airspeed PFD Wind speed vector Map range Traffic Page Terrain Page CDI scaling System Setup Fuel range calculation EIS Altimeter Vertical Speed Indicator VNV altitudes Active Flight Plan Engine Indication System EIS Engine Indication System EIS 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW AIRSPACE ALERTS The Airspace Alert feature provides a message alert when the aircraft is approaching or near a controlled or special use airspace The altitude buffer setting increases the range above or below an airspace for which an alert is generated the default value is 200 feet Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on off from ERR VS o lt m JJ m 2 the System Setup Page lt i T So e Class B TMA e Class D MOA Military m Class C TCA Restricted Other airspaces m Turning Airspace Alerts off does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page Turning an airspace alert on or off 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor vS 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box a3 4 Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airs
417. to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed When power is cycled messages are retained until deleted and message timer countdown is restarted Entering a scheduler message go 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX Utility Page 2 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor E 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field 4 Usethe FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key 5 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type 1N3IAN359VNVIN 1H5DI14 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type e Event Message issued at the specified date time e One time Message issued when the message timer reaches zero default setting JINVGIOAV QuVZvH e Periodic Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero 7 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field 8 For periodic and one time message use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value HHH MM SS from which to a countdown and press the ENT Key 9 For event based messages a Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date DD MMM YYY and press the ENT Key zS b Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field Jz c Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time HH
418. to reach the end of the selected leg Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg REM ENDUR This value is calculated by taking the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg gt Fuel required for trip FUEL REQ This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel z E flow aL Total range at entered fuel flow TOTAL RANGE This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel endurance by the ground speed OTHER STATISTICS These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs Density altitude DENSITY ALT True airspeed TRUE AIRSPEED IDE s i c m m JINVGIOAV QuVZzvH The pilot may select automatic AUTO or manual MANUAL page mode and flight plan FPL or waypoint WPTS mode In automatic page mode only the FPL LEG or waypoint IDs are editable based on FPL WPTS selection Selected Flight Plan NN FPL A LEG REM Selected Leg s 00 is Active FPL Stored Flight Plan ui 01 99 are Stored FPLs P PUS gt KCOS CUM Beginning to End of FPL NN Beginning to End of Selected Leg Active Flight Plan Starting and Ending Waypoint of REM Pres Pos to End of FPL no Selected Flight Plan Segment NN Pres Pos to End of Selected Leg gt z So m A n gt Figure 5 97 Trip Planning Page Flight Plan Mode t gt Selected Flight Plan cm OS cen CUM Selec
419. transponder equipped aircraft within the coverage volume The G950 5i System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7 5 nm radius from 3 000 feet below to 3 500 feet above the as requesting aircraft m The main difference between the Traffic Information System TIS and Traffic Advisory TAS or Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems TCAS is the source of surveillance data TAS TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half second update rate while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to provide a five second update rate TIS and TAS TCAS have similar ranges 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5I14 TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar system which is a secondary surveillance radar system similar to that used by ATCRBS Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance Information provided by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions VMC While TIS is a useful aid for visual traffic avoidance system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use No recommended avoidance maneuvers are given nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory JINVGIOAV QuVZvH TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering gt A TIS is dependent on two way line of sight communications between the aircraft
420. uVZvH Figure 1 34 Navigation Status Box MFD GPS CDI E The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course Deviation Indicator CDI when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system value for the CDI scale The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side The default setting is mS Auto refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on CDI scaling zE 29 If a lower CDI scale setting is selected i e 1 0 or 0 3 nm the higher scale settings are not selected during as any phase of flight Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase gt Y Changing the selected GPS CDI setting 5 A 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page on the MFD o 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box z x 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting 2 nm 1 nm 0 3 nm Auto and press the ENT Key 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 37 A SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 GARMIN COM CONFIGURATION The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le Changing COM channel spac
421. udes the Audio Panel communication radios navigation radios and Mode S transponder The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 CNS operation in the G950 is performed by the following Line Replacement Units LRUS SI3 Primary Flight Display PFD Audio Panel Multifunction Display MFD Mode S Transponder ntegrated Avionics Unit 2 The MFD PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection The Audio Panel includes an intercom system ICS between the pilot copilot and passengers a marker beacon system and a COM clearance recorder Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called Master Avionics Squelch MASQ When no audio is detected MASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display PFD The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box The data box displays the active four digit code mode and a reply status Figure 4 1 S34n1V313 j4V JINVGIOAV 1VNOILIQQV QuvVZzvH S32IaN3ddV XIGNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecna
422. unt of memory used and the amount of memory available are shown at SYSTEM gt oc LLI ES le E the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled Pilot Profile From here pilot profiles may be created selected renamed or deleted E Creating a profile 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page a 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight CREATE in the Pilot Profile Box 4 Press the ENT Key A Create Profile window is displayed 5 Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key Pilot profile names cannot begin with a blank as the first letter AUDIO PANEL amp CNS 6 In the next field use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults default profile settings initially based on Garmin 2 factory defaults unless edited by the pilot or current system settings E 7 Press the ENT Key 8 With CREATE highlighted press the ENT Key to create the protile T Or E Use the large FMS Knob to select CREATE and ACTIVATE and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile 9 To cancel the process select CANCEL with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key Selecting an active profile V 1 Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX System Setup Page 2 Press the FMS Knob momenta
423. up Active Page Title a MFD gt S E aL m a Pages in Current Group INJINAJDVNVIN 1H5I13 PEN wee Cote crc ceccccccces Page Groups JINVGIOAV QuVZvH Figure 1 25 Page Title and Page Groups The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob specific pages within each group can vary depending on the configuration of optional equipment a Selecting a page using the FMS Knob 1 Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups continue turning the large FMS Knob until the _ gt desired page group is selected Se a 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specitic page group ne There are also several pages Airport Procedures Weather Information pages which are selected first from 2 within a main page group with the FMS Knob then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page In gt this case the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is selected even if a different m page group is selected 2 2 i S lt 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 27 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 0000000000000 GARMIN Map Page Group MAP SYSTEM wet 11S BE 117 88 Ties wor 11550 2 ce TT gt Navigation Map Traffic Map Terrain Proximity FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS EIS NTI Figure 1 26 Map Pages AUDIO PANEL amp CNS j g z Waypoint Page Group WPT no bp ToS Ton T bur Ls e Au ei l
424. uration When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation the identifier is placed in the Timer References Window on the PFD The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters No space is needed when entering Flight ID When a Flight ID contains a space the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry If configuration is set to SAME AS TAIL the aircraft tail number will always be displayed SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 Entering a Flight ID SI3 1 Select the TMR REF Softkey to display the Timer References Window 2 Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor if not already activated 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID 4 Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID 5 Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry The word updating appears until the new entry is completed go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV If an error is made during Flight ID entry pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry While entering a Flight ID turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent of rotation If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation reenter the correct Flight ID using the same procedure 1N3IA359VNVIN 1H5DI14 REFERENCES TIMER 0 00 50 UP STOP Vy S UKT OFF JINVGIOAV QuvVZzvH MINIMUMS OFF T MESI FLIGHT ID AIR268 PFD Entry S21V Figure 4 39 Timer References
425. used E e Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan zi e FLIGHT PLAN CREATION There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan a Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD create modity the active flight plan e Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD create modify the active flight plan e Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD create modify a stored flight plan Non Active Flight Plan Leg Active Flight Plan Leg LLI Su o o a gt x T 134kr o AN trK 47 SERERE 133 300 121 900 com 15 50 sts sp ACKIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 200 COM2 Active FPL Waypoint List z KMKC KCOS Cone Procedure Header 9 Waypoint Identifier zZ v Airway Identifier TIFTO o ee Desired Track to Waypoint TART Distance to Waypoint TOP A Waypoint Altitude Constraint INH LL as Airway V4 SLN ce q SLN 97 7NM _____ Xo Airway V244 LAA a HYS 262 77 7NM _____ LAA IESMM E T oO i ee LIP VNV WPT FT E lt G Passing E Vertical Navigation Profile _____FPM TIMETOTOD Active Vertical WPT AIt ID PEPE Vertical Speed Target Flight Path Angle Press the FPL key to Vertical Speed Target T ZU view the previous puse Time to Top of Descent nn Vertical Deviation Figure 5 53 Active Flight Plan Page ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 182 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A A GARMIN FLIGHT MANAGEME
426. uts is as follows Departure time DEP TIME This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode The computations are from the aircraft present position so the aircraft is always just departing Calibrated airspeed CALIBRATED AS The primary source is from the air data system and the secondary source of information is GPS ground speed Indicated altitude IND ALTITUDE The primary source is the barometric altitude and the secondary source of information is GPS altitude 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 23 NE SINJWNYLSNI M3IAYJAO 1H5I13 IN31SAS SND 8 TANVd OIGNV IDE s gt G m S m S3un1V34 3ONVGIOAV S39IaN3ddV aWNolLIdav SAV QuvzvH X31GNI FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N oe TRIP STATISTICS q E The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning inputs In flight plan mode FPL with a stored flight plan selected NN and the entire flight plan CUM selected z the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan F In flight plan mode FPL with a stored flight plan selected NN and a specific leg NN selected the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg In flight plan mode FPL with the active flight plan selected 00 and the remaining flight plan REM v selected the trom waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and
427. vent based messages F a Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date DD MM YY and press the ENT Key b Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field C Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time HH MM and press the ENT Key oe 10 Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message z Deleting a scheduler message 1 Select the AUX Utility Page x 2 Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted 4 Press the CLR Key to clear the message text If the CLR Key is pressed again the message is restored 5 Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD When a scheduler message is waiting the ALERTS Soitkey label changes to ADVISORY Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler message The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed the Alerts Window is removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue AUDIO PANEL amp CNS wan 1608 80 117 95 ors ERG 36 975 118 808 com Neu 117 95 35 3 75 rem FLIGHT MANAGEMENT ALERTS SCHEDULER 10 I MN ez HAZARD AVOIDANCE AFCS Figure 8 6 PFD Alerts Window E zu Sc i EL Ow lt x APPENDICES INDE
428. verview Section for more information on Reversionary Mode DISPLAY BACKUP Figure 4 49 Display Backup Button 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 115 M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 SI3 go Le ue S3un1V34 J9NVdIOAV LN3W3DVNVIA S3oIaN3ddV 4vwoOILQGV S23V QuvzvH 1H5I14 T3INVd Oldnv X31QNI GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 SI3 SND 8 T3NVd Olanv 1N3IAN35VNVIN 1H5DI14 BLANK PAGE JINVGIOAV QuVZVH S21V S 34n1V313 1VNOILIQQV S32IaN3ddV X3QNI 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT M3IAH3AO IN31SAS 5 1 INTRODUCTION The G950 is an integrated flight engine communication navigation and surveillance system This section of the Pilots Guide explains flight management using the G950 SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 The most prominent part of the G950 are the full color displays one Primary Flight Display PFD and a Multi Function Display MFD The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is displayed on the PFD and the MFD See examples in the Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 Detailed descriptions of flight management functions are discussed later in this section d A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providi
429. view the previous page m E BEL NETT NC CN NN ECC UE m ACtiVvate Leg Softkey E 5O Figure 5 81 Active Flight Plan Page Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint aS gt gt U U m e m un z J m 2x 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 209 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GARMI N 17 88 TOP cs DTK TRE ETE 133 360 121 988 com uS 15 50 FPL ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 128 288 UB cone Parr Due M ud o EMKC KCOS Enroute WwW TOP Airway V4 SL MN Lu SLN o Airway V244 L AA New Active Te V Flight Plan Leg SIN TEE 2 71 1NH Airway V244 LAA Arrival KICOS TBEDBRY 1 4LL HYS OPSHN 360 738HH HYS CURRENT VNV PROFILE ma ACTIVE VMV WPT F o o wm o2 NN w O wJNV DNI dc MN FPH FPA ACTIVATES FPH TIHE TO TOD i FT e UNITED STATES Od wt Confirmation Window EU gt MAP NEW WPT VIEW CHEL VNV ATK OFST ACT LEG as a z Figure 5 82 Active Flight Plan Page New Active Leg S lt x INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN Any flight plan may be inverted reversed for navigation back to the original departure point FLIGHT A U LL o lt lt Inverting the active flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page MFD or the Active Flight Plan Window PFD gez 2 Press the MENU Key highlight Invert Flight Plan and press the ENT Key An Invert Active Flight Plan 25 confirmation window is displayed
430. w approach to a different airport press the Direct to Key and select the desired airport using the FMS Knobs Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport ADDITIONAL FEATURES N Lu e Lu e e lt INDEX 324 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN APPENDIX E GENERAL TIS INFORMATION M3IAH3AO IN31SAS A NOTE Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS NOTE TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during instrument meterorlogical conditions IMC or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft SIN3IAFTHISNI 1H5I14 The Traffic Information Service TIS provides traffic advisory information to non TAS TCAS equipped aircraft TIS is a ground based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode A and Mode C transponder a equipped aircraft within a specified service volume The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to generate traffic notification The G950 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page as well as on the PFD Inset Map Surveillance data includes all
431. wing types of airspaces Class B TMA Class C TCA Class D Restricted MOA Military Other Airspace Air Defense Interdiction Zone ADIZ and Temporary Flight Restriction TFR NORTH UP MOA Military Class D Airspace Restricted Area WX mew Class B Airspace o KANSAS CAIN a TFR MAP POINTER i PETES 5121H 1868 ELEV S FT HiS 15 54 NORTH UP AUS I Class C Airspace Alert Area P lt WITONIA ADIZ Warning Area DCLTR Figure 5 45 Airspaces The Nearest Airspaces Page Airspace Alerts Window and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled special use airspace message alerts on or off This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page It simply turns on off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT An altitude buffer is also provided which expands the vertical range above or below an airspace For example if the buffer is set at 500 feet and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above below an airspace an alert message is not generated but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above below an airspace and projected to enter it the pilot is notified with an alert m
432. y Figure 6 10 5 Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections Figure 6 11 e TRAFFIC Turns the display of traffic data on or off e TRAFFIC MODE Selects the traffic mode for display select trom All Traffic Displays all traffic TA ONLY Displays Traffic Alerts only e TRAFFIC SMBL Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown e TRAFFIC LBL Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off 6 Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product ON OFF range settings etc 7 Press the ENT Key to select an option 8 Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings 216 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMI N HAZARD AVOIDANCE PAGE MENU MAP SETUP TRAFFIC Off TRAFFIC MODE All Traffic TRAFFIC SMBL 15 NM CANM Press the FMS CRSR knob to TRAFFIC LBL SUN return to base page Figure 6 9 Navigation Map Page Menu MAP SETUP Press the FMS CRSR knob to return to base page Figure 6 10 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Figure 6 11 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Traffic Group 190 01146 00 Rev A Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 211 SND 8 NE SINJINNYLSNI M3IAH3AO TANVd OIGNV 1H5I13 IN31SAS I1N3IA359VNVIA 1H5I13 IO FA gt lt Oo gt A m S34n1V33 S329IlaN3ddV IVNOILIGGY SAV
433. y the Pilot FLIGHT MANAGEMENT HAZARD AVOIDANCE COM2 Radio is Used by the Copilot AFCS Figure 4 45 Split COM Operation ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 112 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN AUDIO PANEL AND CNS ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS M3IAH3AO IN31SAS NOTE Music and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off Audio level for the crew and passengers can be adjusted by a Garmin authorized service center The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs Musicl and Music2 The pilot and copilot hear Musicl and the passengers hear Music2 These inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players Two 3 5 mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in convenient locations for audio connection The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the Musicl or Music2 jacks SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I14 SI3 The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input see Table 4 1 CREW MUSIC Crew music Musicl can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS Annunciators are extinguished Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated go Le ue TANVWd OIGNV Music Mutine Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker
434. z lt EMPTY 95 FLIGHT PLAN EXPORTING FLIGHT PLAN EXPORTING Export stored flight plan 4 to file name Export stored flight plan 4 to file name lt KMKC KCOS oOo u KMKC KCOS ao e 0005 Fpl KMKC KCOS un W Li t ADDITIONAL FEATURES DEPARTURE KIXD TOTAL DISTANCE 676NHM DESTINATION KMCI DESTINATION KMCI 2 ENROUTE SAFE ALT TOTAL DISTANCE 676NM TOTAL DISTANCE 676NM ENROUTE SAFE ALT ENROUTE SAFE ALT e Press the FPL key to E view the previous page Press the FPL key to Press the FPL key to l COPY DELETE IMPORT EXPORT view the previous page view the previous page Import Export Softkeys Stored Flight Plan to be Exported amp Export Successful Exported Flight Plan Name is Figure 5 57 Flight Plan Export 186 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN tic MANAGEMENT ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan Choose the flight plan select the desired point of insertion enter the waypoint and it is added in front of the selected waypoint Flight plans are limited to 99 waypoints including waypoints within airways and procedures If the number of waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 99 the message Flight plan is full Remove unnecessary waypoints appears and the new waypoint s are not added to the flight plan M3IAH3AO IN31SAS SINJWNYLSNI 1H5I13 Gs DTK TRK ETE 133 300 121 980 com
435. ze display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions In normal display mode backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD In Reversionary Mode it can be adjusted from the remaining display s 3 Adjusting display backlighting manually lt 1 Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu AUTO is now highlighted next to PFD DSPL No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed Pressing the MENU Key while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu 2 Turn the small FMS Knob to select MANUAL and press the ENT Key The intensity value is now highlighted 3 Usethe FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight AUTO next to MFD DSPL and repeat steps 2 4 5 To remove the menu press the CLR or MENU Key ADDITIONAL APPENDICES FEATURES INDEX 4 Garmin G950 Pilot s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T 190 01146 00 Rev A GARMIN SYSTEM OVERVIEW Adjusting key backlighting manually 1 Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu AUTO is now highlighted next to PFD DSPL 2 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight PFD DSPL 3 Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display PFD KEY 4 Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight AUTO 5 Turn the small FMS Knob to select MANUAL and press the ENT Key The intensity value is now highlighted 6 Usethe FMS Kno

Garmin 2006T Pilot's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents